Floating Action Bar The Floating Action Bar is your go to spot for quick actions in awork. This handy floating action bar sits at the bottom of your screen . It adapts to what you're doing right now a
Floating Action Bar The Floating Action Bar is your go to spot for quick actions in awork. This handy floating action bar sits at the bottom of your screen . It adapts to what you're doing right now and gives you the relevant tools you need to work efficiently in every view. [!IMPORTANT] The Floating Action Bar bundles Search, awork AI, Quick Actions, and Timer plus actions specific to your current context. Open Search Click on the magnifying glass icon in the action bar to start searching. Start awork AI Assistant Click on the bot icon (tooltip: "awork AI") in the action bar to launch the AI assistant from any view. Create New Items Click on the plus symbol in the action bar. A creation panel opens up with the following options: New Project Create a new project New Task Create a new task New Time Log a time entry New Client Add a new client Start the Timer Click on the purple play button (tooltip: "Start Timer") in the Floating Action Bar to start the timer. A selection window opens where you can search for time entries, projects, or tasks. In the modal that opens, you'll see three tabs: Recent , Project , and Task . Under "Recent" you'll find entries you've used recently. Select the item you want to start the timer for. The Floating Action Bar in Timeline View 1. Multiple Selection: Select multiple items in the timeline to run actions on them: Autofix , Edit with AI , Move , Change Status , Add/Remove Assignee , Delete . 2. Zoom In or Out on the Timeline Click on the magnifying glass with plus (tooltip: "Zoom in") to zoom in on the timeline Click on the magnifying glass with minus (tooltip: "Zoom out") to zoom out and see a larger time span 3. Jump to Today Click on the calendar icon with the tooltip "Jump to today" to automatically center the timeline on today's date.
Sign up for awork Here's how to quickly and easily sign up for awork. [!IMPORTANT] Start with a free 14 day trial . Test awork thoroughly with your team. No credit card required to sign up. How does s
Sign up for awork Here's how to quickly and easily sign up for awork. [!IMPORTANT] Start with a free 14 day trial . Test awork thoroughly with your team. No credit card required to sign up. How does signing up for awork work? 1. Go to www.awork.com or app.awork.com/login. 2. Click on Sign up . 3. Follow the signup process. [!WARNING] There are no costs involved and you don't need a credit card. Sign up via Google or Microsoft You can sign up with your email address and a password or through your Google or Microsoft account. When signing up, choose Sign up with Google or Sign up with Microsoft . You'll be automatically redirected to login. If you signed up via Google or Microsoft, you'll need to use that provider to log in going forward. [!NOTE] You can also link your awork account to Google or Microsoft later, or remove the link if you want to. FAQ Are there any costs for registration? There are no costs. You can use the awork trial version for free for 14 days. Can I sign up with my Google or Microsoft account? Yes, you can sign up either using your email address or your Google or Microsoft account.
System Requirements for awork Operating Systems awork runs in your browser and is optimized for the latest Windows and macOS systems. While awork can basically be used on older systems, we recommend k
System Requirements for awork Operating Systems awork runs in your browser and is optimized for the latest Windows and macOS systems. While awork can basically be used on older systems, we recommend keeping your devices up to date so you can benefit from the latest security and performance improvements. Your system should have at least a quad core processor with 1.6 GHz or faster , 8 GB of RAM , and 500 MB of free SSD storage space to ensure optimal performance and responsiveness. Supported Browsers Make sure you're using the latest version of one of the following browsers: Chrome Edge Safari Firefox The following browser features should be enabled: JavaScript Cookies Local storage and session storage Hardware acceleration [!NOTE] Note: Browser plugins or extensions especially ad blockers and firewall tools can impact performance. Connection Requirements Stable internet connection (10 Mbit/s or faster recommended) VPNs, firewalls, or proxies must not block domains or URLs used by awork or third party providers, as well as real time connections (WebSockets, Long Polling) Network and Firewall Settings Make sure your network allows connections to our services and third party services that awork needs to operate: Allow Allow WebSockets and HTTPS (TLS 1.2 or higher) Allow the following domains (subject to change): , , , , Desktop App The desktop app supports Windows 10 and 11, as well as macOS 13 (Ventura) and newer. At least 8 GB of RAM At least 500 MB of SSD storage space [!WARNING] The macOS app comes in two versions: One for Intel x64 processors and one for Apple M series processors (since 2020). Make sure you download the right version to avoid performance issues. Learn more about the desktop app. Mobile App Android 7.0 (Nougat) and newer. iOS 14 and newer. Learn more about the mobile app.
Workspaces in awork A workspace gives you a separate digital work environment where your data stays isolated, allowing organizations to manage their projects and team members. With your awork account,
Workspaces in awork A workspace gives you a separate digital work environment where your data stays isolated, allowing organizations to manage their projects and team members. With your awork account, you can be a user in multiple workspaces . You can switch between different workspaces using your account menu in the bottom left of the main navigation. How to create and set up a workspace 1. Sign up: When you sign up for awork for the first time (https://app.awork.com/), you'll create a new workspace. You can create additional workspaces by going to Sign up for free New sign up . 2. Configure: You can name your workspace and customize it however you like. Go to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Workspace to change your workspace name and logo. Starting with the Professional plan , you can also customize your workspace URL (subdomain). 1) Licenses: Each workspace comes with its own plan. Licenses apply to the entire workspace and must be booked separately for each workspace. 2) Invite users: If you have the necessary permissions, you can invite additional users. If a user already has an awork account and uses the same email address for the invitation, the same account will be used. Deleting your workspace If you no longer need your awork workspace, you can delete it at the bottom of Settings Workspace . After you confirm the deletion, you'll receive an email to verify this action. If your active subscription has been cancelled or your trial period has expired, you can delete the workspace through the booking window. Click Book now Options Delete workspace . [!WARNING] Note: To delete your workspace, you must first log into awork before clicking the confirmation link in the email. [!CAUTION] Important: All workspace data will be permanently deleted . Make sure to export anything you still need.
Booking awork How can I book awork? You can book awork super easily directly in the tool after you've created a free trial account. [!WARNING] The trial period runs for 14 days and is not automaticall
Booking awork How can I book awork? You can book awork super easily directly in the tool after you've created a free trial account. [!WARNING] The trial period runs for 14 days and is not automatically extended. To continue using awork, you'll need to add payment information and select a plan. Booking process 1. Log into your trial account Open your existing awork trial account. 2. Click on "Buy now" The button is visible to all admins on your account and can be found: Directly in the top navigation menu (e.g., "Buy now") In your user menu under "Manage subscription" 3. Choose your plan and number of users Select a plan (e.g., Standard, Professional, etc.) Specify the number of licenses 4. Enter your billing information Company details Payment method (credit card or direct debit) 5. Confirm and book After entering your information, click on "Book" to start your awork subscription. What payment methods are available? Credit card SEPA direct debit Invoice payment (only available for Enterprise plans upon request) Important booking information What happens after I book? Your trial account will be converted to a regular account. All your existing data and settings will be preserved. You'll receive an invoice via email afterwards. Can I add more users later? Yes you can add more users at any time through license management. You'll be charged proportionally for the remaining time of your current billing period. FAQ Can I extend the trial period? Yes, that's possible! If you need a bit more time after the 14 days to test awork with your team and make a decision, feel free to reach out to us at sales@awork.com or book a free consultation session with us. Do I have to book awork right after the trial period? No you can book during or after the trial period ends. However, if you don't book after the trial period expires, your trial account will be deactivated. What happens to my data after the trial period? Your data will be retained even after the trial period ends, and you can continue with the same work status after booking. If you want to permanently delete all your data, you can find instructions here. Who can book awork for the company? Only administrators of your awork account have access to the booking function. Do I get a booking confirmation? Yes you'll receive a confirmation via email and your first invoice as soon as the booking is complete. Can I change my payment information after booking? Yes you can update your billing information and payment method at any time in the "Manage subscription" section. Is there a free version of awork? No awork doesn't offer a free plan like some other services do.
Your Trial Has Ended What's Next? This article explains how you can continue using awork after your trial period ends so you can keep accessing all features. [!IMPORTANT] Upgrade to the paid version t
Your Trial Has Ended What's Next? This article explains how you can continue using awork after your trial period ends so you can keep accessing all features. [!IMPORTANT] Upgrade to the paid version to continue using all features. How to Book awork 1. Log in to awork. 2. During your trial period: Click the Book awork button in the header of your dashboard. 3. After your trial period ends: Click the Book awork button in the middle of the screen. 4. Choose a plan: Basic Standard Professional Enterprise (Get in touch with us at <u sales@awork.com</u ) [!IMPORTANT] <u Here</u you'll find all the details about the plans and how they differ. We're also happy to advise you during a <u free consultation call</u ! 1. Select your billing cycle: Monthly (cancel anytime) Yearly (cancel at the end of 12 months) Two yearly (cancel at the end of 24 months) 2. Set the number of users you need: Book at least as many users as are active in your workspace. You can add more users anytime. 3. Click Book Now. 4. Enter your billing address (you'll receive your invoice by email from us). 5. Choose your preferred payment method: Credit card Direct debit Bank transfer (only available in the Enterprise plan) 6. Review your information and accept our Terms and Conditions . 7. Click Pay and Subscribe to book your awork subscription. [!IMPORTANT] Important: Only a user with admin rights can book awork. Rest assured that all your data will be preserved. Keep Your Workspace Without a Subscription for Later You can leave your account without a subscription for now, but you won't have access to your data . This gives you time to subscribe later whenever you're ready. All your data stays safe. Delete Your Workspace If awork doesn't meet your needs, you can permanently delete your account. Make sure to follow these steps: 1. Log in to awork. 2. Click Book Now. 3. Select a plan (Basic, Standard, or Professional) and click Book Now . 4. Click Edit at the bottom and then Delete Workspace . 5. The workspace creator receives an email confirming the deletion of the data. [!CAUTION] Warning: All workspace data will be permanently deleted. Make sure to export anything you still need. FAQ How long does my account stay active without a subscription? Your account stays active indefinitely without a subscription as long as you don't delete it yourself. Can I subscribe anytime? Yes, you can subscribe anytime and your data will be preserved. However, you won't have access to your data until you book your subscription . What happens to my data if I delete my account? Your data will be completely deleted after 30 days.
Create Your First Project What is a project in awork? In awork, work is organized into projects and users are assigned to work on those projects. Each project has a status that shows whether the proje
Create Your First Project What is a project in awork? In awork, work is organized into projects and users are assigned to work on those projects. Each project has a status that shows whether the project is currently running, hasn't started yet, or is already completed. Within a project, you can create and edit tasks as well as track time. In the project overview, you can see all running, planned, and completed projects along with the responsible users, progress, and more. Create a new project Click the purple action button in the top right of the app header and select New Project . A popup will open where you can enter a name and description for your project as well as set additional information. You can add or change all of this information later as well. To add information to your project, click the Add Details button or use slash commands. You'll find a list of available slash commands at the bottom of the screen. Next, click Continue . You'll now be taken to the project template selection. After that, your project will be created and you'll be automatically redirected to the project. You'll now find your project in the project overview and, depending on your filter settings, also on your dashboard. Project status in awork Every project always has a status. It's always one of four base categories: Not Started (blue), Running (yellow), Completed (green), or Blocked (red). While you can customize the exact status name and the order in which a project should progress through statuses in the project settings, the four base categories are mandatory. Important ☝️: The special thing about awork is that often only running projects, meaning projects in the yellow status, are taken into account. For example, under My Tasks , only tasks from running projects are displayed. Similarly, for time tracking, only running projects are suggested. If you want to get started right away with your new project, change the status to Running . With or without a customer? You can assign a customer to your project or create a new customer during project creation. This helps you group your projects by customer or keep projects better organized. A well maintained project overview with customer logos just looks fantastic. Invite your team Are you still working on your project alone? Then invite your team right away so you can work on the project together. If you've already invited other users to awork, just add them to your project either during project creation or through the project details in the project itself. If you're still the only one in awork, go to the left through the main menu to Users Invite Users and invite your team to awork first before you can assign them to the project. Create and assign tasks Tasks are the heart of every project. In the Tasks tab of a project, you have three different views available to organize your work: The List View : Great for initial structure and creating new tasks. The Board View: For agile work. Each column represents a status. The Timeline View: For time based and dependent planning with milestones. By clicking on a task, you'll go to the task details where you can add due dates, assignees, subtasks, briefings, files, comments, and more. Learn more about Tasks in Projects. What else can a project do? Upload and share files Within a project, there's a Files tab. Here you can upload files or link them from your OneDrive or Google Drive. All files from your project's tasks will also be displayed here, and you can group them by file type or task, for example. Learn more about Files in Projects. Make project progress visible You can visualize project progress in different ways. 1. You set a time budget for your project and track time on the project or the project's tasks. 2. You measure progress based on completed tasks or all tasks. Learn more about Budgets & Progress. Create tasks from emails In the Settings tab of your project, you'll find a project specific email address at the bottom. When you send an email to this address, an awork task will automatically be created in that exact project. Learn more about Creating Tasks from Emails. Automate project workflows In the Settings tab of your project, you can set up automations for your project to trigger automatic actions. Example: When a new task is created, assign the "Project Owner" as the assignee. Learn more about Automations.
Workflows Workflows let you define a reusable process once and apply it everywhere. Statuses, automations, and task custom fields stay in sync across all projects that use the same workflow. Changes a
Workflows Workflows let you define a reusable process once and apply it everywhere. Statuses, automations, and task custom fields stay in sync across all projects that use the same workflow. Changes are automatically applied to all linked projects. Key benefits and use cases Process standardization Apply the same project statuses, task statuses, automations, and custom fields across multiple projects. Easy updates Update the workflow once and all connected projects update automatically. How to use workflows Workflows are managed at the workspace level and can be assigned to projects or templates. Create or manage a workflow 1. Navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) and select Workflows . 2. Click + Add or select an existing workflow. 3. Add or edit project statuses, task statuses, automations, and task custom fields. Assign a workflow to a project or template 1. Open Project Settings or Template Settings . 2. Click Use Workflow . 3. Select the workflow you want to apply and confirm. [!WARNING] Important: When a workflow is active, the settings controlled by the workflow become read only at the project level. Read only indicators show you which settings are controlled by the workflow. Assign a workflow during quick creation When you create a new project through quick creation, you can select a workflow directly in the creation dialog. [!CAUTION] Important: Selecting a template will always override your workflow selection during project creation. Your project will be created without the workflow you selected, or with the template's workflow if it has one. Switch or disconnect a workflow Projects can switch workflows or disconnect from them entirely. When switching workflows, a migration assistant helps you map old project and task statuses to new ones. When disconnecting, an editable copy of the workflow settings is created for that project. A warning shows you which values will be overwritten before you confirm the workflow switch. Permissions and access control Your permissions depend on your role. Workspace admins can create, edit, delete, and archive workflows, and assign or remove workflows from templates and projects. Team members with project settings permissions can create, edit, and delete workflows, assign or remove workflows from templates, and view all workflows as read only. Team members with project details editing permissions can assign or remove workflows from projects and view all workflows as read only. Team members with project creation permissions Can assign workflows during project creation and remove them later. Key features Workflows stay in sync Project statuses, task statuses, automations, and task custom fields remain aligned across all connected projects. Guided workflow switching The migration assistant helps you safely map old and new project and task statuses. Disconnect from a workflow Break the connection to a workflow and keep an editable copy. Create a workflow from a project Convert an existing project setup into a reusable workflow using "Save as Workflow" in the project settings. Works with templates Assign workflows to templates so new projects automatically follow the same process. Flexibility per project Disable specific workflow automations while keeping others active. You can also add your own automations and task custom fields alongside those from the workflow. Search, filter, and group by workflow Find and organize projects by their assigned workflow. Limitations and notes No workflow versioning or recovery Changes to workflows are applied immediately to all connected projects. Scope Workflows don't affect users, private settings, billing, email configuration, integrations, or Autopilot. [!IMPORTANT] Note: Workflows are optional. Projects can remain completely independent if you don't activate a workflow. FAQ Who can create and edit workflows? Workspace admins and team members with project settings permissions can create and edit workflows. What happens when I edit a workflow? All projects using that workflow update immediately. Can I customize a project that uses a workflow? Yes. Project statuses, task statuses, workflow automations, and workflow task custom fields are read only, but you can add project specific automations and task custom fields on top of them. Can I remove a workflow from a project? Yes. You can unassign the workflow or disconnect the project to regain full control. Are workflows required? No. Workflows are optional and supplementary. You can continue using projects without workflows if you prefer.
Files in Projects Projects have their own file storage where uploaded files, linked cloud files, or files from comments and project tasks are displayed (depending on your permissions). Key benefits an
Files in Projects Projects have their own file storage where uploaded files, linked cloud files, or files from comments and project tasks are displayed (depending on your permissions). Key benefits and use cases The project file storage helps you: Collect files centrally in your project instead of losing them in comments Switch between list and gallery view depending on whether you have many files or many images Add files quickly using the plus button or drag and drop Link cloud files from Google Drive or Microsoft OneDrive without uploading them Automatically collect files from project comments and tasks (depending on permissions) Find files faster through grouping, sorting, and searching Opening the file storage in a project 1. Open the desired project. 2. Click on Files in the header. (If you don't see the tab, click on the More dropdown menu first.) Switching views You can switch between list view and gallery view using the icons in the middle at the top below the header: Gallery view : Ideal for few files or many graphics. List view : Recommended for projects with many files. Adding files In the Files tab, click on the + File button in the upper left corner. Adding files from your computer Select From my computer to upload files, or drag one or more files from your computer into the file storage using drag and drop. Adding files from Google Drive or OneDrive (linking) You can link files from your Google Drive or Microsoft OneDrive to the project. 1. Select From Google Drive or From OneDrive 2. Select the appropriate drive, a window will open 3. Sign in with your Google or Microsoft credentials 4. Search for a file and select it to link it with the project 5. After linking, the file will appear in your awork project's file storage [!IMPORTANT] Important: awork does not have access to your cloud drive. Only a link to the file is created and the current name is saved. When someone else opens the file, they will be redirected to the cloud drive. [!WARNING] Cloud drive permissions apply. This means: Not everyone with access to the awork file storage automatically has access to the linked cloud files. Files from comments and tasks Files attached as comments in the project automatically appear in the files section. The same applies to files that are in tasks. [!WARNING] The corresponding read permissions always apply. For example, if you don't have permission to see certain tasks, you also won't see their files in the project files. Which task a file belongs to For files from tasks, you'll see the task name below the file name. You can use this to jump directly to the task. [!WARNING] For files from tasks, you need read permissions for the tasks. To delete them, you need corresponding write permissions . Grouping, sorting, and searching You can group and sort files. awork automatically remembers your settings for the project. Group by task , user , or type Sort by date , name , or task Search using the line in the upper left with the search icon Tips and limitations There is no workspace wide file storage file storage is only available per project. For global storage in your team, use a cloud drive. It usually offers more detailed options for permission management and sharing. The maximum file size for a single file is 1 GB . [!NOTE] Size and storage limitations: There is no fundamental limit on total data volume in awork. However, we reserve the right in our terms and conditions to limit storage or charge separately for very high requirements. FAQ Where do I find the file storage of a project? Click on Files in the header of a project. (If you don't see the tab, click on the More dropdown menu first.) Does awork access my Google Drive or OneDrive files when I link them? No. awork creates a link to the selected file and saves the current name. When you open the file, you'll be redirected to your cloud drive and the permissions there apply. Why don't I see some files in the project files? Files from comments and tasks are only displayed if you have the corresponding read permissions. If you're not allowed to see certain tasks, you also won't see their files. Is there a workspace wide file storage? No. File storage in awork is only available per project. For global storage, we recommend using a cloud drive. Are there storage limitations in awork? There is no fundamental limit on total data volume. However, we reserve the right in our terms and conditions to limit storage or charge separately for very high requirements.
Using Autopilot for Projects The Autopilot (now Smart alerts ) in awork is a series of emails that keep your project manager and project team updated on your project's progress. Instead of constantly
Using Autopilot for Projects The Autopilot (now Smart alerts ) in awork is a series of emails that keep your project manager and project team updated on your project's progress. Instead of constantly asking yourself "Are we on schedule?" or "Are we still within budget?" , you can let Autopilot handle it. As long as it doesn't sound the alarm, everything's going smoothly. When time budget or end dates are exceeded, it kicks in and notifies you with appropriate emails. Key Benefits and Use Cases Smart alerts help you stay in control without having to worry about your project every single day: Alert you when important thresholds are exceeded (time budget or due date). Send different emails to different roles (project manager vs. project team) Keep project managers updated for project management Help project members focus on urgent tasks Setting Up Smart Alerts Enabling or Disabling Smart Alerts in a Project 1. Open a project 2. Click on Settings in the header. (If you don't see this tab, click the More dropdown menu first.) 3. Scroll to the Smart alerts section. 4. To enable: Click the Set up button. Toggle on Enable project notifications . Click Save . A green status indicator ( Active ) will appear. 5. To disable: Click the Set up button. Toggle off Enable project notifications . Click Save . Choosing Your Project Management Mode (Agile or Waterfall) The calculation depends on your project type: [!IMPORTANT] Agile : Tracks progress based on sprint capacity. This method is ideal for projects without a fixed schedule, where you focus on available work hours rather than fixed dates (for example, Kanban or Scrum). Waterfall : Compares task completion with their due dates. This method works best when your end date and responsibilities are clearly defined, and is helpful when working with milestones and a Gantt chart. To select a mode, click the dropdown menu next to Behind Schedule and choose either Agile or Waterfall . Messages Sent by Smart Alerts When Smart alerts are enabled, different messages are sent to project leads and the project team. Notifications for Project Leads These messages contain (depending on the message) above the main message: Project end date Open tasks Time tracked Remaining planned effort Remaining budget in days Notifications for the Project Team Messages to the project team always show above the main message: Project end date Open tasks Remaining planned effort Customizing Notifications After enabling Project notifications , click Customize notifications . A dropdown menu with more options will open. Toggle on each option you want. Available Options for Project Leads Behind Schedule Shows tasks that are behind schedule, tasks that should have started but haven't, and completed tasks that led to the delay (Waterfall and Agile). For agile projects, a linear burndown of all tasks is assumed; if the project falls behind, the notification is triggered. Due Soon Shows tasks with high planned effort that haven't started yet, overdue tasks, and tasks where planned effort has been exceeded but aren't completed (Waterfall and Agile) Overdue Shows tasks with high planned effort that haven't started yet, overdue tasks, and tasks where planned effort has been exceeded but aren't completed (Waterfall and Agile) Over Budget Shows tasks that took longer than expected (planned effort vs. time tracked), including completed tasks; is triggered when the expected remaining effort exceeds the remaining budget (Waterfall and Agile) Budget Running Out Shows tasks with high planned effort that haven't started yet, overdue tasks, and tasks where planned effort has been exceeded but aren't completed (Waterfall and Agile) Over Budget Shows tasks with high planned effort that haven't started yet, overdue tasks, and tasks where planned effort has been exceeded but aren't completed (Waterfall and Agile) Neglected Info that there has been no activity in a project for 14 days (Waterfall and Agile) Not Yet Started Info that there's a project with a project team and planned tasks that hasn't been set to "Running (yellow)" status yet (Waterfall and Agile) Available Options for the Project Team Behind Schedule In Waterfall mode, the message shows the user's critical (overdue) tasks. In Agile mode, it shows the project's critical (overdue) tasks. Due Soon In Waterfall mode, the message shows the user's open tasks. In Agile mode, it shows the project's open tasks. [!NOTE] Tip: If you're wondering why someone isn't receiving emails, first check whether the roles in the project are set up correctly (project lead vs. project team). FAQ What are Smart alerts for projects? Smart alerts are a series of intelligent email notifications in awork that keep your project manager and project team updated on your project's progress and notify you when a time budget or deadline is exceeded. How do I open the Smart alerts settings in a project? Open the Project Settings . In the Smart alerts section, you can Enable project notifications and set notification options. What's the difference between Agile and Waterfall? Agile works well for projects without a fixed schedule (for example, Kanban or Scrum). Waterfall is better when your end date and responsibilities are clearly defined and you're working with, for example, milestones and a Gantt chart. Why do project leads and the project team receive different emails? Smart alerts support both roles differently: project team members mainly get info about project status and their own upcoming tasks. Project leads get additional information needed to manage the project.
Tasks in the Kanban Board The Board is the Kanban view for your project tasks. You see each task status as a column and each task as a card in that column. You can use drag and drop to move cards betw
Tasks in the Kanban Board The Board is the Kanban view for your project tasks. You see each task status as a column and each task as a card in that column. You can use drag and drop to move cards between status columns or adjust the order of cards. Main Benefits and Use Cases Status at a glance through columns for each task status Move tasks between statuses by dragging cards from one column to another Quick reordering with drag and drop within a column to prioritize Better overview through grouping by lists or users Presentation mode available Moving Tasks and Sorting Cards 1. Open a Project and click on Board next to the Tasks tab. 2. Drag a task card with drag and drop into another column to change the status . or drag cards within a column to adjust the order . [!WARNING] Important: The order in the Board has no effect on the order of tasks within a task list. Adding or Editing Columns (Task Status) The columns correspond to task statuses. You can create new columns (i.e., new task statuses) directly in the Board and adjust existing ones. 1. Click on the column on the far right. 2. Enter a name for the new column. 3. Select the status type using the color dropdown. 4. To edit an existing status, click on the action button to change the status name, color, or icon. Changing Column Order You can change the order of columns (statuses) using drag and drop. The order of the columns is the same order as the status circles in the popup when you hover your mouse over the task checkbox. Alternatively, you can adjust task statuses in the Settings tab of a project and change their order there using drag and drop. Fixed Column for Completed Tasks In the Board view, there's a fixed column for completed tasks. You can choose to show either recently completed or all completed tasks. [!WARNING] Important: This column cannot be hidden. That's why one of the checkboxes always stays active: All completed or Recently completed . You can only select one of the two views at a time. Creating New Tasks in the Board View Click the + button at the top of a column to create a task directly in that column. Or click the + Task button in the top left. New tasks appear in the column that matches their status. Editing Task Details Hover your mouse over a card to see the available actions directly on the task. Click on the task name to open the task details. Grouping the Board by Lists or Users 1. Open the grouping option in the top right (next to the Done visible button). 2. Choose whether you want to group by User or List . When the list is grouped, you can also use drag and drop to assign tasks to other users or move them between lists. Using Presentation Mode 1. Click the screen icon in the top right. 2. The Board is switched to Presentation mode (read only mode, unnecessary elements are hidden). FAQ Where do I find the Board view in my project? You'll find Board right next to the Tasks tab in your project. How do I create new columns (task statuses) in the Board? Click on the column indicated on the far right, give it a name, and select the status type using the color dropdown . Does changing the order in the Board also change the order in the task list? No. The order of tasks in the Board has no effect on the order of tasks within a task list. Why can't I hide the column for completed tasks? In the Board view, there's a fixed column for completed tasks. Since this column cannot be hidden, either All completed or Recently completed always stays enabled. What does presentation mode mean? Presentation mode switches the Board to a read only mode and hides additional elements to provide a clear overview. You can activate this using the screen icon in the top right corner.
Managing Customers Customers in awork give your projects instant context: you can see at a glance who they're assigned to. Key benefits and use cases Faster project overview by assigning projects to a
Managing Customers Customers in awork give your projects instant context: you can see at a glance who they're assigned to. Key benefits and use cases Faster project overview by assigning projects to a customer and displaying that customer across all projects. Assign, find, and distinguish projects more quickly because the customer is directly visible Cross project reporting at the customer level, for example for invoicing The customer overview You can find all your customers in the Main Menu under the Workspace section, in Customers . The overview is similar to the project or user overview. Here you can: Search : Find specific customers. Sort : By industry, name, projects, or location (ascending or descending). Filter : Choose which columns to display (industry, projects, location, tags). Export : Click the Action Button Export in the top right of the overview to download your customer list. Opening customer details, projects, and time entries A customer's details Click on a customer's name to view the Customer Details . These include: Saved contact information , industry , and tags . In the top right area you'll find the Action Button , which offers you the following options: Edit, copy link, open in new tab, delete. Below that you'll see a list of all active projects (yellow status type "Running") for that customer. A customer's projects Open the Projects tab in the header to see all projects for this customer, both active and completed ones. Configure the view to your liking using the options in the top right. Sort by : Tasks, budget, created on, due date, progress, key, customer, name, start date, status, workflow Group by : Due week, due month, customer, status, status type, type, responsible, workflow Choose Displayed columns : awork automatically remembers your selection. Create a filter and save it or choose a saved filter. The filter bar can be toggled on or off using the filter button in the action bar (funnel icon). Search for projects using the search bar in the top left with the magnifying glass icon (next to the + Project button). The list is automatically filtered as you search. When you clear the search text, you'll return to your previous view. [!IMPORTANT] Reset your selected sorting, grouping, and filtering criteria by choosing Reset to default from the Action Button in the top right. Recorded time per customer In the Time tab you'll find all recorded time for this customer. Total recorded time : broken down into billable and non billable. Budget remaining : recorded time and project budget. Billable : time to be invoiced and already invoiced time. Actual vs. planned : recorded time compared to the sum of planned effort across all tasks. Below the KPIs, the Time tab shows you all time recorded on projects for this customer. The bar chart visualizes the distribution of tracked time; hover over the bars for more information. Select a time period: day, week, month, quarter, year, entire time Group by: project, user, or depending on your selected time period by day, week, month, quarter, year. Switch from Time to Plan vs. Actual to compare planned hours by project, lists, tasks, subtasks as well as recorded time and progress. How to create a new customer You have several ways to create a new customer: Via the small + button in the main menu on the left, right next to Customers . This appears when you hover over the word Customers . In the Customer overview ( Main Menu Customers ) using the + Customer button in the top left corner. Use the C keyboard shortcut Choose Add customer from the + button in the action bar at the bottom center. [!NOTE] After creating a customer, you will not automatically be redirected to it. However, you'll get a confirmation message in the top right. If you click on it, the customer will open directly. What customer information you can save For each customer you can maintain the following data: Name (displayed everywhere in projects; whether to include a legal designation like GmbH/AG is up to you) Logo/image (helps with quick visual identification of customers and projects) Industry (displayed only in the customer and can be freely described) Tags (for filtering, for example for particularly important or large customers) Contact details (flexible fields to store any number of contact information) Tips and best practices Add a logo/image if you want to quickly distinguish customers and projects visually Use tags to filter customers more quickly (for example "Key Account" or "Major Customer") Use a customer's Projects and Time tabs to see active projects and recorded time in one place. Workaround for adding contact persons You can't save full contact persons for customers in awork. The reason: awork isn't a CRM, but is designed for project management and time tracking. But: If you simply want to save a name as a contact person, you can add it as an additional field in the contact details. 1. Open the Customer Details 2. Click the Action Button in the top right and select Edit 3. Switch to the Contact tab and add a new field in the final section Other 4. Enter a custom label such as Contact Person and enter the name in the Value field 5. Click Save FAQ Where can I find all customers? You can find all customers in the left menu under Customers . Is there a simple way to see all projects for a customer? Yes. In the Customer Details you'll find an overview of all projects in the Projects tab. Additionally, you can filter by a customer's projects in the project overview using the filter icon, or use the search function. Can I change a project's customer? Yes. In the project details you can click on the current customer's name and select a different customer or no customer. Can I add contact persons to customers? No. You can't create contact persons for customers in awork since awork wasn't designed as a CRM. If you just want to save a name, you can add a custom field (for example "Contact Person") in the customer details under Edit in the Contact tab in the Other section.
Project Planning in the Timeline In the Timeline, you see all tasks of a project over time. [!IMPORTANT] You navigate the Timeline by scrolling left, right, up, or down. There's no limit to how far in
Project Planning in the Timeline In the Timeline, you see all tasks of a project over time. [!IMPORTANT] You navigate the Timeline by scrolling left, right, up, or down. There's no limit to how far into the future or past you can scroll. Key Benefits and Use Cases The Timeline is your quick overview for your project and a pretty solid planning tool. Switch between views (Compact or Gantt), depending on how detailed you want to plan Mark milestones with date and color so important days don't get lost Make dependencies visible through links between tasks Export the Timeline as PNG or SVG including the current display (e.g. zoom level, language, Dark Mode) How to Use the Timeline Switch Views (Compact or Gantt) You change the Timeline view by clicking on the view you want. Compact view without strict hierarchy for tasks Gantt view with tasks and their associated task lists for more detailed planning Create and Delete Milestones 1. Click on the desired date in the timeline 2. Set the name , date , and color in the pop up 3. Click on the milestone again to delete it The date will be marked in the corresponding color and a line will be drawn across the Timeline. [!WARNING] Milestones are only visible in the project Timeline and the Timeline in the project overview, not in the list or board view. [!IMPORTANT] Tip: Use colors to quickly draw attention to different events. Open Task Details When you click on a task, the task details open. Advanced Options and Action Menu Open the Action Menu Click the three dot button to the right of the view options "Gantt" and "Compact". A dropdown menu opens with the following options: Move dependent tasks along : Turn on the toggle to automatically move dependent tasks when making changes. When this mode is enabled, all tasks linked as following will be shifted by the same duration when a task is moved or the due date is changed via drag and drop. [!WARNING] Automatic moving of linked tasks only happens in the Timeline when the mode is enabled. Changes to tasks outside the Timeline, such as in the task details view, will not automatically move other tasks. Whether the mode is enabled depends on the user and is not saved for the entire project. Open in Planner : Opens the project in the Planner Open in Calendar : Shows the calendar view Save as Template : Allows you to create a task template Export Tasks : Exports the task list Export as SVG : Exports the Timeline as an SVG graphic Export as PNG : Exports the Timeline as a PNG image More Options In the floating action bar at the bottom of the screen, you'll find: Multiple selection : Mark tasks in the Timeline and choose an option in the action menu: Autofix, Edit with AI, move, change status, add assignee, remove assignee, delete Options to zoom in and out the calendar button Jump to today : Click it to scroll the Timeline directly to today's date. Today is marked with an orange line. Use the Minimap for Orientation At the bottom of the Timeline, you'll find a minimap. Click on a point in time there to jump the main view directly to that time period. FAQ What's the Difference Between Compact View and Gantt View? The compact view shows the project Timeline without strict task hierarchy. In Gantt view , you see tasks and their associated task lists for more detailed planning. Why Do Times Change When I Only Adjust the Start or End of a Task? If you've set custom times, they're only kept if you move the entire task. If you change only the start or end, awork sets the start to 08:00 and the end to 18:00. What's Included in the Timeline Export? The export (PNG or SVG) includes all displayed tasks and the entire time period of those tasks plus one week at the start and end. The current view is used, including zoom level, language, and Light or Dark Mode.
Compact Timeline In this article, you'll learn how to make the most of the compact timeline view. Customize the Sidebar and View 1. Collapse the sidebar Click the sidebar button in the top toolbar of
Compact Timeline In this article, you'll learn how to make the most of the compact timeline view. Customize the Sidebar and View 1. Collapse the sidebar Click the sidebar button in the top toolbar of the task panel on the left side. This gives you more space for the timeline display. 2. Open the task panel Click the vertical Tasks bar on the left edge of the timeline to open the task panel and schedule tasks in the timeline. 3. Show or hide scheduled items In the task panel's toolbar, you'll find a button with a calendar icon: Show scheduled . Click it to show or hide tasks that are already scheduled in the timeline. [!IMPORTANT] Only tasks with start and end dates will appear in the timeline. 4. Show or hide completed tasks Click the button with the double checkmarks in the toolbar to show or hide completed tasks in the view. The tooltip says Show completed tasks . Create and Manage Tasks 1. Create a new task Click the purple + Task button in the top left of the workspace. Use the plus icon next to the list title to create a new task directly in that list. Drag and drop to select a desired time period and choose the New task action. 2. Expand and collapse task lists Click the list title to expand or collapse the list. 3. Change task status Click the small circle next to the task name in the task list to change the task's status. 4. Schedule tasks Use drag and drop to schedule tasks from the list into the timeline. Edit Tasks in the Timeline 5. Move tasks Grab the task with drag and drop and move it to a different time period. 6. Move a task's due date To change a task's start date or due date, use the handle at the beginning or end of the task and drag the task bar in the timeline horizontally to the desired date. 7. View task details in the timeline Click a task in the timeline to display the task details. 8. Assign team members and change estimated effort Click the icons on the right side of the task. For shorter tasks, these appear when you hover your mouse over the task. 9. Create a milestone Click the desired date in the timeline where you want to set a milestone. A tooltip "Create milestone" appears and a dialog opens where you can set the name, date, and color for the milestone. Click "Save" or close the dialog with the X button in the top right. Bookings and Availability 10. Create a new booking Open the action menu by clicking in an empty area of the timeline. In the "Actions" menu that appears, select "New booking". 11. Check availability Click in an empty area of the timeline and choose the "Check availability" action. Select a time period and click the Availability button to display your team members' availability for the selected period. Next to each user, an availability bar shows the number of available hours. Hover over it to also see total capacity and workload. Create Dependencies 12. Create a dependency between tasks To create a dependency, click the arrow that appears on the right side of a task when you hover over it. The tooltip "Create dependency" indicates that you can now draw a connection to another task. Drag it to the task you want to link. 13. Remove a dependency To delete an existing dependency, hover over the pink arrow and click the X symbol below the dependency line. The tooltip Remove dependency confirms the action. FAQ How do I collapse or expand the sidebar? You can collapse or expand the sidebar by clicking the sidebar button in the top toolbar. How do I create a new task? To create a new task, click the purple + Task button in the top left of the workspace and drag and drop to mark the desired time period. How can I check my team members' availability? By clicking in an empty area of the timeline and selecting the "Check availability" action, you can view your team members' availability. How do I create a dependency between tasks? To create a dependency between tasks, click the arrow that appears on the right side of a task when you hover over it, and drag it to the task you want to link. How do I set a milestone? Click the desired date in the timeline where you want to set a milestone and follow the instructions in the dialog that opens.
Gantt View for Project Planning The Gantt view displays your project tasks as horizontal bars on a timeline, with each bar representing a task's duration. It's the right choice when you want to see ho
Gantt View for Project Planning The Gantt view displays your project tasks as horizontal bars on a timeline, with each bar representing a task's duration. It's the right choice when you want to see how tasks relate to each other over time, manage dependencies, or share a project schedule with clients and stakeholders. Use the Gantt view when you: Plan and schedule tasks within a project Want to visualize and manage dependencies between tasks Need to share a project schedule with clients, stakeholders, or team members Accessing the Gantt View 1. Open any project. 2. Click on More and select Timeline . 3. Use the button in the top right to switch between Gantt and Compact view. Key Features Display and Organization Each task gets its own row on the timeline once start and end dates are set. Lists, parent tasks, and subtasks are clearly structured in a hierarchy. Collapse or expand lists and parent tasks to focus on what matters most. Planning and Scheduling Drag unscheduled tasks from the sidebar directly onto the timeline to assign them start and end dates. This only works for tasks that don't have dates yet. You can create dependencies between tasks (finish to start): Task 1 must be completed before Task 2 can begin. You can drag and drop entire lists or parent tasks to move them, and all tasks within them will move together. Navigation and Export Use the mini map to quickly navigate through the timeline. The currently visible area is always displayed, and you can click anywhere on it to jump straight to that section. Vertical scrolling: Hold the spacebar and drag with your left mouse button. Auto scrolling: When you drag tasks near the edge of the visible area, the screen automatically scrolls along with you. Export the Gantt view as an SVG or PNG image. Scroll to View Click the Scroll to view button in a task's sidebar to jump directly to it on the timeline. [!NOTE] Note This feature is only available in Gantt view, not in the regular Timeline view. Automatically Adopt Subtask Time Range Enable Automatically adopt time range from subtasks for a parent task to automatically adjust its start and end dates based on its subtasks. This option appears both in the task details and directly on the task bar. When this feature is active, the parent task's dates are determined exclusively by its subtasks and cannot be set manually. It's disabled by default. Move Tasks Select multiple tasks in the Gantt view using multi select, then click Move in the three dot menu. Enter the number of days you want to shift the selected tasks forward or backward negative values are allowed. Collapse and Expand Lists and Parent Tasks in Gantt View You can collapse and expand lists and parent tasks to better display the hierarchy of your schedule. You can also drag and drop lists and parent tasks to move them all tasks within them will be moved together on the timeline. FAQ Are recurring tasks supported in Gantt view? Not currently. Recurring tasks cannot be displayed in Gantt view.
List and Table View In this article, you'll learn how to use the list and table view in awork to manage your tasks efficiently. You'll discover how to switch between views, customize columns, group an
List and Table View In this article, you'll learn how to use the list and table view in awork to manage your tasks efficiently. You'll discover how to switch between views, customize columns, group and sort tasks, and apply various actions to your tasks. You can find these views everywhere in awork for example, in projects and views where you can choose between the list and table view. Switching Between List and Table View In the toolbar above your task list, you'll find the view options List and Table . Click on your preferred view to switch between the list view and the detailed table view. Grouping and Sorting Tasks Adjusting the Sort Order Use the sort icon in the toolbar to change the order of your tasks. The tooltip "Sort by" shows you the available sorting options: Task status , Assignee , Created by , Created , Due date , Planned effort , Key , Name , Priority , Start date , Status type , Activity . Changing the Grouping Click on the group icon in the top right toolbar. A dropdown menu opens with the heading "Group by". Here you can choose from various options: Assignee , Created by , List , Priority , Status type , Activity , Daily/Weekly/Monthly . By clicking Clear selection , you can remove the sorting or grouping. [!WARNING] Classic task lists also represent a grouping. If you remove this, you'll see individual tasks sorted chronologically by task key without lists. Showing or Hiding Completed Tasks Click on the double checkmark icon in the toolbar to show or hide completed tasks. You have 2 options to choose from: Show recently completed tasks (within the last 30 days) and Show all Managing Task Lists Click on the action menu in the top right corner and select Manage task lists . A modal window opens showing all task lists in the project. Reordering Task Lists In the management window, you can change the order of lists by dragging and dropping. Drag a list by the handle symbol on the left and drop it at the desired position. Performing List Actions Click on the three dot menu next to a list to access more options: archive or delete the task list. Close the window using the Close button or the X symbol. Organizing Tasks Each task now sits in a clearly defined row. Moving Individual Tasks Use the move handle (the six dot symbol on the left in the task column) to grab and move tasks. Drag a task row to a different position within the list using drag and drop. A colored line shows you where the task will be inserted. Creating New Tasks Adding a Task Click on the Add task row in a task list or click the + Task button between tasks. Adding a Subtask Click on + Subtask to create a nested task under an existing task, or drag an existing task using the handle symbol on the left to the right to nest it under another task. [!IMPORTANT] Editing Entire Hierarchies When you select a parent task, the subtasks are automatically included. Actions for Task Lists Expanding and Collapsing Subtasks Open the action menu of a task list and select Expand subtasks or Collapse subtasks to show or hide all subtasks. More List Actions The action menu of a task list offers you additional options: Archive : Archive the list New task template : Create a template Duplicate task list : Copy the list Move to project : Move the list to another project Copy link : Copy a direct link to the list Hide for external users Delete tasks : Delete all tasks in the list Delete task list : Remove the entire list Editing Planned Effort Click on the planned effort value of a task list to edit the planned effort for the entire list. Editing Multiple Tasks 1. Selecting Tasks Click on the checkbox on the left side of a task row to select it. You can select multiple tasks one after another. 2. Performing Multiple Actions When tasks are selected, an action bar appears at the bottom of the screen. It shows the number of selected tasks (for example, "2 selected") and offers various actions through the action menu (the three horizontal dots): Add tags Duplicate tasks Change task list Change project Change due date Move Set priority Change status Set/remove assignee Change activity Move under task Delete tasks The Table View Each list can be switched to the table view. You decide which columns you see in the table, in what order, and how wide they are. [!IMPORTANT] awork remembers your configuration per list, so you can customize it individually for each project. Configuring Columns in Table View Selecting Displayed Columns Click on the columns icon in the toolbar to open the columns dropdown menu. Here you'll see a list of all available columns. Enable or disable the columns you want by clicking on the respective checkbox. Adjusting Column Width Drag the vertical dividing line between two column headers to change the width of a column. The tooltip "Resize" confirms this action. Reordering Columns Drag a column to a new position using drag and drop. The tooltip "Drag and drop to reorder" shows you that the column is being moved. Sorting Columns in Ascending or Descending Order Click on the up or down arrow next to the column title to sort a column in ascending or descending order.
View & Select Completed Projects In awork, you can mark completed work with the status closed so that they're hidden by default in most overviews and search results (for example, when selecting a proj
View & Select Completed Projects In awork, you can mark completed work with the status closed so that they're hidden by default in most overviews and search results (for example, when selecting a project during time tracking). You set the available project statuses per project in the project settings or define them in templates. [!NOTE] Closed projects can still be found and selected if you explicitly include them in filters and search. How to access completed projects [!IMPORTANT] In awork, two statuses count as completed: Cancelled (red) Completed (green) Once you set a project to one of these statuses, it becomes a hidden project. Show completed projects in the project overview Use a filter above the project list in the project overview to show or hide completed projects. Find completed projects in selection popups In selection popups (for example, when selecting a project), completed projects are only shown if you include them: 1. Search for the project (shortcut f ) 2. Enable the toggle below the search field to include completed projects in your search [!WARNING] Note: The toggle only appears after you've entered text in the search field. Show completed projects and tasks in search By default, completed projects and tasks from completed projects are not shown in search. This keeps the focus on your current projects and tasks. Here's how to search within completed projects: Open the global search (shortcut f ). Enable the toggle to the right of the search field to include completed projects . Only then will tasks from these projects also appear in the results. Select completed projects in slash commands You cannot search for completed projects in slash commands. However, you can still select completed projects: 1. Click on Add details 2. Open the project selection popup 3. Search for the project 4. Enable the toggle so that completed projects are also searched FAQ Which statuses count as completed? Completed (green) and Cancelled (red) count as completed. Projects with these statuses are hidden in most overviews and searches unless you explicitly include completed projects. Can I search for tasks that belong to completed projects? Yes. In the global search (F), completed projects and their tasks are hidden by default. Enable the toggle below the search field to include completed projects and show tasks from completed projects. Why don't I see the toggle to include completed projects in the selection window? The toggle only appears after you've entered text in the search field. Start by typing the project name, then enable Also include closed and blocked projects and tasks . Why can't I select a completed project using slash commands? Slash commands don't include completed projects in the selection. To select a completed project, click on Add details , open the full project selection window, search for the project, and then enable Also include closed projects .
Private Projects Create private projects in awork to make your work visible only to you and the team members you add. [!NOTE] Private projects are exclusively visible to the creator and the project me
Private Projects Create private projects in awork to make your work visible only to you and the team members you add. [!NOTE] Private projects are exclusively visible to the creator and the project members . Key Benefits and Use Cases Work privately , since only the creator and assigned members can see the project Identify private projects quickly in the project overview by the lock icon Filter by private projects using the visibility filter to display only your private projects Share individual tasks with team members without exposing the rest of your private project How to Use Private Projects Creating a Private Project You can set a project to private directly during creation. Click on Add Details and select the option Mark as Private . Making an Existing Project Private There are two ways to make an existing project private: Click the Action Button in the Home tab of the project, select Edit , and check the box Should this project be private? Or open the Settings tab in the project and enable the Private Project toggle in the General section You can make a private project public again later. [!CAUTION] Important: Time tracking is not possible for private projects. If your project already has recorded time entries, you must transfer all time entries to another project using bulk selection before switching to private. When changing a public project to private, recorded time entries will be deleted from the project. You'll be asked to confirm this action. Identifying Private Projects in the Project Overview Your private projects are displayed in the project overview with a lock icon . This way, you can see at a glance whether a project is private or public. Displaying Private Projects with a Filter Select the Private project field in a filter to limit the results to your private projects . Visibility and Limitations Special Features in Private Projects No team assignment possible : you can selectively add individual users to the private project No time tracking possible Visibility of Private Projects Your private project can't be found or seen by anyone on the team unless you add them as a member to your project. You can also assign individual tasks to other team members. They'll see these tasks in their My Tasks list, but not the rest of the project. This way, other users can work on individual tasks without seeing your private project. Workload of Private Projects Scheduled tasks from private projects count toward your workload in the team planner. Other users won't see directly how much time you've scheduled for private projects, and private projects along with their tasks are invisible to others in the team planner. FAQ Who Can See a Private Project? Only the creator and team members assigned to the project can see it. Everyone else on the team can neither find nor view it. Can I Track Time on a Private Project? No. Time tracking is disabled for private projects, and all time tracking options are unavailable. Can I Change an Existing Project to Private? Yes. You can switch it using the Private Project toggle in the project settings. Or click the Action Button in the Home tab of the project, select Edit , and check the box Should this project be private? If time entries have already been recorded, you'll need to either delete the recorded time entries (you'll be asked about this in the process) or transfer the time entries to another project using bulk selection . How Do I Know if a Project is Private? Private projects are indicated by a lock icon in the project overview. Do Private Projects Affect Workload? Yes. Private projects are included in your workload in the team planner, but others can't see your project or the scheduled time.
Task lists help you organize tasks in the project tab Tasks . You can bundle tasks into lists, reorder lists, and move tasks flexibly between lists. [!NOTE] A task can be in multiple lists at the same
Task lists help you organize tasks in the project tab Tasks . You can bundle tasks into lists, reorder lists, and move tasks flexibly between lists. [!NOTE] A task can be in multiple lists at the same time (or in no list at all). It always remains the same task if you complete it, it's marked as complete in all lists. Create a new task list There are three ways to create a new list: If you don't have any list in the project yet, click on the dashed box to create a new list Click on + Task (top left) and select Task List Hover your mouse below an existing list to insert a new list after it (or between two lists) Give the list a name. Change the order of task lists You can sort lists in two ways: 1. Via drag and drop: Click on a list's header (where the list name is) and drag it to the desired position 2. Via Manage task lists (list icon top right): In the window you can see all lists and reorder them via drag and drop Add tasks to lists or move them between lists When you create a new task via the task window, you can select in the Lists field which lists it should appear in. This also works with existing tasks: Via the quick action Select task lists In the task details in the Task Lists field Action button (three dots) via Edit Multiple selection You can create tasks directly in the New Task row of a list. If you hover between two tasks and click on new task , you can also create tasks between existing tasks in the list. [!NOTE] You can move individual tasks to another project by editing them via the Action button and changing the project in the dropdown. Alternatively, you can move tasks to another project via Multiple selection or move entire lists to another project via the 3 dot menu. More on this: Edit multiple tasks at once. Sorting tasks Via drag and drop you can move tasks between lists or change their order. When you move a task between two lists, awork asks at the bottom of the screen whether you want to move the task or if you only want to see it additionally in the new list. If you confirm, it will appear in both lists. [!WARNING] In the No List view, the order cannot be changed (not even in task templates), because "no list" isn't technically a real list. Instead, create a new list (for example with the name "no list") and sort the tasks there. Quick actions in task lists You can perform some actions directly in the list, for example: 1. Adjust the status of a task 2. Mark the task as priority 3. Select task lists 4. Add and remove tags 5. Edit recurrence rule 6. Start a timer 7. Set due date 8. Assign assignees 9. Edit more details of the task 10. Edit custom field (if configured in the project) [!NOTE] When a timer is started on a task, you'll see the running timer in the list view. When you hover, you can pause or stop it. More on this: Time tracking. Display progress of a task list At the top right next to the list name you can see the progress of the list: Task progress as "Completed tasks / Existing tasks" Time progress as "Logged time / Planned time" Views for task lists In the task overview you have two modes to choose from: 1. Full width mode The lists and columns automatically adjust to your browser window. With smaller windows, task details are displayed in smart stacking mode. When there's more space, you'll see columns that you can manually show and hide. 2. Compact list Here you can return to the familiar compact mode. This mode is only available for task lists and task filters. [!NOTE] Tip: For faster access to full width mode: maximize your browser window and collapse the navigation bar on the left. Open task details Click on the task name in the list. The task opens on the right. If your awork window is too small for the split view, you'll automatically navigate to the task details. More on this: All task details. Display completed tasks When you complete a task, it's automatically hidden in the list view after a page refresh. At the top right you'll find the icon to display completed tasks. You have two options: Show recently completed tasks: Shows only tasks that were completed within the last 30 days. This is particularly useful when many tasks accumulate over time in ongoing projects. Show all: Shows all completed tasks of the project. awork automatically remembers this setting for your user and the project. Duplicate, link, or move a task list Via the list action menu (top right in a task list) you can manage the entire list: Duplicate task list including tasks: Hidden completed tasks are duplicated. Subtasks and descriptions are also copied. After duplicating, the new list appears together with all tasks below the original list. Copy link to task list: Use the action button (three dots) to copy a direct link to the list. Move task list to another project: Select the target project and assign the tasks to a new status if the task statuses differ. After moving, the list disappears from the original project after saving. Filter by task lists In task filters you can select task lists and filter by them. You can also enter only parts of a list title (for example "Onboarding"). Then tasks from all lists are displayed whose title contains this word. This way you can refine filters further and get cross project overviews. Collapse, archive, or delete unused lists You can hide the tasks of a list by collapsing it via the arrow icon at the top right in the header. If a list should no longer be displayed at all, you can delete or archive it via the Action button of the list. With Archive , the list is hidden. Archiving is only possible if the list no longer contains any open tasks. If there are still open tasks, you can: Move open tasks to No List Move open tasks to another list Complete open tasks (mark as done) Delete open tasks Show archived lists again Here's how to manage archived lists: Click on the list icon to open Manage task lists . Use the action button next to an archived list to restore the list, delete tasks, or permanently delete the list. Search task lists Via the search icon at the top right you can search task lists. Besides the task name you can search for specific criteria: Task lists Priority (Prio) Tags Due date Status name [!WARNING] Note: The task description cannot be searched here. Import task templates You can import pre made task templates into projects. More on this: Templates for tasks. Edit multiple tasks You can edit multiple tasks at once (for example move them to another project or delete them). More on this: Edit multiple tasks at once. Known limitations "No List" doesn't support drag and drop sorting the search is limited and doesn't include the task description FAQ Can a task be in multiple task lists? Yes. A task can be in multiple lists at the same time (or in no list at all). It always remains the same task and is displayed as complete in all lists, for example, when you complete it. Can I search the task description in the task list search? No. Via the search (search icon) you can search for task lists, priority, tags, due date, and status name, but not in the task description. Why can't I reorder tasks in "no list"? Because "no list" isn't technically a real list. The order of tasks there cannot be changed (not even in task templates). What happens to task statuses when I move a task list to another project? If the target project uses different task statuses, you must select which new status the existing tasks should receive. After saving, the list is moved and disappears from the original project.
Duplicating Projects Sometimes you just need a quick copy without the hassle of setting up a formal template. [!IMPORTANT] When you duplicate a project, the complete structure is copied into a new, in
Duplicating Projects Sometimes you just need a quick copy without the hassle of setting up a formal template. [!IMPORTANT] When you duplicate a project, the complete structure is copied into a new, independent project in seconds. [!NOTE] You can choose which project data should be reset before duplicating. The result is a clean copy that you can start working with right away with no connection to the original. When to use project duplication You're starting a new client project that follows the same workflow as an existing one You're repeating a campaign or service with a consistent task structure You want to use an active project as a quick ad hoc template without having to create a formal template How to duplicate a project [!IMPORTANT] To duplicate a project, you need write access to the project and the right to create projects in your workspace . 1. Open the action menu of a project. 2. Select Duplicate . 3. Choose which optional content should be reset . 4. Confirm with Duplicate . The new project will be named [Project name] (Copy) and can be renamed. [!WARNING] Depending on the project size, duplicating can take a moment. For larger projects with many tasks, files, or documents, it may take a bit longer for all content to be fully available. What always gets copied The following is always included in every duplicate: Task lists and tasks (including descriptions and checklists) Custom fields and tags Estimated effort and task dependencies Recurrence rules Automations Budget What you can optionally reset Before creating the duplicate, you can independently reset the following content. All are set to retain by default (meaning they will be duplicated unless you choose otherwise): Reset task status Reset custom field values Reset project members Reset assigned users Reset followers Reset docs Reset files What never gets copied Task and project comments Logged time Connect users Calendar bookings and scheduled time blocks on tasks [!WARNING] 💡 If you're viewing your projects with an active filter (for example, by status), the duplicate might not appear right away it may not meet the current filter criteria . Remove or adjust the filter if you can't find it. FAQ Are all tasks copied when duplicating? Yes all tasks, task lists, checklists, descriptions, custom fields, tags, estimated effort, recurrence rules, and task dependencies are always copied. Are files and documents copied? Yes, by default. You can optionally reset them during duplication. If they're retained, new objects are created with no connection to the originals. Can I exclude team members from being copied? Yes. Project members and task assignments are both optional and set to retain by default. You can disable both independently before confirming. Are my automations carried over? Yes. Individual project automations are always duplicated. If the source project uses a workflow, workflow driven automations are intentionally not carried over. Automations that reference users or entities that can't be triggered in the new project are automatically disabled. Are comments copied? No. Task and project comments are never copied. Is logged time carried over? No. All logged time stays with the original project. The budget target is retained. Are external team members (Connect users) carried over? No. Connect users are excluded when carrying over members. They need to be manually re invited. Are recurring tasks recalculated? No. Recurrence rules are carried over unchanged dates are not shifted relative to the duplication date. Check recurring tasks after creation if the original dates are in the past. Can I duplicate multiple projects at once? No, projects can only be duplicated one at a time. Is the duplicate linked to the original? The duplicate is completely independent. Changes to either project won't affect the other.
Automations in Projects With automations in projects, you can execute recurring steps automatically. [!IMPORTANT] You define a trigger ("When ...") and one or more actions ("Then ..."). Example: When
Automations in Projects With automations in projects, you can execute recurring steps automatically. [!IMPORTANT] You define a trigger ("When ...") and one or more actions ("Then ..."). Example: When a task is created in a specific list, it can be automatically assigned to a person. How to use automations in projects An automation always consists of exactly one trigger and any number of actions . Setting up a new automation 1. Open your project 2. Go to Settings Automations 3. Click Add 4. Select your trigger 5. Set one or more actions 6. Click Save (the automation is active immediately) Choosing a trigger The trigger is the event that must occur for the automation to start. Depending on the trigger, you may need to add conditions. Look for underlined fields in the window and click them to select the required values. Defining actions Choose which action(s) should be executed. Some actions require additional information. Use the underlined fields here as well to set the corresponding values. How to use manual automations In addition to event based triggers, you can also create automations with a manual trigger . This lets you start them deliberately by user action , instead of automatically when an event occurs. When creating one, you select Manual as the trigger type, give it a custom name (for example, Start QA Flow ), and define one or more actions. [!NOTE] Manual triggers give you full control over when an automation is executed. Running manual automations in a task 1. Open the task detail view 2. Click the manual automations button in the top right (finger/touch icon) 3. Select the desired automation from the dropdown menu The automation runs in the background and you'll see a brief confirmation message. Project automations vs. task automations Automations can be created for projects and for tasks . Depending on the trigger, you can select project or task actions. [!WARNING] Project automations are especially helpful for keeping a good overview of certain project statuses. Budget automations You can set up the budget automation "When project X has reached X units of budget ..." directly in your project: 1. Open your project 2. Open the Times tab 3. Switch to the Retainer tab 4. Click the bell icon to open the settings popup 5. Select the unit: Days , Hours , or Percent If the automation is already set up, clicking the bell icon again opens the popup directly for editing. Automations in project templates You can set up automations in project templates already. Then they'll automatically appear in the project when you create a new project with that template. To add an automation to the project template: 1. Navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Templates Project Templates 2. Open the template 3. Click Add in the Automations section 4. Create the automation as described in the project [!WARNING] Important: When you change or create automations in an existing project template, awork will ask you if you want to apply these changes to all projects that were created with this template. [!NOTE] Tip: You can also create inactive automations in the template. They'll be copied to new projects, but will only be active there once you enable them in the project. Tips and troubleshooting Disable automation instead of deleting it You can simply disable automations instead of deleting them. This is helpful if, for example, you want to do a one time cleanup and suppress all actions until then. Automation is no longer running Check if it has automatically disabled itself due to an error (for example, if a task list it uses was deleted): Show error details: Under Settings Automations , you'll see a red exclamation mark for automations that have been automatically disabled; this shows the reason Reactivate: Fix the automation and then turn it back on FAQ Can one automation trigger another automation? No. It's technically prevented for one automation to trigger another automation with an action, to avoid recursive ping pong effects. If you want to execute multiple actions with the same trigger, put all the actions in the same automation. I have a due date trigger. When will this be triggered? For automations with due date triggers (for example, "When task is due ..."), the actions are triggered when the date occurs in the morning (CEST). The time of the due date is irrelevant. For example, if a task is due at 6 PM, the automation will still be triggered in the morning of the due date. For whom is time tracked when "When a new task is created via email, then start time tracking on the task"? Time is tracked for the person who sent the email provided that this person has an awork account. The time is tracked regardless of whether and which user is assigned to the task. If I change an automation in a project template, will existing projects also be updated? When you change or add automations in an existing template, awork will ask you if you want to apply these changes to all projects that were created with this template. My automation doesn't seem to be running anymore. Why? Check if the automation has automatically disabled itself due to an error (for example, if a task list it uses was deleted). Go to Settings Automations . For disabled automations, you may see a red exclamation mark. If you hover over it with your mouse, you'll see the reason. Fix the automation and turn it back on.
Project Templates Project templates let you easily predefine recurring work packages. Key benefits and use cases Project templates work great when you're creating similar projects over and over again:
Project Templates Project templates let you easily predefine recurring work packages. Key benefits and use cases Project templates work great when you're creating similar projects over and over again: Standardize project creation with consistent descriptions, tags, and settings Start with ready made task lists and tasks instead of creating them manually Set project and task statuses from the start Use automations by defining project automations in advance What project templates include Name and optionally an image : The image is displayed when you select a template during project creation and helps with recognition. Description that gets added when you create a project Tags for projects created with the template Budget Project settings : Pre set tracked time as billable (including Auto, which depends on whether a customer is selected during project creation) Choose a task list for tasks that come from emails : which task list email created tasks should be added to Project type Use template image for project : if disabled, the customer image will be used by default when creating a project with a customer Project and task statuses (board columns) : learn more here Custom fields for tasks: learn more here Automations : learn more here Task lists & tasks as a starter set for new projects You can reorder statuses, task lists, and tasks by drag and drop. Task templates can contain relative fields (for example, due dates). Learn more: Task Templates [!NOTE] Important: You need at least one yellow status (active project) and one green status (completed project). Create a new project template 1. Navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Templates . 2. In the top section Project Templates , click + Add . 3. Enter a name and optionally add an image. 4. Click Save . 5. Then adjust the details of the template (for example, tasks, automations, statuses). If you've already created task templates, you can also import task lists into your project template. Convert an existing project into a template 1. Open the project. 2. Open the Actions menu in the top right (in the header or the Home tab) and select Create template 3. Give the template a name and optionally an image. 4. Choose which project elements should be included (all are selected by default). Create a project with a template 1. Start creating a new project and enter your project information. 2. When the template selection window appears, click the template you want to use. Choose between your own templates and an awork template. [!NOTE] If you want to continue without a template, click Create without template to create an empty project. Preview project templates and set favorites To use project templates efficiently, these features are available to you: Show preview In the project template selection, an info icon appears in the bottom left corner when you hover over it. You can use it to open a preview of the template. In the preview, you'll see the settings and content that will be applied to your project. Set favorites Click the star icon in the bottom right corner, which appears when you hover over the selection, to save the template as a favorite. Favorites are displayed first in the order they were selected. Backward scheduling for templates With backward scheduling, you can set an end date for the last task when creating a project with a template. Instead of scheduling all tasks from "today" onwards, you set a reference date (for example, project end or a custom date) when selecting a template. The tasks are then automatically scheduled backwards from that date. Manage templates Go to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Templates In the Project Templates section, you can see all templates saved in your awork. Using the Actions button , you can edit a template (change name and image), duplicate it, or delete it. Click on a template to open the details and edit the content. [!IMPORTANT] Changes are applied immediately, a separate save of the entire template is not necessary. Tips for using project templates and notes Templates and projects are not linked to each other after creation. Using a template copies the data into the project. [!WARNING] Changes to the project do not affect the template, and changes to a template do not affect already created projects. Exception: When you make changes to automations , awork asks whether ongoing projects should adopt the changes (you can also skip this step). Keep automations optional by creating them in the template as disabled In addition to templates you create yourself, you'll also find pre made project templates in awork that the awork team has created. You can find more information about awork templates here. FAQ Are project templates linked to the projects created from them? No. When you create a project with a template, the template data is copied into the project. You can edit or delete the project content without affecting the template. If I change a template later, will existing projects be updated? No. Changes to the template do not affect projects already created from it. The exception is automations: if you change an automation in the template, awork asks whether existing projects should adopt the change (you can skip this). Can I preview a project template before I use it? Yes. When selecting project templates during project creation, click the info icon to see a preview of the template's settings and content. What is backward scheduling for templates? Backward scheduling lets you set the date by which the last task should be completed when creating a project with a template. The tasks are then scheduled backwards from that reference date. How is the due date for a task set dynamically when a project template is used? Dynamic due dates are set based on the project creation date (the day the template is used). Example: If you load a project template on 03/05/2026 and the task has a due date 5 days after creation, the task's due date is 03/10/2026.
Changing Project Settings You'll find your project settings in the Settings tab of your project. Opening project settings 1. Open your project. 2. Click on Settings in the header. (If you don't see th
Changing Project Settings You'll find your project settings in the Settings tab of your project. Opening project settings 1. Open your project. 2. Click on Settings in the header. (If you don't see the tab, click on the More dropdown menu first.) Managing assigned users Under Assigned Users , you'll see all project members along with their project specific permission roles. Here you can: Add project members : Click on + Add above the list. Remove project members from the project : Click the X on the right side. Make a user the project owner : Click on the checkbox. Change a user's project role : Click on the selection dropdown menu. Access rights management : Click on the Edit Roles link. Update general settings In the General section, you'll find these options: Mark project as private Only the creator and project members can see the project. Check out this article for more information about private projects. Pre set logged time as billable : For projects created with a client, this setting is automatically active. For projects without a client, it's not. Time logged on the project (or tasks) will automatically be marked as billable . You can change the status for each time entry manually. Set task and project keys : Show or hide task and project keys for this project, and override the workspace setting or use the workspace default. Link a workflow In the Workflow section, you'll see the workflow selected for this project. Click on the action button on the right to manage the linked workflow, change it, or unlink it. Alternatively, you can choose Link Workflow and select the workflow you want. Map each existing project status and task status to a status from the new workflow. (Note: project and task statuses will be overridden by the workflow.) Customize project status and task status (board columns) Project statuses show which phase your project is in and are color coded to match the four system statuses. You can define which statuses your project goes through and customize their labels. Task statuses are specific to each project. Add : Click the + Add button to create new statuses. Edit/Delete : Use the action button on the right to edit or delete existing statuses. Adjust order : Use the handle on the left side to drag and drop statuses to reorder them. [!IMPORTANT] Tip : If you need the same task statuses across different projects, create a project template with predefined statuses. Manage custom fields for tasks Custom fields are created at the workspace level and enabled at the project level. Users with write access to project details can enable the fields needed for the project by clicking the + Add button. Once the field is enabled in the project settings, all users can use the custom fields in the project's tasks. Remove fields from the project : Click the X on the right side. Adjust order : Use the handle on the left side to drag and drop fields to reorder them. Enable or disable smart alerts You can turn Smart Alerts (formerly Autopilot) on or off for your project and customize your notification settings. Manage integrations (Slack or Teams) If you want to link your project to a Slack or Teams channel, you can do that in the Integrations section. 1. Add integration : Click + Add to add new integrations. 2. View integration : After a successful integration, it will be listed in your project settings. 3. Manage integration : You have the option to remove or edit the integration to filter which notifications are displayed, for example. Learn more about integrations here. Create and manage automations In the Automations section, you can create, delete, or edit automations for your current project. [!NOTE] Each automation only applies to the current project. However, you can also set them up in project templates so you don't have to rebuild them for every project. Find out here how automations work. Create tasks via email Here you'll find the email address for your project if you want to create tasks via email. You can also specify which list these tasks should land in. This article has all the information you need about creating tasks via email. Troubleshooting tips [!WARNING] If you can't see the Settings tab, you probably don't have sufficient permissions on the project to view or change the project settings. It's best to reach out to the project owner or the person who created the project. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) Where do I find the project settings? The project settings are in the Settings tab in the header. Why don't I see the Settings tab in my project? You probably don't have the necessary permissions for the project. Contact the project manager or the person who created the project. What happens when I mark a project as private? Only the creator and project members can see the project, and time can't be logged on private projects. What does the "Pre set logged time as billable" setting do? When this option is enabled, all time logged on the project or its tasks will automatically be marked as billable. However, you can change the status for each logged time afterward. Can I use the same task statuses or automations across multiple projects? Yes, you can use the same configuration in multiple projects. Create a project template to have this configuration predefined when you create new projects. Where can I see who created a project? Open the Settings of a project and scroll to the Info section. There you'll see who created the project.
Details Within a Project Once you've created a new project, you'll find all information about the project under the Home tab within the project. Here you can edit most fields simply by clicking on the
Details Within a Project Once you've created a new project, you'll find all information about the project under the Home tab within the project. Here you can edit most fields simply by clicking on them. Using the action button at the top right, you can access additional actions, such as deleting the project. Project Name Your project name should help you identify it. So choose a catchy, unique name. You can edit the name directly inline whenever you want to change it. Status Every project always has a current status. This is displayed in overviews and plays an important role in awork. Often, only active projects are shown in selection fields or overviews. You can set the available statuses for your project in the Project Settings. Description/Briefing The project briefing is a description of the project for your project team members. It's a good idea to note down everything important here and also include relevant links and documents so that everyone has everything they need at their fingertips. In addition to inserting headings, lists, dividers, and attaching and linking images and files, the toolbar of the Text Editor allows you to change text size, add additional styles like bold, italic, strikethrough, underline or code highlighting, and insert links into your text. Project Image You can upload a small image for each project so your team can recognize it more quickly. To do this, click on the circular project image in the project details or upload an image through the edit window ( Action Button Edit ). If a customer is assigned to the project who already has an image, this will be displayed for the project by default as well. If no image is selected, either for the project or for the customer, the icon of the project type will be displayed. Tags Tags are labels you can use to categorize your projects or tag them for filtering. This way you can easily search for them, filter them, or recognize certain projects in overviews more quickly. The window for editing tags shows you all the tags that have already been used for existing projects in awork. Learn more about Tags in awork. End Date A project can have an end date, but doesn't have to. However, it's very helpful for communicating with your team and for scheduling tasks in the timeline. The end date is prominently displayed there. A project end date in awork has no time component. Tasks have a time, but based on our experience, that level of precision isn't necessary for projects. Project Budget Project Budget The project budget is a time based budget that can be planned for the project. It often corresponds to the budget sold to the customer. One Time Budget The one time project budget is allocated once and can then be used to calculate the project budget. By clicking on the purple budget button, the project budget can be edited at any time by users with the necessary permissions. Retainer Budget With the Retainer Budget, you can set a recurring monthly budget for your projects. Simply click on the budget and enter the details via the pop up. Budget Based On... You can specify whether only billable recorded times should be counted toward the budget or whether all times should be counted. By default, all projects that are already active in awork have the "all times" option selected. However, this can be changed. Retainer Time Period For the retainer, a start and end date must always be specified. This can be entered here in the form of a month. You have the option to enter your own fixed date or adjust the time period to match the project's start and end dates. If this option is set, the retainer will synchronize the project's start and end date (month). If no start and end date is set for the project despite this selected option, a red error message will appear asking you to set a date. When the project's start and/or end date is changed, the retainer will also be synchronized. If the project's start or end date is removed, an error message will appear on the project home page asking you to fix the issue. When you click on the error message, the budget settings modal opens with an info box indicating which field needs to be edited. In the Times tab, you'll also see an info box at the top with the error message. Configure Carryover Options Here you can set what should happen to your unused or over consumed hours in the next month. You have the following options: Carry Unused Hours to the Next Period If you enable this option, unused hours will simply be carried over to the next month. Example: Budget is 200h, Month A: 180h consumed, Month B: 220h available Deduct Over Consumed Hours from the Next Period If you enable this option, over consumed hours will be deducted from the following month. Example: Budget is 200h, Month A: 220h consumed, Month B: 180h available You can choose both or neither of these options. If you choose both options, the system will calculate hours precisely, taking into account both unused and over consumed hours. If you choose neither of these options, the monthly retainer remains static without considering unused or over consumed hours. Progress Progress is calculated based on recorded time and budget. If no budget is set, it's calculated based on planned effort. If that's also not set, progress is calculated based on completed vs. all tasks. By clicking on the progress value, you can switch between the three modes at any time. ☝️ Note : If an admin has disabled time tracking for all users, progress here will only be shown based on completed tasks. ☝️ Tip : You can also see your project's progress in the project overview. Hovering over the bar will show you more details. Here you can also switch between the three modes by clicking on the bar. Open Project Budget When the planned effort of a project task is edited, a small pop up appears showing the remaining project budget. It's calculated as: = Budget recorded time (only on project) recorded time (on completed tasks) planned time (on open tasks) Total Recorded Under Total Recorded , you see the recorded time vs. the planned effort, which is the sum of all planned efforts of the project tasks. ☝️ Note : If an admin has disabled time tracking for all users, the recorded time (blue box) will not be displayed and will be completely hidden. Customer Projects in awork can have customers, but don't have to. Customers help you assign your projects to actual clients and categorize them within awork, allowing you to evaluate or bill times across projects, for example. When creating a new project, you can always select an already existing customer, or quickly create a new one. ☝️ Tip : If you maintain your customer logos properly, your projects will automatically adopt the customer's logo, and your project overview will look really organized. Learn more about Customers in awork. Project Members Adding members to your project serves two functions: Display as "My Project" A project where I'm a member will be recognized by awork as "My Project" for my user and, if active, will show it to me on the dashboard or as a suggestion in time tracking, for example. This way I can find it quickly because it's assigned to my user. Specific Project Permissions When assigning a user as a project member, you need to select a role that defines the user's permissions on the project, unless they already have permissions to see and edit all projects. Learn more in the Permissions Management section. Project Owner Every project has exactly one project owner. You select them in the window for choosing the user by using the checkbox between the user name and the project role. The project owner is displayed with their image in the project overview and can be used both for grouping projects and in filters. The project owner also plays an important role when enabling Autopilot. This user receives special emails intended for project management. The assignment has no other implications. Activity on the Project The activity log shows all important changes to the project in chronological order. This way you can track the activity. Good to know ☝️: Updates to time tracking and tasks are only seen by users who have permission to view the project's tasks and times. Comments You can also leave comments in the activity log. You can upload files in comments and mention other users using "@" so they receive an explicit notification, regardless of whether they have general notifications enabled for the project. The only requirement is that you've enabled the "Someone mentioned you in a comment" notification in your profile settings. You can also mention users with @Workspace, @Project, and @"Team". @Workspace : Every user in the workspace will be notified. @Project : Every user assigned to the project OR who has the bell icon activated for the project will be notified. @"Team" (e.g. @Marketing): Every team member will be notified. Requirements for receiving these notifications: Users must have the corresponding notifications enabled in their profile settings. Users must have the bell icon activated for the project. Users must be able to view the project according to permissions management. Subscribe or Unsubscribe From Notifications In the Details tab of the project, you'll find a bell icon at the top right. If it's activated, this means you'll automatically receive notifications about updates to the project when other users, for example, change the status or leave a comment. For each user assigned to the project, these notifications are enabled. You can turn off these notifications as needed. In your Profile Settings, you can decide which project notifications you want to receive and on which channel (for example, whether you also want to receive them by email). FAQ I deleted a project. Can it be restored? Yes. If you accidentally deleted a project, our support team can restore it. To do this, contact the support team and provide the project title.
Creating a New Project You can create a new project in the following places in awork: Via the + button in the main menu on the left, right next to Projects . This appears when you hover your mouse ove
Creating a New Project You can create a new project in the following places in awork: Via the + button in the main menu on the left, right next to Projects . This appears when you hover your mouse over the word Projects . In the Projects overview ( Main menu Projects ) using the + Project button in the upper left corner. Using the Shortcut P . Select Add Project via the + button in the action bar at the bottom center. How to create a project Step 1: Fill in the project details In this step, you'll set up your project with the basic information: Name : Give your project a unique name so you and your team can easily find it and recognize it in overviews. Client : You can assign a client to your project for better organization and grouping. The project will automatically use the client's logo as the project image if you don't upload your own. Project Image : The project image gives your project stronger brand recognition. If you assign a client to the project that already has an image, that image will be used. Description : You can add a brief project description here. Time Budget & End Date : Your project can have a time budget if you want to manage progress through time tracking. A project end date is always recommended. Project Members : Assigning users to a project serves two purposes. On one hand, users will then see this project in their projects list and it will appear in suggestions, for example when tracking time. The second purpose is to set permissions that a user should have on the project. Each user can be assigned to the project with a specific permission role. Team Membership : If you want your new project to be visible to specific teams, you need to select the teams here, provided teams are configured in your awork workspace. Project Type : The project type is a way to categorize your projects, for example if you want to analyze your time by project type. This field is optional and only visible if project types are configured in your workspace. [!NOTE] You can edit all of these fields even after the project has been created. Step 2: Select a template (optional) [!IMPORTANT] Selecting a template is optional and will only be suggested if you already have a template in your awork workspace. If you want to create an empty project with default settings, select Skip . If you select a template, the settings and tasks from the template will be copied into your newly created project. This can save you a lot of time if you regularly work on similar projects. [!NOTE] Within your project, you can now customize all settings and tasks from the template as needed without affecting the original template. Learn more about project templates. Step 3: Your project is created After selecting a template or skipping this step, your project will be created immediately. Best practices and troubleshooting tips Enable Smart alerts You can now enable awork Smart alerts for your project in the project settings. These help you and your project members keep the project on track with time and budget. Smart alerts send helpful emails when certain budget thresholds are reached and when due dates are approaching. If Teams are enabled, select at least one team [!WARNING] If Teams are enabled in your awork workspace and you're part of one of the teams, you need to select at least one team when creating a project. Otherwise, the project might not be visible to you and your team. This depends on your permission configuration. If you can't create a project If you're missing the button to create a new project or it's hidden, you don't have sufficient permissions. In that case, it's best to contact your internal awork administrator or team lead. FAQ Where can I create a new project? You can create a project by hovering over Projects in the main menu on the left and clicking the + , via Main menu Projects with + Project , using the P shortcut, or via the + button in the action bar at the bottom center. Do I have to select a project template? No. Templates are optional and will only be suggested if templates exist in your workspace. You can skip this step and create an empty project with default settings. Why do I have to select a team when creating a project? If Teams are enabled in your workspace and you're part of a team, you need to select at least one team. Otherwise, the project won't be visible to you and your team. This depends on your permission configuration. What do Smart alerts do for projects? Smart alerts help you and your project members by sending helpful emails when certain budget thresholds are reached or when due dates are approaching. Why can't I create a project? If the button to create a new project is missing or hidden, you don't have the required permissions. Please contact your internal awork administrator or your team lead.
Project and Task Keys Project and task keys give every project a short, unique identifier and every task a permanent number. Instead of copying long titles or links, your team can reference work with
Project and Task Keys Project and task keys give every project a short, unique identifier and every task a permanent number. Instead of copying long titles or links, your team can reference work with simple, readable IDs like MKTG 42. Communication becomes clearer, tracking becomes easier. And your workflows get faster. Main benefits and use cases Clearer communication Name work clearly in conversations, comments, and standups. Stable task references Task numbers never change, even if task names do. Faster developer workflows Use task keys directly in commit messages and tools. Compliance and audit tracking Create clear documentation paths for billing and ISO compliant audits. How project and task keys work Every project gets a short key and every task in that project gets a sequential number. Project keys are short codes like MKTG or BRND Task keys combine the project key and the number, like MKTG 42 These keys appear everywhere in awork and can be searched, copied, and used anywhere. [!IMPORTANT] Editable project keys: Project keys can be renamed. Task numbers stay the same. Enabling and using keys Keys are automatically generated for all projects and tasks based on project names and creation order. Keys are hidden by default in workspaces created before keys were introduced. In newer workspaces, they're visible by default. A workspace admin can adjust visibility at any time in Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) → Workspace → Tasks : Enable or disable Show project and task keys for all projects Individual projects can override the workspace setting via Project Settings → General : Choose Show , Hide , or Workspace Default for the Task and project key option [!IMPORTANT] Important: Keys only appear when visibility is enabled at the workspace or project level. How visibility control works Key visibility is controlled on two levels: Workspace setting: A simple on/off toggle in Settings → Workspace → Tasks : Show project and task keys for all projects This sets the default for all projects. Project setting: Each project can choose: Workspace Default : Follows the workspace setting (default) On : Always show keys for this project Off : Never show keys for this project [!WARNING] What visibility controls: When keys are hidden, they don't appear in task lists, dropdown menus, task widgets, or other places in awork. However, they're always shown on the project detail page, in the Key column in the project overview, and in URLs. Key features Auto generated project keys New projects get a 4 character key based on the project name. Sequential task numbering Tasks are numbered in creation order within each project and never change. Editable project keys Project admins can rename keys up to 32 characters (uppercase letters, numbers, hyphens, and underscores). Smart key search Search across all projects using a full key (MKTG 42) or just a number (42). Flexible visibility control Set defaults at the workspace level and override per project. Copy with one click Click a task key to copy the task URL, or click a project key to copy the project URL. Audit log entries Changes to project keys are logged for compliance tracking. Permissions and access control Visibility and editing depend on your role. All users can see project and task keys when visibility is enabled in workspace or project settings. Users with write permissions for project settings or project details , or who can create new projects , can edit the project key and adjust visibility for individual projects. Workspace admins can edit keys and set the default visibility for all projects across the entire workspace. [!NOTE] Tip: Use workspace defaults to keep visibility consistent and only override when needed. Known limitations and notes No keys for private tasks Private tasks without a project don't get task numbers. Old keys don't redirect after renaming Old keys no longer work after a rename. Only the current key works. [!NOTE] Important: When renaming a project key, a warning appears to help you avoid accidentally breaking existing references. [!CAUTION] Keep in mind: Keys are reusable after project deletion Deleting a project makes its key available again, which can cause confusion with old references. FAQ What happens when I rename a project key? Old references stop working immediately. From then on, only the new project key works. Can I search using just a task number? Yes. If you enter just a number like 42, you'll find all tasks ending in 42 across all projects. Who can edit project keys? Users with write permissions for project settings or project details, users who can create new projects, and workspace admins can edit project keys. Do private tasks get task keys? No. Private tasks don't get task numbers because they're personal notes, not trackable project work. Can project keys be hidden? Yes. Visibility can be controlled at both the workspace and project level.
Get an Overview of All Projects In the project overview , you can see all projects that are visible to you. You can switch between List and Timeline view depending on whether you prefer table logic or
Get an Overview of All Projects In the project overview , you can see all projects that are visible to you. You can switch between List and Timeline view depending on whether you prefer table logic or timeline logic. You can customize the overview by sorting, grouping, and using saved filters. The Project List You can access the project overview from the main menu and then click on Projects . In the overview, you'll see a list of all projects that are visible to you. All projects are sorted alphabetically. The sorting order works like this: Special characters come before numbers and letters Underscore comes before hyphen Numbers come before letters Actions on Projects When you hover over a project row, an action button appears next to the project title. The following actions are available: Edit, Copy link, Pin as favorite in menu, Duplicate, Start timer, Log time, Assign members, Change status, Change project type, Color, Link Slack, Create template, Create workflow, Move project, Open timeline, Open in new tab, Delete. The Project Timeline Click Timeline in the header at the top center next to List to see all projects as a timeline. At the same time, you'll see the project list on the left side. You can resize the list or timeline by dragging the divider line between the two areas. [!IMPORTANT] For a project to be displayed in the timeline, it must have a start and end date . Add the dates in the project details or in the edit window. Show Milestones in the Timeline You can display milestones by clicking the milestone icon in the top right. They appear as small diamonds at the top of each project bar. [!NOTE] Milestones that fall outside the project's time range are not displayed. When you hover over a milestone, you'll see its full name. [!IMPORTANT] Tip: For the same type of milestones, it's best to use the same colors. This way, you can quickly see what type of milestone it is in the timeline. Configure the Display Configure the view to your liking using the options in the top right. Sort by: Tasks, Budget, Created, Due, Progress, Key, Client, Name, Start date, Status, Workflow Group by: Due week, Due month, Client, Status, Status type, Type, Responsible, Workflow Choose displayed columns: awork automatically remembers your selection. Create a filter and save it, or select a saved filter. The filter bar can be shown or hidden using the filter button in the action bar (funnel icon). Search for projects using the search field in the top left with the magnifying glass icon (next to the + Project button). The list is automatically searched and filtered accordingly. When you clear the search text, you'll return to your previous view. [!IMPORTANT] Reset the selected sorting, grouping, and filtering criteria by clicking Reset to default in the action button in the top right. Export Projects You can download the project overview in Excel format via the action button in the top right of the list and timeline Export . The export contains the raw data from the project overview, which you can use for your own analyses. You can find more information about exporting here here. Best Practices How to View All Projects for a User or Client There are two ways to see all projects that a user or client is assigned to: Filter the project overview by the user or client Open the user or client details ( Settings Users or Clients in the main menu) and switch to the Projects tab. FAQ Where do I find the project overview? Open the main menu and click on Projects . Why don't I see a project in the timeline view? For a project to be displayed in the timeline, it must have a start and end date. Add these in the project details or in the edit window. Why can't I find my project? If you can't find a project in the project overview or through search, you probably don't have enough permissions to see it. Ask the project manager for access, for example by being assigned to the project or added to the team. I can find my project through search, but it's not showing in the project list. What can I do? Most likely a filter is still active. Click the funnel icon to check if a filter is selected. Why can't I create a filter in the project list? Click the funnel icon in the top right ( Show filters ). A row with filter options will appear above the project list/timeline. Here you can add a filter or click Advanced to create a complex project filter.
Time Tracking in Projects In this article, you'll learn how to use time tracking in your project. You'll discover how to manage budgets, create time entries, use different views and filters, and expor
Time Tracking in Projects In this article, you'll learn how to use time tracking in your project. You'll discover how to manage budgets, create time entries, use different views and filters, and export time data. Key Benefits and Use Cases With project time tracking, you keep an eye on effort, budget, and billing: View all tracked time directly in the project Monitor budget and billing including billability Compare plan vs. actual adjust planned efforts and see progress Check retainer budgets development per month as a bar chart Edit multiple time entries at once in the project or in reports How to Access Time Tracking in Your Project 1. Open a project. 2. Click Time in the header. (If you don't see the tab, first click the More dropdown menu.) In the Time tab of your project, you'll find all time entries recorded on the project (or the project's tasks). [!NOTE] Important: Running time entries that were started with the timer but haven't been stopped yet won't be displayed here. Project KPIs Total tracked time broken down into billable and non billable Budget project budget and tracked time; you can adjust the project budget directly via Edit Billable time to be billed and already billed time; use + Invoice to go to Time Reports and create an invoice (the current month is automatically selected there and can be adjusted) Actual vs. Plan tracked time vs. sum of planned efforts for all tasks [!WARNING] Note: The + Invoice button is grayed out if there's no billable time. Switch Views Above the chart, you'll find a toggle with two options: Plan vs. actual : Shows a comparison between planned and actually tracked hours as a line chart. Retainer : monthly bar chart showing how the budget has developed over the months. Time : Shows tracked time as a bar chart by time period. Plan vs. Actual The line chart in the Plan vs. Actual view lets you quickly see your project budget progress. The line shows tracked time compared to your project budget. Once tracked time approaches the project budget, the line turns red. Configure display options Click the settings icon to the right above the chart. A settings menu opens with these options: Show completed tasks : Show or hide completed tasks Show lists and tasks without planned effort : Also displays entries without plan values Show only billable tracked time : Filters the display to billable time only Click the respective toggle to enable or disable the option. Navigate by time period: Use the arrow icons in the top right of the chart. [!IMPORTANT] Important: In this view, completed tasks are always included in the calculation, regardless of whether they're hidden or visible. At the top right above the line chart, you'll see completed tasks compared to open tasks . Below the line chart, you'll find a comparison of tracked and planned time. Expand task lists Time entries are initially grouped by list. Click the arrow to the left of a list name to show the tasks it contains. Edit planned effort In the expanded list view, you can click the hour values in the column to adjust the planned effort for individual lists or tasks. Time In the Time view, you'll see all tracked time for your project over the entire time period. The bar chart gives you an overview of how tracked time breaks down by criteria. When you hover over bars with your mouse, you'll see additional information (depending on the grouping). Adjust time period Click the dropdown to the right above the chart to change the displayed time period. These options are available: Day : Daily view Week : Weekly view Month : Monthly view Quarter : Quarterly view Year : Yearly view All time : All tracked time Use the back arrow and forward arrow to the left and right of the time period dropdown to navigate to the previous or next time period. Change grouping Click the grouping icon in the toolbar to group time entries by different criteria: Activity Billability User Day, week, month, quarter, or year Configure the time table Drag and drop columns to reorder them Sort time entries ascending or descending per column using the dropdown arrows that appear when you hover over the column header Resize columns using the column handle Apply actions to selected entries In the time table, you can select individual entries using the checkbox on the left side of each row. Selected rows are highlighted in color. Click the checkbox in the table header to select or deselect all visible entries. When entries are selected, an action bar appears at the bottom of the screen. It shows the number of selected entries and offers various actions: Delete entries using the trash icon Via the action menu: Mark as billed, Mark as billable, Mark as unbilled, Mark as non billable, Set activity, Set project, Set task, Set user, Delete Action button per time entry In the left User column, there's an action button where you can edit, duplicate, or delete the time entry, as well as restart the timer. Retainer Monitor your project's monthly retainer budget in the Retainer view. There you'll find a monthly bar chart showing how the budget has developed over the past months. For future months, the currently configured budget is displayed. The chart shows: a light gray line monthly base budget a purple line actually tracked hours that were applied to the budget If carryover is enabled, the current month's area is striped. When you hover your mouse over the line points or bars, the monthly budget and used budget are displayed. Track, Search, and Export Time Track Time in the Project Click + Time above the chart to create a new time entry . The project is already pre selected. Search Time Entries by Task Using the line at the top left with the magnifying glass icon to the right of + Time , you can search for main and subtasks within the project. Export Data 1. Click the action button to the right above the chart. A dropdown menu opens. 2. Select the Export option to download the time data. FAQ Are running timers shown in the project Time tab? No. Running time entries (timer started but not yet stopped) are not displayed there yet. Can I adjust the project budget directly in the Time overview? Yes. In the Budget tile, you can adjust the project budget directly via Edit . Why is the + Invoice button grayed out? The + Invoice button is grayed out when there's no billable time. Can I edit all time entries in a project at once? Yes. You can do this in the Time tab in the project as well as in Time Reports . You can select multiple or all time entries using the checkboxes on the left and edit them collectively.
Working with Project Types Project types help you categorize your projects and get better insights from your data. [!NOTE] Each project can only belong to one project type. The assignment is optional
Working with Project Types Project types help you categorize your projects and get better insights from your data. [!NOTE] Each project can only belong to one project type. The assignment is optional . Once you've set up project types, you can assign a project to a specific project type, filter projects by type, and analyze time reports accordingly this makes your data much easier to understand at a glance. Key benefits and use cases Organize your projects consistently by assigning them a clear category Filter and group projects in your project overview by project type Analyze time reports by selecting one or multiple project types Compare tracked time by type by summing up tracked time per project type in reports How to use project types Create and manage project types 1. Navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu). 2. Open Categories . 3. In the Project Types section, click on + Project Type . 1) Set the details for the project type: a unique name, a brief description, and an icon In the list, you can edit and delete project types. [!NOTE] Project types can only be selected when creating a new project if you've already created project types under Settings Categories Project Types. By default, no project types are set up. Analyze time by project types In the Time Analysis menu (🔐 Professional Plan and above ) you can specifically select project types for your analysis. 1. Open Time Analysis . 2. Open the Filter tab in the project selection dropdown menu. 3. Select one or multiple Project Types to limit the analysis to these types. 4. Sum by project type so you can compare how much time was tracked for different project types during a time period Filter and group projects by project types In your project overview (Main menu Projects) you can: Create filters based on project types Group projects by project types This way you keep an optimal overview of your projects organized by project types. FAQ What are project types? Project types help you categorize your projects and get better insights from your data. Can a project belong to multiple project types? No. Each project can only belong to one project type. Do I have to assign a project type to a project? No. Assigning a project type to a project is optional. How do I create and manage project types? Go to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Categories Project Types , click on + Project Type and create a type with a unique name, a brief description, and an icon. In the list, you can edit and delete project types. Why can't I select a project type when creating a project? Project types can only be selected when creating a new project if you've already created project types. By default, no project types are set up.
Dark mode Switch awork's appearance to dark mode and choose whether you want it permanently enabled, disabled, or following your browser or device settings. Enable or disable dark mode from your profi
Dark mode Switch awork's appearance to dark mode and choose whether you want it permanently enabled, disabled, or following your browser or device settings. Enable or disable dark mode from your profile 1. Click on your profile picture in the bottom left of the main menu (or your initials) 2. Turn dark mode on or off using the toggle switch Set dark mode options in your account settings 1. Click on your profile picture in the bottom left of the main menu (or your initials). 2. Open Account settings. 3. Choose one of the following options: Off : Dark mode is always disabled Auto : awork automatically adopts your operating system/browser setting (dark mode is active if your browser or system uses dark mode) On : Dark mode is always enabled [!IMPORTANT] For dark mode, you can also choose the variant : Standard or High contrast FAQ How do I enable dark mode in awork? Click on your profile picture in the bottom left of the main menu (or your initials) and toggle dark mode on or off. Alternatively, you can go to your Account settings and set dark mode to On , Off , or Auto . What does the "Auto" option mean for dark mode? With Auto , awork adopts your operating system or browser setting. If your system or browser uses dark mode, awork will display dark mode as well. How does dark mode work in the mobile app? In the mobile app, dark mode follows your device's system settings. If you want to change it, adjust the theme directly in iOS or Android. Can I customize other colors or fonts in awork? No. Additional design customizations aren't available in awork. Colors, contrasts, and typography are intentionally chosen to make awork as readable as possible. awork currently supports only light mode and dark mode . Custom themes with your own colors and fonts aren't available to keep the appearance, readability, and usability consistent.
Account Settings Account Settings is your personal control center in awork. Here you can customize your login, display, time tracking options, reports, and notifications to suit your needs. How to ope
Account Settings Account Settings is your personal control center in awork. Here you can customize your login, display, time tracking options, reports, and notifications to suit your needs. How to open Account Settings There are 2 ways to access your Account Settings: click on your profile picture in the bottom left of the main menu (or your initials) and select Account Settings or navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) and select Account Manage your account Workspace Email for notifications publicly visible in your workspace Account Email for signing in and for important account emails used across all your awork workspaces [!NOTE] Changing your email address requires verification. Enter the one time code that was sent to your inbox. Password to change your password, you'll need your current password Enable login via Google or Microsoft If you'd prefer to skip passwords, link your Google or Microsoft account and sign in with one click. Link from the start : When creating your account or accepting an invitation, select Sign in with Google or Sign in with Microsoft to link your account right away. Link later 1. Click Set up next to Enable login via Google or Microsoft 2. Choose your preferred provider and complete the login process 3. Use the provider button on the awork login page Disconnect link 1. Click Set up next to Enable login via Google or Microsoft 2. Click Disconnect from Google/Microsoft [!WARNING] If you disconnect the link and never set a password, awork will send you an email with a link to create one. Email/password login always works alongside linked accounts. Enable passkey login Check out this article for more information on setup: Passkeys Multi Factor Authentication (MFA) Check out this article for more information on enabling it: Multi Factor Authentication (MFA) Customize display settings Language choose German or English Time zone Your time zone determines how dates and times are displayed in awork. It's set when you create your account. Manually adjust your time zone if you travel , as it won't update automatically. [!NOTE] Note: The first day of the week in Time My Week follows your browser's language/region settings. English (UK) starts on Monday; English (US) starts on Sunday. Dark Mode Choose your preferred appearance: Off always uses Light Mode Auto uses your browser/operating system settings (default) On always uses Dark Mode [!NOTE] For Dark Mode, you can also choose the variant : Standard or High Contrast Open links in Desktop App enable this option if you want links to always open in the desktop app (you need to have the Mac or Windows app installed) Hide Start/Stop Timer hide the stopwatch buttons (timers) for your user both the stopwatch in the bottom right and the smaller timers in projects and tasks Time format for totals Control how tracked time totals are displayed in projects and tasks: Tracked time totals are displayed by default in Auto mode and change depending on the amount: Under 8h as hour format (e.g., 5:30h) Over 8h as day format (e.g., 1.2d) Hours always shows totals as 20:00h Days always shows totals as 2.5d Individual times and running timers will continue to be displayed in the 01:20:30 or 01:20h format. Name display First & Last Name (shows your full name in awork; the last name must be entered in your personal details) First Name Hide recommendations in Time My Day Turn off the toggle so you can see your appointments under Time My Day and create a time entry directly from them. [!WARNING] Note: If your admin has disabled time tracking for all users, the settings Hide Start/Stop Timer and Hide recommendations in Time My Day will be hidden. Projects in the main menu The Projects section in the main menu is divided into Favorites, External Projects, and My Projects. Set in your Account Settings which projects are displayed in the menu: Show Favorites Show External Projects Show My Projects [!NOTE] Sections are only displayed if they contain projects. Set your availability Weekly capacity (in hours) Your weekly working hours play a role in team planning and represent the time available for scheduling in the Planner. The default is 40 hours per week. Working part time or not working on certain days? Then adjust the number of hours. Holiday region Choose your region so you see the appropriate holidays in the workload overview. [!WARNING] Note: Changing your own holiday region requires write permissions for user planning. If your region isn't listed, users with the right permissions can set up custom holidays. Workspace administrators can edit this setting at any time. Enable or disable reports and briefings Stay updated with automated email summaries that you can enable or disable here: Weekly Briefing arrives Monday morning with upcoming deadlines, overdue tasks, and a preview of the coming week Weekly Report arrives Friday with completed tasks, tracked time, and the week's achievements Monthly Report arrives on the 1st of the month with a complete monthly overview including tracked time and productivity statistics Choose your notification settings Enable or disable: Automatically mark notifications as read when clicked Automatically get notifications for tasks you created (Follower) Decide which notifications for tasks, projects, docs, and general items you want to receive and through which channels: In the awork web app Push notifications in the awork app for iOS or Android Email for direct delivery to your inbox Slack for messages via the Slack integration (if linked) Create tasks via email Send an email to your personal task email address, and a private task will be automatically created. Check out this article for more details: Create tasks from emails FAQ Where do I find Account Settings? Click on your profile picture in the bottom left of the main menu (or your initials) and select Account Settings or navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) and select Account . Do Account Settings apply to all my workspaces? Yes. Your Account Settings control how you use awork across all your workspaces. Your Account Email is your primary identification across all awork workspaces. Why is my Account Email different from my Workspace Email? Your Account Email is the one you use to sign in to awork. Only you can change it in your Account Settings. With the same account, you can access multiple awork workspaces. Within each workspace, you have your own user profile. This profile can contain different information depending on the workspace. If permissions allow, other users (like admins) can edit your workspace profile, for example to add contact information. These changes don't affect your login email or your account settings. Notifications are always sent to the email address stored in your account. That's why your account email address and your workspace email can be different. Can I still log in with email and password after linking Google/Microsoft? Yes. After successful linking, you can log in with Google/Microsoft, and email and password login will continue to work as well. What happens if I disconnect Google/Microsoft and never set a password? awork will send you an email with a link to create a password. Why don't I see "Hide Start/Stop Timer" or "Hide recommendations in Time My Day"? If your admin has disabled time tracking for all users, these two settings will be hidden.
Passkeys Passkeys are the fast, secure way to log into awork without a password. This article shows you what passkeys are, how to set them up, and how to sign in with them. Key benefits and use cases
Passkeys Passkeys are the fast, secure way to log into awork without a password. This article shows you what passkeys are, how to set them up, and how to sign in with them. Key benefits and use cases Why you should use passkeys in awork: Enhanced security through unique, securely stored keys for each account Phishing resistant , since passkeys are never shared over the network More convenience , because you don't have to remember complex passwords Faster login with just a few clicks How to use passkeys Passkeys are based on cryptographic keys that are stored on your device or in your password manager. [!WARNING] Important: Make sure your device and browser support passkeys. Modern browsers like current versions of Chrome, Safari, and Edge support this feature. Setting up passkeys 1. Log in to your awork account 2. Open Account Settings from your profile in the main menu at the bottom left 3. Enable Enable passkey login in the Account section 4. Click Set up 5. Follow the instructions to register the passkey using your preferred method 6. Authenticate using your device method, such as Face ID, Touch ID, or a security key 7. Complete the registration to enable passkeys for your awork account Logging in with passkeys 1. Go to the awork login page and select Sign in with passkey 2. Select your passkey when prompted 3. Authenticate to log in quickly and securely Notes Removing passkeys Passkeys cannot be removed from within awork, as they are managed through the method you chose. [!NOTE] Tip: Check the instructions for your browser or password manager to remove a passkey there. You can always click Set up again in awork to create a new passkey. FAQ What are passkeys? Passkeys are a login method using cryptographic keys that are stored on your device or in a password manager. They are phishing resistant and are never shared over the network. Which devices and browsers support passkeys? Your device and browser need to support passkeys. Modern devices and current versions of Chrome, Safari, and Edge support this feature. Where do I enable passkeys in awork? In Account Settings in the Account section. There you'll find Enable passkey login and the Set up option. How do I log in with a passkey? On the awork login page, select Sign in with passkey , choose your passkey, and authenticate using your device method. Can I remove passkeys in awork? No. Passkeys cannot be removed from within awork. You remove them in your browser or password manager. You can create a new passkey anytime through Set up .
OLED mode In this article, you'll learn how to enable OLED mode (High Contrast) in awork. This setting optimizes the display for OLED screens and provides increased contrast for better readability. Co
OLED mode In this article, you'll learn how to enable OLED mode (High Contrast) in awork. This setting optimizes the display for OLED screens and provides increased contrast for better readability. Configure Dark Mode with High Contrast 1. Open Settings Click on the gear icon in the bottom left corner of the awork interface. You'll find it in the footer of the left navigation bar, right next to your profile name. 2. Select the Account section In the settings navigation, choose the Account menu item. It's located directly below the search field in the settings sidebar. 3. Open Theme variant Scroll down in the Account section to the Display settings area. Click on the dropdown field for the theme variant in the Dark mode row. 4. Select High Contrast In the dropdown menu that opens, choose the High Contrast option instead of Standard. This setting activates the OLED optimized mode with increased contrast. OLED mode with high contrast is now configured. The changes are applied immediately, and the user interface displays the optimized contrast.
Joining a Workspace via Email Domain As soon as a team member signs up with the same email domain on awork, that domain gets recognized and automatically assigned to your existing workspace. This arti
Joining a Workspace via Email Domain As soon as a team member signs up with the same email domain on awork, that domain gets recognized and automatically assigned to your existing workspace. This article explains how you can enable this feature and what you should keep in mind. Key benefits and use cases Easy management : Domain gets recognized and assigned automatically. Flexibility : Admins can customize domains in the workspace settings. How does registration with the same email domain work? 1. Open the settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu). 2. Go to the Workspace section. 3. Enable the feature Allow workspace joining via email domain . 4. Click on + Domain to add an email domain that's already being used by team members. 5. Select the permission role that these people will get in your workspace. From now on, when someone signs up with this email domain, they'll be asked whether they want to join this workspace or create a new one. [!IMPORTANT] Make sure you always have enough licenses available in your workspace. If all licenses are already in use and a team member wants to join, the admin will receive an email and can extend the licenses. FAQ What happens if all licenses are being used and a user wants to join the workspace? The admin will receive an email to be informed about the new license requirements. How can I change the email domain for my workspace? You can do this in the settings under the Workspace section. Can I use multiple email domains in one workspace? Yes, admins can set up multiple email domains for their workspace.
Multi Factor Authentication (MFA) With the new Multi Factor Authentication (MFA) , awork gives you an extra layer of security for your login. In addition to your password, you can now verify yourself
Multi Factor Authentication (MFA) With the new Multi Factor Authentication (MFA) , awork gives you an extra layer of security for your login. In addition to your password, you can now verify yourself via an app or email code quick, secure, and super easy to set up. Perfect for anyone who wants to better protect their accounts or has special security requirements. What is MFA? MFA (also called 2 factor authentication) protects your awork account by requiring a second factor during login like a code sent via email or generated by an authenticator app. This significantly reduces the risk of unauthorized access. Supported Authentication Methods You can currently use the following MFA methods in awork: Email code (sent to your verified awork email address) App authentication via any TOTP compatible app such as: Google Authenticator 1Password Authenticator in Safari (macOS) ...and all other TOTP compatible apps 💡 Passkeys (biometric login) are already separately integrated in awork and can be used independently of MFA. Setting Up MFA You can easily enable MFA in your Account Settings : 1. Click on your profile picture in the bottom left of the main menu . 2. Open Account Settings . 3. In the Account Multi Factor Authentication (MFA) section, click Manage . 4. Turn on the main toggle for authentication to enable the email code option . 5. You can additionally enable the app code option with the Authenticator App toggle. Enabling App Authentication 1. Click the toggle next to App Authentication . 2. Scan the displayed QR code with your preferred authenticator app. 3. Enter the generated code to confirm. 4. After successful entry, MFA is enabled. Email Authentication The email option is always active once MFA is turned on. It uses your verified awork email address. If your email isn't verified yet, you'll be prompted to confirm it before setup. Disabling or Changing MFA You can disable MFA anytime in your settings: 1. Click Manage and turn off the toggle to disable MFA or the app method. 2. Confirm the deactivation in the dialog window. 3. After that, MFA must be set up completely again. 💡 Note: Even if the app still knows your code, the setup in awork must be done again. Logging In with MFA When MFA is enabled, you'll be asked for a second factor after logging in with your email and password. How Login with MFA Works 1. You enter your email address and password. 2. You'll then be prompted to either: Enter the code from your authenticator app Or use the code sent via email 3. You can switch between both options anytime via a link. 4. After entering a valid code, you'll be logged in. [!NOTE] If you log in via an email provider (e.g., Google Login) , MFA won't be shown the security check is handled by the provider instead. Workspace Wide MFA Activation Admins can make 2 factor authentication mandatory for the entire workspace. 1. Go to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Workspace Workspace section 2. Enable the toggle for Multi Factor Authentication Required When users log in next, everyone will need to provide a second factor (email code or authenticator app). Users can adjust MFA settings in their profile but cannot disable it. This applies to all workspaces linked to the user's awork account.
Your User Profile In this article, you'll learn how to access your user profile in awork and what options are available to you there. You'll discover how to open your account settings, switch workspac
Your User Profile In this article, you'll learn how to access your user profile in awork and what options are available to you there. You'll discover how to open your account settings, switch workspaces, change the language, and use additional profile options. Opening Your User Profile Click on your profile area In the main menu at the bottom left, you'll find your profile area with your profile picture/avatar and name. Click on it to open your user profile. Available Options After opening the profile menu, you'll see various options: Account Settings Open your personal account settings Workspace Selection Switch between multiple workspaces The workspace you're currently in is displayed in the profile menu Click on it to open the workspace selection window Language Change the display language Your current language setting is indicated by a flag symbol Click on "Language" to switch and select your preferred language. You can choose between German and English. The currently selected language is marked with a colored border Dark Mode Toggle between light and dark design Recommend awork Access to the referral program with rewards Click on Recommend awork to open the referral program and select your preferred reward About awork Get information about your current version and workspace Click on About awork to display information about your current workspace, including: Workspace name and URL Workspace ID Release title and version Legal notice and privacy policy Log Out Log out of awork Additional Profile Options 1. About awork Click on About awork to display information about your current workspace, including: Workspace name and URL Workspace ID Release and version Legal notice and privacy policy
Using Activities Correctly Activities are a fixed set of values that you assign to tasks and time entries. This lets you classify what type of work was completed super useful if you want to, for examp
Using Activities Correctly Activities are a fixed set of values that you assign to tasks and time entries. This lets you classify what type of work was completed super useful if you want to, for example, bill different hourly rates per activity. [!IMPORTANT] Important: Activity is a required field for time entries and tasks and must always be specified. The activity you used most recently will always be pre selected when you create new time entries and tasks. When you start a timer on a task, the started time automatically takes on the activity of that task . Main Benefits and Use Cases Activities make your work easier to analyze and manage: Cleanly classify work across tasks and time entries Enable billing by activity , for example with different hourly rates Keep time tracking consistent , since activity is a required field How to Use Activities Creating Activities 1. Navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Categories Activities . 2. Click + Activity in the top right. 3. Enter a name and choose an icon. 4. Optional: Add a description. Editing or Deleting an Activity You can delete activities using the action button. [!WARNING] Important: When deleting, you must select another activity. All time entries and tasks that had the deleted activity will be reassigned to it. Setting the Activity for a Task You can set a task's activity in the edit window or directly in the detail view. 1. Open the task. 2. Click on the activity in the detail view. 3. Select a different activity from the list. When creating a new task, you can select the activity from the dropdown under Add details . You can also change the activity for multiple tasks at once. Setting the Activity When Tracking Time You set an activity's time in the edit window when you create or edit a time entry. If you're tracking time using the timer, you can open the options and adjust the activity there: 1. Click on the running time entry. 2. Open the options. 3. Adjust the activity. If you start the timer on a task, the activity of that task will be used. Otherwise, the activity you used most recently for time tracking will be pre selected. FAQ What are activities? Activities are a fixed set of values that you assign to tasks and time entries to classify the type of work. Are activities required fields? Yes. Activity is a required field for time entries and tasks and must always be specified. Why should I use activities? Activities help you classify your work. This is useful, for example, if you want to bill different hourly rates for different activities. What happens when I delete an activity? When deleting, you must select another activity. All time entries and tasks that had the deleted activity will be reassigned to it. Which activity is pre selected for new tasks or time entries? When creating new tasks and time entries, the activity you used most recently will always be pre selected.
Using Quick Actions With Quick Actions, you're able to quickly and efficiently log time, create projects, tasks and clients, and search awork from anywhere. But here's the best part: you can use them
Using Quick Actions With Quick Actions, you're able to quickly and efficiently log time, create projects, tasks and clients, and search awork from anywhere. But here's the best part: you can use them completely with your keyboard, which means you can work incredibly fast. [!IMPORTANT] You open Quick Actions with ⌘ + J (Mac) or Ctrl + J (Windows) .
Notifications In this article, you'll learn how to access and manage your notifications in awork. You'll discover what types of notifications are available and how you can unsubscribe from notificatio
Notifications In this article, you'll learn how to access and manage your notifications in awork. You'll discover what types of notifications are available and how you can unsubscribe from notifications. Notifications help you stay on top of important deadlines and keep you informed about updates. Opening and viewing notifications 1. Notification icon in the main menu The notification icon is located at the bottom of the left navigation bar, in the footer area next to the settings icon. The bell symbol shows you with a badge how many unread notifications you have. 2. Open the notification panel Click on the bell symbol to open the notification panel. A floating window appears that displays various information to you. Upcoming deadlines Your new projects Your new tasks Your new documents Your new shared filters Project news Birthdays Grouped notifications: Notifications about status changes in projects and tasks are displayed as expandable rows. These summarize the status changes of tasks (visualized through colored icons) since the last "read" time for the project. Expand the row using the arrow symbol pointing right to see all the details. For your new projects, new tasks, new documents, and new shared filters, you can directly turn off notifications from the notification panel or activate reminder functions ( Remind me tomorrow , Remind me in an hour ) Marking notifications as read Click the checkmark next to a notification: Mark as read In a group, you can use the double checkmarks to Mark all in this group as read Using the double checkmarks in the bottom right corner of the notification popup, you can Mark all as read . [!WARNING] For the notification popup of the bell , there is no view for already read entries. Enabling or unsubscribing from notifications The notification settings are located in your account settings . You have two ways to get there: 1. Click on the settings icon in the notification popup (bell). The Notifications section opens automatically. 2. Open the account settings from your profile or the settings icon in the main menu and scroll to the Notifications section. [!IMPORTANT] Enable or disable: Automatically mark notifications as read when clicked Automatically receive notifications for self created tasks (watching) For each type of notification, you can choose which channels you'd like to be notified through: In the awork web application Push notifications in the <u awork App</u for iOS or Android (not available for all notifications) Email for direct delivery to your inbox Slack for messages via the <u Slack integration</u (if linked) [!WARNING] Note: A user only receives a notification that they've been assigned a task once the project status has been changed from Not started to Running (yellow status). This allows a project to be planned in advance without triggering notifications. Notifications for upcoming tasks and projects Upcoming tasks Beginning of the week: Notification about tasks that are due this week. Daily reminders: Notification for tasks due the next day. Friday: The reminder also includes tasks due on the weekend (Saturday and Sunday). Upcoming projects Friday: Notification about projects that are due in the coming week. Email notifications are typically sent in the morning. FAQ Can I prevent notifications from being marked as read when I click on them? Yes, you can. Open your account settings and scroll to the Notifications section. Here you can specify whether notifications should be automatically marked as read when clicked or whether you prefer to mark them as read manually using the checkmark. How do I disable email notifications? In your notification settings (click the settings icon in the notification menu or open account settings). You can disable email notifications for each notification type. I've disabled everything, but I'm still getting emails. Why? Some system emails, such as those for exports or automations, can't be completely disabled and are sent regardless of your personal notification settings. Also check whether it's the newsletter. You can unsubscribe from it using the unsubscribe link at the bottom of the email.
Docs There are three main areas where a Doc can exist: Private Docs, Space Docs, and Project Docs. Private Docs Private Docs work similarly to private projects: only you can see them until you decide
Docs There are three main areas where a Doc can exist: Private Docs, Space Docs, and Project Docs. Private Docs Private Docs work similarly to private projects: only you can see them until you decide to share them with someone or move them to a Space or Project. These Docs are exclusively visible to you and inaccessible to anyone else in your workspace. Space Docs You can think of Spaces like folders within a workspace. Here you organize and manage your Docs. You can create multiple Spaces in a workspace, but a Doc can only be in one Space at a time. You can move Docs between Spaces or assign them to a Project. Project Docs Project Docs are assigned to a specific project and can only be accessed through that project. They remain in the project until you move them to a Space or make them private. This keeps all project related Docs well organized and easy to find. Project Docs also offer special features, such as linking tasks for status tracking. Trash For each area where Docs can exist, there's a separate trash. You can access it from the sidebar. So there's a trash for Private Docs, one for Space Docs, and one for Project Docs. Docs in the trash can be restored or permanently deleted for up to a year. Docs Home Page The Docs home page is your central hub for managing and organizing your Docs. Here you have quick access to all your Docs and can easily assign them to different Spaces or Projects. Sidebar The Docs sidebar is the central navigation element. It's located on the left side of your screen and gives you quick access to all your Docs, favorites, trash, and content shared with you. You can collapse and expand the sidebar. Individual sections within it can also be collapsed and expanded for better clarity. This lets you focus on the content that matters to you. The state (open or closed) is saved for each area where you work with Docs. Rearranging and Nesting Docs You can easily rearrange Docs and Spaces using drag and drop in the sidebar. Just click on an item, hold it, and drag it to the desired position a placeholder shows you where it will be moved. You can also indent Docs to organize them as sub Docs. Drag a Doc slightly to the right and it will automatically become nested. If the parent Doc didn't have sub Docs before, a small arrow appears showing the new structure. Spaces Here you'll find Spaces where you store your Docs. Click on a Space to open it and see the first Doc. To create a new Space, hover over the Space title area and click the plus icon. There you can customize the appearance and set permissions for workspace, users, and teams. You can edit existing Spaces using the three dot menu. Favorites Mark your most important or favorite Docs as favorites to keep them easily accessible. You can mark or unmark Docs as favorites either using the action bar at the top of the Doc or through the three dot menu in the sidebar. Shared With Me All Docs that have been shared with you, your team, or your workspace appear in this section. Recently Edited Docs Here you'll see a list of Docs you've recently edited. If you frequently switch between many Docs, this section helps you keep track. [!WARNING] Note: You can't customize the sorting in this section. The Doc and Its Components The Doc page is the main area for creating, editing, and sharing your content. This is where the actual work with your Docs happens. At the top of the Doc page, you'll find the top bar with all the important buttons and information. The blue button in the top left is for creating new Docs. On the right side of the top bar, you'll find actions like setting favorites, sharing, managing followers, or searching Docs. The three dot menu gives you access to additional options like moving, duplicating, copying links, or deleting. Breadcrumbs On the left side of the top bar, you'll see breadcrumbs that show you where your Doc is located (Space, Project, or private). You can click on individual elements to navigate directly to them. Table of Contents When you structure your content with headings, they appear as small markers on the right side of the Doc. The blue marker shows which heading is currently in the visible area. Hover your mouse over the right edge and a popup opens showing all headings in the Doc click on one to jump directly to that section. [!WARNING] Note: The table of contents is always visible and cannot be disabled. Creating and Editing Docs You can create Docs in various ways depending on where you are in awork and what type of Doc you want to create. Main Button The + Doc button in the top left is visible on the Docs home page, in a Space, or in the Project tab. It creates a new Doc at the same level as the one currently displayed. Creating Sub Docs With the small + buttons next to Doc elements, you can specifically create sub Docs. The breadcrumbs immediately show you the new position of the sub Doc. [!NOTE] Tip: You can also move and nest Docs later using drag and drop. Creating Private Docs Go to the Docs home page and click the + Doc button to create a private Doc. Moving Docs Using a Doc's context menu, you can easily move it to another Space, Project, or to your private area. In the selection popup, click on your desired destination (Space, Project, Private). The Doc will be placed at the top level by default. If you want to move it as a sub Doc, select a parent Doc in the popup. Sharing a Doc Share Docs easily using the Share button in the action bar or the context menu. You can control access at the workspace, team, or user level and set individual permissions. [!WARNING] Note: It's only possible to add further restrictions within sub Doc levels, not the other way around. Copying a Doc as Markdown (.md) Document structure and formatting are preserved outside of awork, so you can reuse the document content in AI tools or Markdown based workflows, for example. 1. Click the three dot menu in the top right. 2. Select Copy as Markdown . [!WARNING] The formatted Markdown is copied directly to your clipboard. File download is not supported. The Markdown export supports: Headings (H1 H3) Paragraphs, bold, italic, strikethrough, underline, and inline code Code blocks Bullet lists, numbered lists, and checklists Tables Block quotes Dividing lines Emojis User mentions (exported as links) Inline comments (appended at the end as a comments section) File attachments (exported as links back to awork) Every export also includes a YAML front matter block with the document title and links to the associated awork context, such as projects, tasks, or document sections. Exporting a Doc as PDF There are several ways to export a Doc as PDF. You'll always find the option in the three dot menu (...) of a Doc and via the Export button in the top right within the open Doc. Click Export as PDF A print window will open, which may look slightly different depending on your browser. Make sure to enable the Print backgrounds option in the print window. Save the PDF file to your device or print it directly. You now have a PDF version of your Doc that you can easily share. [!WARNING] Notes If certain background colors are missing in an exported PDF, for example text colors or code block formats, check the settings in the export window and make sure the Background graphics option is enabled. PDF export is currently only available for individual Docs. Sub Docs are not included in the export. Mentions don't contain links, but still provide helpful context. Comments are not included in the export. Deleting a Doc Each Doc type has its own trash the last section in the sidebar. The trash for Space Docs is in the Space itself. The one for Project Docs is in the Project. The one for Private Docs is in the main sidebar. When a Doc is deleted, all its sub Docs automatically go to trash as well. They cannot be edited there and will be permanently deleted after one year. Individual Docs or sub Docs can be restored using the context menu. [!WARNING] Important: When you permanently delete a Doc from the trash using the context menu, all content is permanently removed and cannot be recovered. Doc Features Live Collaboration Multiple people can work on a Doc simultaneously. You'll see who's currently writing or highlighting text in real time. Linking a Task to a Doc There are two different ways to link a task to a project Doc. 1. In the Doc When you're in a Project Doc, you'll see an area below the title where you can link a task from the project or create a new one. It remains linked until you remove it. 2. In the Task In the task details, there's an additional tab for linking a Doc directly from the task or creating a new linked Doc for the task. You can make the link through "Select Doc". Unlinking The link between a task and a Doc can be removed from either side. In the Doc's task linking, there's an option in the three dot menu to Unlink from Doc . You can also do this through the three dot menu in the Docs sidebar. In the task details, you can hover over the linked Doc and remove it using the (X). [!WARNING] Note: Only one task can be linked to a Project Doc at a time. Creating Tasks with AI Highlight text in a Doc and use the Create Task button to generate tasks from it. Then select the project and task list where the tasks should be saved. Comments in Docs Highlight text, click the comment icon, and start a new comment conversation. You can mention others, reply, use emojis, or delete comments. A thread remains until it's marked as "resolved". If the first comment is deleted, the entire thread disappears. You can copy the link to the thread to share it more easily. Searching Docs You can find Docs using the global search. There's a dedicated Docs tab in the search results. [!NOTE] Note: Deleted Docs in the trash are also shown here. Formatting Content in the Editor Title and Content This is where you write and edit your Doc's actual content. The editor supports everything you already know from task and project descriptions, and more. In the title area, you can also add an emoji to your Doc using the emoji icon to the right of the title. Text Colors Highlight the desired text and click the A icon to select a text color. Syntax Highlighting in Code Blocks Add a code block using the floating action bar. Hover over the code block to select the programming language. The code is automatically highlighted with syntax highlighting. You can also copy the code with a click. Full Screen View for Embedded Images Add images using the floating action bar with the image icon. A placeholder for the image appears. Upload an image using the button or by dragging and dropping. After uploading, you can resize the image using a slider. Versioning With versioning in awork Docs, you can easily track changes and manage your Docs over time. Whether you're working on a private, Space, or Project Doc, every edit is automatically saved as a new version. This keeps you in full control of your document history and lets you rely on a safe backup of your work. You can: View earlier versions of a document Track when and by whom changes were made Restore an older version if needed Your progress is always secure, and team collaboration remains smooth even with many changes. Versioning is available for all Doc types, and each Doc has its own version history. Sub Docs have their own version history and are not part of the parent Doc's versioning. How Does Versioning Work? New versions are automatically created every 5 10 minutes while editing or after a session ends. Each version contains the date, time, and avatar of the last editor, if available. Version history is accessible through the three dot menu (⋯) in the top right of the open Doc or through the context menu in the sidebar. After clicking Versions, a modal opens with a list and preview of all versions (newest at the top). Restoring an Earlier Version To restore an older version, select it from the list and click Restore in the bottom right. Confirm the action in the next step, and you'll then see the restored version of your document. Your current document version isn't deleted. Instead, awork saves it as a new entry in the version history before restoring the older version, so nothing is lost. Depending on your awork plan, older versions may be locked after a certain time. Locked versions remain visible in the list but can no longer be opened or restored. Who Can Restore Versions? From the Professional plan onwards, all users with edit access to a document can view version history and restore versions. Admins have access to history by default. The current sharing or permission settings are maintained when restoring a version they are not changed by the restoration. Rights Management General and Project Specific User Role In the General and Project Specific user role, you can specify whether users in this role should have no rights, read only rights, or write rights to the Docs. [!WARNING] Creating Spaces requires admin rights. Learn more about our rights management in this article. Feature Scope per Plan Basic : Limited; global only (1 Space) Standard : 1 Space and Docs at project level Professional and above: Unlimited; any number of Spaces and Docs at project level, restoration of deleted Docs up to 3 months FAQ Are Docs available in all plans? Docs are available in all plans, but there are differences in scope. You'll find the exact details on our Pricing page. Can external users access Docs? It depends on the specific permissions. External users can only access Project Docs in all cases. If there's no general access to Docs, external users can see Docs shared with them in the Docs tab under Shared With Me .
Configure Your Dashboard In this article, you'll learn how to personalize your awork dashboard by adding new widgets. Set up a customized dashboard with the widgets of your choice. Customize Your Dash
Configure Your Dashboard In this article, you'll learn how to personalize your awork dashboard by adding new widgets. Set up a customized dashboard with the widgets of your choice. Customize Your Dashboard 1. Navigate to the Home section Click on Home in the left sidebar to go to your dashboard. You'll find this menu item directly below the search field, and it displays a small house icon. 2. Open edit mode At the bottom of your screen, you'll find a floating action bar. Click on the first button on the far left when you hover your mouse over it, the tooltip Customize dashboard will appear. Select Widgets 1. Add a widget In the now active editing bar, click the + button on the left to add a widget. 2. Choose a widget A modal window will open with the title Select a widget to add . Here you'll see a grid with different widget options: My today's times List of projects List of tasks Time tracking charts Text note Activities Upcoming birthdays User absences Project progress Click on the widget you want to select it. Save Changes To apply your customizations, click the Save button with the checkmark in the floating action bar at the bottom of your screen. Edit Widgets In edit mode, after clicking Customize dashboard , you can rename widgets by clicking on the title, move widgets around in the columns using drag and drop, adjust widget settings, or remove widgets. 2. Open widget settings To edit a widget's settings, click the gear icon in the upper right corner of the widget. 3. Save widget settings In the Widget settings dialog that opens, you can change the widget's name and use the dropdown menu to change selected data, such as Displayed project or Displayed tasks . Click the Save button to apply your changes. Click Cancel to close the window without saving. 4. To apply your customizations, click the Save button with the checkmark in the floating action bar at the bottom of your screen. Remove a Widget from Your Dashboard To remove a widget, click the X icon in the upper right corner of the widget. The Remove widget tooltip confirms that clicking this will delete the widget from your dashboard. To apply your customizations, click the Save button with the checkmark in the floating action bar at the bottom of your screen. Discard Changes If you don't want to apply your changes, click the X icon with the Cancel tooltip in the floating action bar at the bottom of your screen. All changes you've made will be discarded and your dashboard will return to its previous state. All Widgets Explained My Today's Times This widget shows you all the time you've tracked today. The round progress indicator fills up based on your maximum weekly working hours divided by five days (40h / 5 = 8h). You can track new time using the + button next to the progress indicator, and you can access the Times menu using the stopwatch icon . [!IMPORTANT] If you've already tracked time for today, you can use the action buttons on the right to restart the timer with the same time tracking details. List of Projects By default, this shows all projects where you're part of the project team and that are currently active (yellow status). If your workspace has fewer than three projects, inactive projects will also be displayed. You can also select a previously saved project filter or create a new one. Navigate to the project overview using the widget title. Group your projects Click the button with the list icon in the upper right corner. A dropdown menu opens with various grouping options: Project status , Project status type , Client , Project type , Responsible person , Due week , Due month , or Workflow . Sort your projects Click the sort button with the up and down arrows in the upper right corner of the widget. The dropdown menu shows sorting options. You can sort in ascending or descending order by End date , Start date , Created on , Name , Client , Workflow , Budget , Tasks , Progress , or Status . List of Tasks By default, this shows all your open tasks from active projects. You can choose whether to show completed tasks . To do this, click the icon with the double checkmarks. In addition to the standard view, you can also select a previously saved task filter or create a new one. Group your tasks Click the button with the list icon in the upper right corner. A dropdown menu opens with various grouping options: Project , Project type , Client , Activity , User , By day , By week , or By month . Sort your tasks Click the sort button with the up and down arrows in the upper right corner of the widget. The dropdown menu shows sorting options. You can sort in ascending or descending order by Task name , Activity , Start date , Due date , Creation date , Planned effort , Task status , or User . [!IMPORTANT] When you hover your mouse over a task, the project key will be displayed. [!NOTE] To reset grouping in the project or task widget, click Reset sorting in the sort dropdown or Reset grouping in the grouping dropdown. Time Tracking Charts With this widget, you can display <u charts from your time tracking reports</u on your dashboard. When you add the widget, simply select the corresponding report. Using the chart button in the upper right, you can switch between matrix and pie chart views. Text Note You can freely add notes here. Using the + button at the end of the note, you can quickly create additional notes. Activities This widget shows you activities from all active projects where you're part of the project team or have notifications enabled. Activities are grouped by day and project. The display is limited to activities from the past seven days. Upcoming Birthdays This shows the upcoming birthdays of users that are visible to you. User Absences This widget displays absences of other users that were added in the <u Workload overview</u . You can jump to today's date , navigate to earlier dates , or navigate to later dates . Use the widget title to go directly to the Workload overview. In edit mode, click the gear icon in the upper right corner to choose whose absences should be displayed: All users Show absences for all users in your workspace Select team Show absences only for selected teams (click select teams to open the team selection dialog) [!IMPORTANT] You can configure the absence widget so that users only see absences from their own team. To do this, the Only users from own teams button in the Users section must be enabled in the general permission role via <u permission management</u . [!NOTE] 🔐 The absence widget is available from the Professional plan and above . Project Progress For this widget, you can select a project, which is displayed in the form of a progress bar showing the proportion of tasks in their respective status (color). The numbers below the progress bar represent the ratio of completed tasks (green) to all tasks in the project. Adjust Widget Size Using the arrow icons at the end of some widgets, you can adjust the number of items displayed in the list. awork remembers your preferred widget size, so when you reload the page, you'll find the same settings. FAQ How can I customize my dashboard? You can customize your dashboard by navigating to Home and clicking the first button on the far left in the floating action bar at the bottom of your screen. Now edit mode is active. Where do I find the widgets I can add? The widgets are available in a modal window that you can open by clicking + Add in the floating action bar at the bottom of your screen. Can I remove widgets from my dashboard? Yes, you can remove widgets by clicking the X icon in the upper right corner of the widget while in edit mode. What happens if I don't want to save my changes? If you don't want to save your changes, click the X icon with the Cancel tooltip in the floating action bar at the bottom of your screen. How can I adjust the size of widgets? You can adjust the size of widgets by using the arrow icons at the bottom of some widgets.
Your Personal Inbox The inbox in awork is your central hub for notifications and updates. In this article, you'll learn how to quickly access your personal inbox and where to find the associated notif
Your Personal Inbox The inbox in awork is your central hub for notifications and updates. In this article, you'll learn how to quickly access your personal inbox and where to find the associated notification settings. Opening Your Inbox 1. Navigate to your inbox from the main menu Click on Inbox in the left sidebar. You'll find this option in the upper part of the sidebar, right below Home and above Calendar . The inbox icon shows a small folder symbol next to the text. 2. Access notification settings To adjust your notification settings, click on the small settings icon with a bell symbol in the upper area of your inbox. A tooltip displaying "Notification settings" will confirm you've found the right button. Comments and Mentions The following notifications will appear in your inbox: new comments on tasks and projects that you follow mentions in comments new reactions (for example, emoji reactions) to comments [!IMPORTANT] New comment notifications are automatically grouped by project. The project with the most recent unread notification appears first. Notification Groups Notifications are automatically grouped Comments, mentions, and reactions on the same task, project, or document are automatically grouped once there are more than two notifications for the same item. Notification counter in groups You can identify a group by the counter in the top left , which shows how many notifications the group contains. Opening and closing notification groups Hover your cursor over the counter on the left, then click the displayed button with a right arrow to expand or collapse a group. Marking Comments as Read When you click the checkmark to the right of a comment, you can mark it as read . It will then be moved to your list of read notifications . Automatically mark as read In your account settings, you can enable the following option: automatically mark notifications as read when clicked . [!WARNING] Note: The clicked comment will only disappear after you reload the page. Marking an entire group as seen When a group is collapsed, the mark all as seen button displays a double checkmark symbol. When you click it, all notifications within the group are marked as seen at once. The read status for comment notifications Next to new comment notifications on the left side, you'll see a purple dot . This indicates whether you've already clicked on the notification. Once you click on it, the blue dot disappears. This way, you can work through notifications without them being immediately hidden. Viewing read comment notifications Click on read notifications in the bottom left of the comment popup in your inbox. Here you'll see previously read comment notifications in chronological order. Navigation Comments are highlighted When you open a notification for a task or project comment, the view automatically scrolls to the corresponding comment. It's briefly highlighted and the marking then fades out. This works for both unseen and already read comments. Opening items in a new tab Hold CMD (Mac) or CTRL (Windows) and click on a notification or comment to open the associated page in a new tab in the background. Notification popup stays open After clicking on a notification, the notification popup remains open. Close the popup by clicking outside of it. [!IMPORTANT] Tip: This way you can work through multiple notifications one after another without having to reopen the popup each time. FAQ When are notifications grouped? Notifications are grouped when there are more than two comments, mentions, or reactions for the same task, project, or document. Can I mark an entire group as read? Yes. When the group is collapsed, the mark as seen button with the double checkmark marks all contained notifications as seen at once. Can I view read comment notifications again? Yes. Click on inbox in the main menu and then on read notifications in the bottom left. There you'll find your most recently read comment notifications in chronological order. Does the notification popup stay open after clicking? Yes. The notification popup remains open until you click outside of it. Can I open notifications in a new tab? Yes. Hold CMD (Mac) or CTRL (Windows) and click on a notification or comment to open the page in a new tab in the background.
The Text Editor and Its Formatting Options
The Text Editor and Its Formatting Options The text editor in awork helps you structure content cleanly and format it quickly – directly in description fields , comments , and docs . Main Benefits and
The Text Editor and Its Formatting Options The text editor in awork helps you structure content cleanly and format it quickly – directly in description fields , comments , and docs . Main Benefits and Use Cases Cleanly structured content through headings, lists, dividers, and formatting options Write faster with slash commands () straight from your keyboard Collaborate in real time through live editing in project and task descriptions How to Use the Text Editor You can use formatting in the following areas in awork: Docs (pages & comments) – full feature set Project descriptions Task descriptions Project comments Task comments Depending on where you are, not all slash commands are available. [!NOTE] Note: All formatting options are available in dashboard notes. However, you can't attach files, mention people (), or use slash commands there. Real Time Collaborative Editing in Descriptions Multiple team members can edit project and task descriptions at the same time. Here's how you can see what's happening: Live cursor shows you who's currently working in the description Color coding per person for the live cursor (can't be changed) Highlights in user color when someone selects text Status indicator in the top right showing "Updated" or "Syncing" Only available in details (project and task details), not through the Edit button Available Text Formatting Options You can use a range of formatting options, including: Text sizes (header, title, subtitle, text) Text styles (bold, italic, strikethrough, underline) Lists (numbered and bulleted) Section divider Emojis Line and paragraph breaks Attach files Add links Display code with the appropriate font When your cursor is in an empty line, you can quickly insert elements using the + button. Insert Elements in Empty Lines 1. Place your cursor in an empty line 2. Click the + icon on the left side of the line 3. Choose a formatting option for the start of the line (for example, title or list) Format Selected Text 1. Select a word or passage 2. Use the formatting options above your selection Slash Commands With slash commands , you create content faster: Type , choose a command, and add formatting, elements, or actions straight from your keyboard. With slash commands, you can while writing: Convert text formats (for example, heading, list, quote) Insert content (for example, images, emojis, files, tables) Execute actions from your keyboard How Slash Commands Work 1. Type in a supported text field 2. A popup with available commands opens 3. Keep typing to filter the list 4. The first entry is always pre selected 5. Navigate through the list with the arrow keys (↑/↓) 6. Press Enter to execute the command you want Slash commands work at the beginning of a new line and also in the middle of text. You can also convert existing lines to other formats. Supported Commands and Formatting Overview of available slash commands (🇬🇧 and 🇩🇪 are equally supported): <table style="min width: 100px;" <colgroup <col style="min width: 25px;" <col style="min width: 25px;" <col style="min width: 25px;" <col style="min width: 25px;" </colgroup <tbody <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p ACTION</p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p SLASH COMMAND 🇬🇧</p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p SLASH COMMAND 🇩🇪</p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p FUNCTION</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Heading (H1)</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /header</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /header</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Converts text to an H1 heading</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Title (H2)</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /title</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /titel</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Converts text to an H2 heading</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Subtitle (H3)</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /subtitle</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /untertitel</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Converts text to an H3 heading</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Paragraph</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /text</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /text</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Converts text to a normal paragraph</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Bullet List</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /bulletlist</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /liste</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Converts a paragraph to a bullet list</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Numbered List</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /numberedlist</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /nummerierteliste</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Converts a paragraph to a numbered list</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Checklist</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /checklist</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /checkliste</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Creates a checklist</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Code Block</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /checklist</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /checklist</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Inserts a code block</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Quote</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /blockquote</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /zitat</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Converts text to a quote</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Table</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /table</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /tabelle</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Inserts an empty table</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Divider</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /divider</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /abschnittstrenner</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Inserts a horizontal line</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Emoji</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /emoji</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /emoji</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Opens the emoji selector</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Insert Image</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /image</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /bild</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Inserts an embedded image</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Upload File</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /file</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /datei</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Opens your computer's file selection dialog</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Google Drive File</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /googledrive</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /googledrive</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Opens Google Drive in a new tab</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong OneDrive File</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /onedrive</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <code /onedrive</code </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Opens OneDrive in a new tab</p </td </tr </tbody </table [!WARNING] Note: Slash commands don't work when text is actively selected . Slash commands are disabled in code blocks . Already applied formatting is not shown again in the popup. Tips, Shortcuts, and Best Practices Keyboard Shortcuts in the Text Editor These shortcuts apply formatting to selected text. If nothing is selected, you'll continue writing in the corresponding format: Bold with (macOS) or (Windows) Italic with (macOS) or (Windows) More shortcuts for fast text creation and formatting: Undo with Redo with Activate H1 with then space Activate H2 with then space Activate H3 with then space Write italic with Write bold with Write strikethrough with Write code with Insert divider with [!CAUTION] Important: Undo and redo only work while you're actively in the text field. Once you click outside the text field, you can no longer undo or redo changes. Automatic Detection at the Beginning of a Line At the start of a line, you can type character combinations to automatically format the line: Bullet list with + space Numbered list with + space Title with + space Section divider with + space Line and Paragraph Breaks You can create in your text: Paragraph breaks with Enter Line breaks with Paragraph breaks create more space between lines and add a new element in lists. Line breaks maintain normal line spacing. In lists, you can use them to write multi line elements. Attach Files In the text editor, you can attach files by: Uploading new files through slash commands (see the Slash Commands section) Linking existing files by typing and entering the file name Select the file in the popup. It will then appear in the text field. Save and Reset Input In task and project details, you can edit descriptions "inline": Auto save when you click outside the text field Save and close with (macOS) or (Windows) Close without saving with Esc (shows the status before editing again) FAQ In which areas can I use formatting? You can format in docs (pages & comments) (full feature set), project descriptions , task descriptions , project comments , and task comments . Why don't I see all slash commands? Depending on where you are, not all slash commands are available. Also, slash commands don't work when text is actively selected and are disabled in code blocks. Why can't I use attachments or @ mentions in dashboard notes? All formatting options are available in dashboard notes. However, you can't upload attachments, make mentions (), or use slash commands there. Why can't I undo changes anymore? Undo and redo only work while you're actively in the corresponding text field. Once you click outside the text field, this is no longer possible. How do I save changes or discard them? When you click outside the text field, your changes are saved immediately. With (macOS) or (Windows), you save and close edit mode. With Esc , you close without saving and see the status before editing again.
Search and Find You can open the search in awork by clicking the magnifying glass at the top left in the main menu , using the floating action bar at the bottom center , or by pressing the keyboard sh
Search and Find You can open the search in awork by clicking the magnifying glass at the top left in the main menu , using the floating action bar at the bottom center , or by pressing the keyboard shortcut F . Just type your search term into the search bar and awork will show you the top 100 results. [!WARNING] ☝️ Note : The search is very forgiving when it comes to minor typos or different grammatical forms. Searching in awork Using the settings bar at the top right, you can then specify whether you want to see all results or only projects, tasks, users, or customers. By activating the button "Also show closed projects", you can also include items from already completed projects in your search. This feature allows you to perform a precise and customized search that's tailored exactly to your needs. In awork search, names are generally weighted higher. This means that matches in names are prioritized in the results. Additionally, awork tracks how frequently you access projects or tasks, so frequently used items are ranked higher in your search results. To the right of the search result, you'll see the path through which awork found your result. For example, it will show you whether your search result leads to a description or a task list. In addition to tasks, projects, users, and customers, awork also searches the menu, so you can navigate conveniently through search. Give it a try by searching for "projects". awork searches the following items in detail: Menu Project name Project description Project participants Task lists Task name Task description Files Assignee Comments Tags Status Notes in dashboard widget User first name User last name awork links (project, task, and task list links) ☝️ Tip : By searching for awork links, you can now also search via links in the desktop app. 🚀 Opening search results in a new tab or copying the link to a result To open search results in a new tab or to copy the link, simply click on the 3 dot menu of the respective result and select the action you'd like to perform. ☝️ Pro tip : Edit objects directly from the search results! Some objects, such as tasks or projects, can be edited directly from the search. With tasks, you can change the status as usual, and with all other search results, you have an action menu button on the right side. Searching in awork as an external Connect user (Basic Connect Plan) For content from your own workspace that doesn't belong to external projects, standard search criteria apply (see above). External users can find all content they are "connected" to based on their permissions from within their own workspace. This means you can also find content from external projects that you are assigned to. What should I do if I can't find what I'm looking for? If your desired object doesn't appear in the search results, you probably need to be more specific. For example, enter both the task name and the project name, or parts of it, in the search field. Similar to web search engines, awork can then deliver more precise results this way.
Export Your Data Here's how you can export projects, tasks, times, time reports, as well as data on users and clients including Google Sheets integration. [!IMPORTANT] Important: Once an export has be
Export Your Data Here's how you can export projects, tasks, times, time reports, as well as data on users and clients including Google Sheets integration. [!IMPORTANT] Important: Once an export has been successfully created, you'll get a notification in awork with a link to download the document. Main benefits and use cases Process raw data for your own analyses Share project and task status as Excel or timeline image Document times as Excel or timesheet (PDF) Back up user and client data including associated projects and times Pull data via Google Sheets add on and update with the click of a button Export projects The project overview can be exported in list view and timeline view. The export includes the raw data from the project overview, which you can use for your own analyses, for example. 1. Open the project overview and select List or Timeline in the header. 2. Click the Action button in the top right. 3. Select Export . Export tasks You can download all tasks from a project in Excel format ( .xlsx ) and then process them further. 1. Open the project and switch to the view you want ( Tasks , Board , or Timeline ). 2. Click the Action button in the top right below the header. 3. Select Export tasks . Export views 1. Open Views in the main menu 2. Select a Standard view or a Filter you created. 3. Click the Action button in the top right below the header. 4. Select Export . Export timeline as image You can export the entire timeline as an image, download it, and share it with a client or include it in a presentation, for example. 1. Open the Timeline in the project. 2. Click the Action button in the top right below the header. 3. Select Export as SVG or Export as PNG . [!IMPORTANT] The export includes all displayed tasks as well as the entire time span of these tasks plus one week at the start and end. The entire configured view is used (e.g. zoom level, language, dark mode). Export times You can download recorded times in Excel format ( .xlsx ) and then process them further. My times In the Times menu item, you can export your recorded times. The export is available in Overview , My Day , and My Week . 1. Open the Times menu in the left navigation bar. 2. Stay in the Overview with all times, select the Time period in the center top and group by activity, billability, project, day, week, month, quarter, or year; or switch to My Day or My Week . 3. Click the Export button in the top right and download the export. Times for a task 1. In the detail view of a task, click the green Recorded box in the task KPIs ( Due date , Planned , Recorded ). This gives you an overview of the times recorded for this task. 2. Click the Export icon in the top right to export. Export time reports You can export the report data in two ways using the icons in the top right: Print or save timesheet as PDF Export table as Excel file (.xlsx) as raw data or formatted [!IMPORTANT] Tip: Via the options you can format the export ( only available for PDF format and the formatted export ) by filtering, grouping, summing, or sorting data. You can also set columns and decide how data should be rounded. For more information on time reports, see here. Export users You can export the user overview or download times and projects for individual users. Go to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu). Select Users . To export the user overview: 1. Sort or filter the view and select the columns displayed. 2. Click the Action button in the top right Export . To export user times and user projects: 1. Select a user from the overview. 2. Open the Projects or Times tab. 3. Click the Action button Export . Export clients You can export the client overview or a client's projects and times. 1. Open Clients in the main menu on the left in the Workspace section. To export the client overview: 1. Click the Action button in the top right Export . To export times and projects for a client: 1. Select a client. 2. Go to the Projects or Times tab. 3. Click the Action button Export . Export data via Google Sheets integration awork offers a handy add on for Google Sheets that lets you quickly export important information. Add on features: Data export : Projects, tasks, users, and times Easy integration : Load your data into your open spreadsheet with just a few clicks Updates : Keep your data current anytime with the click of a button With this add on, you can easily create custom reports and analyses. For more information on Google Sheets integration, see here. Best practices [!IMPORTANT] Want to be notified by email as soon as an export is available? To do this, enable the option Notify me when an export is available in your account settings. FAQ In what formats can I export data? You can export project overviews, tasks, times, and user and client data in Excel format ( .xlsx ). Time reports can be exported as PDF (timesheet) or Excel ( .xlsx , raw data or formatted export). A project timeline can also be exported as an image ( png or svg ). Where do I find the download after exporting? Once the export has been successfully created, you'll get a notification in awork with a link to download the document. What is included in the timeline image export? The export includes all displayed tasks as well as the entire time span of these tasks plus one week at the start and end. Additionally, the entire configured view is used (e.g. zoom level, language, dark mode). Can I also be notified by email when an export is available? Yes. Enable the option Notify me when an export is available in your account settings. What data can I export via the Google Sheets integration? Via the Google Sheets add on you can export important data: projects, tasks, users, and times. You can load the data into an open spreadsheet and update it later with the click of a button.
Using Tags in awork Learn how you can use tags to categorize your projects, tasks, users, and customers and find them more easily. Main Benefits and Use Cases Categorization: Organize your projects an
Using Tags in awork Learn how you can use tags to categorize your projects, tasks, users, and customers and find them more easily. Main Benefits and Use Cases Categorization: Organize your projects and tasks with tags. Faster Search: Find objects in your awork account more quickly. Filter Options: Create custom filters for better organization. Adding New Tags 1. Navigate to the detail page of the object (task, project, user, or customer). 2. Click on the tag field below the name or in the editing window. 3. Type the tag you want in the input field and confirm with Enter . 4. To remove a tag, click the "X" next to the tag. Suggestions from Already Used Tags awork provides its own tag pool for each category with tags you've already used. Tags are displayed in the lower area of the window and can be added directly by clicking them. Search As you type a tag, the tag pool filters to show existing tags. [!WARNING] Note: The pool of private and project tasks is separate. Your tags used for private tasks are only visible to you. The tag pool for project tasks is visible to all users. Recently Used Tags The "Recently Used" area shows the 10 most recently used tags within a category like tasks or projects. Editing or Deleting Existing Tags Go to the tag field and select the desired tag from the pool. To make changes, click the pencil icon to edit the tag. To delete a tag, click Delete tag in the editing window and confirm. FAQ How do I add a new tag? To add a new tag, go to the detail page of the object, click on the tag field, type the tag, and confirm with Enter . Can I change existing tags? Yes, you can edit a tag by clicking the pencil icon, or delete it by selecting the Delete tag option. Are tags shared between private and project tasks? No, tags for private tasks are only visible to you, while tags for project tasks are accessible to all users.
The Main Menu In this article, you'll learn how to use the main menu in awork and navigate through the different areas of the application. You'll get to know the structure of the sidebar and how to qu
The Main Menu In this article, you'll learn how to use the main menu in awork and navigate through the different areas of the application. You'll get to know the structure of the sidebar and how to quickly access all the important features. Collapsing and Expanding the Sidebar Minimize or expand the sidebar To create more space for the main content, you can collapse or expand the left sidebar. Just click on the small button icon in the top right of the sidebar, right next to the awork logo. A tooltip with the text "Collapse/Expand" will show you the function. Using the Main Navigation The main menu contains all the important navigation elements to quickly switch between the different areas of awork and is divided into 3 sections: Personal Content (Home, Inbox, Calendar, Times, and Views) the Workspace Level (Projects, Docs, Planner, Customers, and Time Reports) Quick Access to Projects (Favorites, Shared Projects, My Projects) [!IMPORTANT] The selected menu item is highlighted with a light purple background. Personal Content 1. Open Search Click on Search at the very top of the sidebar to open the search function. An overlay appears with a search field and quick access to frequently used actions like "New Project", "New Task", "New Time", and "New Customer". 2. Go to Home Click on Home in the sidebar to go to the home page. Here you'll find your dashboard. 3. Open Calendar Click on Calendar to switch to the calendar view. Here you'll see a week or day overview with your appointments and tasks in a time grid. 4. Go to Times Click on Times to go to the time tracking overview. In this view you'll find tabs like "Overview", "My Day", and "My Week", as well as a day calendar view for your tracked times. 5. Open Views Click on Views to switch to your saved task views. Here you can manage different filter views for your tasks and create new views. The Workspace Level 7. Go to Projects Click on Projects in the workspace section to go to the project overview. Choose between list or timeline view. 8. Open Docs Here you can create documents, organize them in spaces, and share them with others. 9. Go to Planner Click on Planner to go to the resource planning view. 10. Manage Customers Click on Customers to switch to customer management. In this view you'll see an overview of all customers with tags, projects, industry, and location. 11. Open Time Reports Click on Time Reports to go to reports and analytics. Here you'll find instant reports like "Monthly Tracking Overview", "Tracked vs Planned", "Billability per User", or "Ready for Invoicing", as well as shared reports, and you can create new reports. Quick Access to Projects 12. In the lower section of the sidebar you'll find the projects area. This is divided into Favorites, External Projects, and My Projects. You can access your projects through this section or directly via search. In your account settings you can adjust which sections are displayed in the menu. [!IMPORTANT] The Workspace, Favorites, and My Projects sections have a dropdown arrow to collapse or expand the list .
awork Forms awork Forms is a standalone form tool. External people fill out your form, and the submission is automatically created as a task in awork. Key benefits and use cases Use awork Forms when y
awork Forms awork Forms is a standalone form tool. External people fill out your form, and the submission is automatically created as a task in awork. Key benefits and use cases Use awork Forms when you want more structured input and faster processing: Structured request capture so that all required information comes in through a form Fewer follow up questions because you collect the right information from the start using required fields Automatic task creation for each submission, including project, task list, assignee, and priority How to use awork Forms 1. Open Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu), select the Forms menu item, and click the Manage Forms button, or go directly to forms.awork.com. 2. Sign in with your awork account. 3. You'll land on the Dashboard and see an overview of your forms, submissions, and created tasks. 4. Click Create Form to set up your first form. Creating a form When you create a form, you decide what information to collect and what happens with the submissions. Define form fields Add individual fields to collect exactly the info you need (for example, title, description, or file attachment). You can mark fields as required. [!IMPORTANT] Supported file attachments: PNG, JPG, and PDF up to 10 MB. Set task settings Define what happens when the form is submitted: Project and task list for the automatically created task Assignment optionally directly to a user Priority as the default priority for new submissions Additional fields to automatically populate extra task fields Share your form Each form has a public link that you can share with customers or external partners. Submitters don't need an awork account they fill out the form and click Send . The Dashboard and submissions The Dashboard gives you an overview at a glance: Total forms how many forms you've created Submissions how many submissions came in this month Created tasks how many tasks were created in awork from these submissions Use Quick Actions to jump straight to the most important functions: create form, view forms, and view submissions. Manage submissions Under Submissions in the sidebar, you'll find all incoming form submissions. From here, you can track which tasks were created and what information was received. Permissions Through the Settings menu item, you can set Workspace access . Control whether all users in the selected workspace can open awork Forms or only specific people. Allow all users is the recommended default. Turn off this option to limit Forms to a selection of people. Allowed users : Select the users you want to give access to Forms. [!WARNING] awork admins and users with workspace settings permissions always retain access, even if they're not explicitly listed as Allowed users . [!CAUTION] When creating a form, only projects and task lists that users have access to or that aren't private will be shown for selection. Known limitations and notes awork Forms is a standalone application and not yet directly integrated into awork Accessible via forms.awork.com not through awork itself Available as an open source project on GitHub : If you have developers on your team, you can self host the tool or contribute your own features awork permissions management doesn't apply to task creation via Forms: [!CAUTION] Any user assigned to a project could add a task to that project through Forms. [!NOTE] Note: Support for awork Forms currently runs through GitHub and the awork Community not through regular awork Support. FAQ Do my customers need an awork account to fill out the form? No. The form is publicly accessible submitters don't need an account. Where do I access awork Forms? Go to forms.awork.com and sign in with your awork account. Are awork Forms integrated into the awork app? Not yet. awork Forms is a standalone application and not yet directly integrated into awork. Can I create multiple forms for different purposes? Yes. You can create as many forms as you need for example, one for bug reports and one for new orders. What file formats are supported for attachments? PNG, JPG, and PDF each up to 10 MB. Can I self host awork Forms or contribute new features? Yes. awork Forms is available as an open source project on GitHub, so you can self host it or contribute new features. Support currently runs through GitHub and the awork Community. Can I customize the form to match my branding? awork Forms is currently in an early version. Advanced customization options can be contributed through the open source project on GitHub.
awork uses a live connection to keep your data up to date in real time. If this connection can't be established, you might experience delayed updates, out of sync data, loading problems, or unresponsi
awork uses a live connection to keep your data up to date in real time. If this connection can't be established, you might experience delayed updates, out of sync data, loading problems, or unresponsive features. Quick Checks Start with these simple steps: Reload the page Sign out of awork and sign back in Restart your browser Try a different supported browser (Chrome, Edge, Safari) Check the awork Status page Browser Requirements Make sure you're using the current version of a supported browser and that the following are enabled: JavaScript Cookies Local and session storage Browser extensions (especially ad blockers, privacy tools, or firewall extensions) can interfere with awork. If possible, try: Opening awork in a private or incognito window Temporarily disabling browser extensions VPNs, Firewalls, and Corporate Networks Connection problems are often caused by VPNs, firewalls, or corporate networks that block real time connections. Try the following: Disconnect any active VPN connections Switch to a different network (for example, home WiFi or mobile hotspot) Disable firewalls (for example, Apple Advanced Data Protection, Windows Defender, JAMF Trust, etc.) If awork works on a different network, the problem is very likely due to network restrictions. In that case, please contact your IT team to set up an exception for awork. For Your IT Team Please make sure your network allows: Access to .awork.com HTTPS (TLS 1.2 or higher) WebSockets and long polling connections Required third party domains (not exhaustive): .intercom.io, .intercomcdn.com, .intercomassets.com .birdie.so .hcaptcha.com .segment.io, .segment.com .launchdarkly.com .chargebee.com, .chargebeestaticv2.com .typekit.net accounts.google.com, apis.google.com .googleusercontent.com, .gstatic.com Desktop App If you're using the awork desktop app: Make sure your operating system is supported On macOS, check that you've installed the correct version (Intel vs. Apple Silicon) [!CAUTION] We've noticed significant performance issues with the awork desktop app, especially when used with Windows Defender on Windows. In that case, we recommend using awork in your browser instead. Need Help? If the problem persists, please contact awork Support and provide the following information: Your browser and its version Whether you're using a VPN or corporate network Whether the issue occurs on other devices or networks as well This helps us solve the problem faster.
Task Templates Task templates help you predefine recurring processes and quickly and easily load them into your projects. They include tasks and task lists with all the details you already know from t
Task Templates Task templates help you predefine recurring processes and quickly and easily load them into your projects. They include tasks and task lists with all the details you already know from tasks. [!IMPORTANT] If you modify a template later, it won't affect the tasks and projects where you've already used the template. Key benefits and use cases When work repeats itself, it shouldn't have to start from scratch every time. Standardize recurring processes with predefined task lists and tasks Start projects faster by loading complete templates into projects Bring task details along including familiar fields from tasks Manage task templates You'll find an overview of all your templates under Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Templates . Here you can create new templates or manage existing ones using the action button to edit , duplicate , or delete them. Click on a template to open its details and edit the content. [!IMPORTANT] Changes are applied immediately, so separately saving the entire template is not necessary. Create a new task template 1. Navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Templates . 2. In the Task Templates section at the bottom, click + Add . 3. Enter a name and description, and choose an icon. 4. Click Save . 5. You'll be taken to the template's detail page. There you can add task lists and tasks to the template. Configuration options for tasks Define dependencies Choose which tasks this task should depend on. The required tasks that need to be completed first will automatically appear in the task details. In the timeline, they're shown as arrow connections. Set relative start and end dates Define using Start after creation and Due after creation how many days the start date and due date should be after the task is created. This is based on when the template is loaded into a project. Use project role instead of user If you choose a project role instead of a specific user, the first user with that defined role will be assigned when the template is used in a project. Create a task template from an existing project A new template can be created from the existing tasks and lists in a project. Follow these steps: 1. Open the Tasks tab in your project. 2. Click the action button in the top right above the lists. 3. Select Save as template to save all lists as a template. All task lists and their details will be saved as templates and can be reused in other projects. Start and end dates can also be carried over. Save individual lists as a template 1. Open the action button for a task list. 2. Select New task template to create a new template from that specific list. Load task templates into a project 1. Open the Tasks tab in a project. 2. Click the + Task button in the top left. 3. Select Import task templates . All lists and tasks will then be added to your project. [!IMPORTANT] If you already have lists with the same names in your project, they'll be reused and the tasks from the template will be added to them. Best practices and tips Plan with relative dates when schedules should always align with the project start Use project roles when tasks should automatically be assigned to the right team members on import Set dependencies so tasks are only ready to start once the preliminary work is done Keep an eye on your list names because lists with the same name will be reused on import FAQ Where can I find all task templates? Under Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Templates you'll find an overview of all your templates. There you can create new templates and edit or delete existing ones. Do changes to a template affect projects retroactively? No. If you modify a template later, it won't affect the tasks and projects where you've already used the template. What determines the dynamic setting of the due date for a task? It's based on the creation date, that is, the day the task template was used. What happens if my project already has lists with the same names? Then the existing lists will be reused and the tasks from the template will be added to them.
The Integrations Library Integrate your existing tools to seamlessly fit awork into your workflows. How to open the integrations library 1. Navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the ma
The Integrations Library Integrate your existing tools to seamlessly fit awork into your workflows. How to open the integrations library 1. Navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu). 2. Select Integrations . 3. View the available and currently used integrations. 4. Open an integration and follow the respective setup instructions. Available Integrations Chat Apps Slack (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) Microsoft Teams (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) Agency Software easyJOB (Add on) OS/ (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) MOCO ( Add on) Invoicing Software sevdesk (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) helloHQ (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) Lexware Office (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) easybill (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) MOCO (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) bexio (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) Xero (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) Learn more about setup here. Calendar Google Calendar Microsoft Exchange iCloud Calendar HR Management Personio (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) Leapsome (coming soon) Productivity GoogleSheets (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) memtime (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) Shift (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) sitebrunch (🔐 from Professional Plan onwards) Cloud Storage Google Drive Microsoft OneDrive Learn more here. Social Login Google Microsoft Learn more about setup here. Single Sign On (SSO) 🔐 Available in Enterprise Plan only Auth0 Microsoft Azure AD GSuite/Google IAM okta onelogin Keycloak Learn more about setup here. SCIM 🔐 Available in Enterprise Plan only onelogin okta Microsoft Azure AD SCIM Learn more about setup here. API Connectors Webhooks Zapier Make n8n FAQ Where do I find the integrations library? Go to Settings ( gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Integrations to see an overview of available and used integrations. Which chat apps can I connect? awork supports integrations for Slack and Microsoft Teams . Which integrations are tied to a specific plan? Standard integrations are available in all plans, while special integrations are available from the Professional Plan onwards. Single Sign On (SSO) and SCIM are only available in the Enterprise Plan . Find out more about our plans and pricing here and about our integrations here.
Managing Users Users in awork are always tied to accounts. That's why you can't simply create them. Instead, you need to send invitations via email to unique and existing email addresses. The Users Ov
Managing Users Users in awork are always tied to accounts. That's why you can't simply create them. Instead, you need to send invitations via email to unique and existing email addresses. The Users Overview 1. Navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu). 2. Select Users You can use the filter icon to filter by various criteria. Using the action button (three dots) next to a user, you can edit, deactivate, or delete that user. With the additional icons in the top right, you can export users and select which columns you want to see, just like in other lists in awork. Adding/Inviting New Users You can invite new users to your workspace anytime using the + Add button. To invite a new user, you need admin permissions and must have enough licenses in your plan. If you don't, you'll see a notification letting you know. The window will also show you how many more users you can invite. During your free 14 day trial, you can invite as many users as you want. There's a detailed explanation about inviting users and what to watch out for. Learn more about adding or removing user licenses. Deactivating Users You can deactivate or reactivate a user using the action button in each row of the users overview or in the top right of the user details. [!WARNING] When users are deactivated, they remain assigned to existing projects and tasks. To completely remove users from these assignments, you'll need to manually remove them from the projects and tasks they're currently assigned to. Once deactivated users have been removed, they can't be assigned to any projects or tasks anymore. Deleting Users You can also permanently delete users from the action menu. [!CAUTION] Important: Deleting users is permanent and cannot be undone. Deleting users can result in data loss. If you're unsure, you should deactivate users instead of deleting them. When users are deleted, they're automatically removed from all projects and tasks they were assigned to. [!WARNING] Important: Deactivating or deleting users in the Users module doesn't automatically reduce your purchased number of licenses. To reduce licenses, you'll need to adjust your plan. User Details Click on a user in the overview to go to their user details. Here you can view and edit their contact information. Viewing a User's Projects Go to the Projects tab to see an overview of all projects the user is a member of. You can switch between list view and timeline view here. You can also use the icons in the top right to search for projects, group them, filter them, set which columns to display, and export the projects. Viewing All Time Entries and Absences for a User Go to the Time tab to see an overview of all time entries the user has recorded. Recording Time Click the + Time button to open the time recording window. You can record a time entry directly, and the corresponding user is already pre selected, provided you have the appropriate permissions to record time for other users (write access to project times). Summary at a Glance Above the list of time entries, you'll see a summary of recorded time and absences. If you haven't selected a specific time period, you'll see all recorded time and absences for the user here. Total recorded time: broken down into billable and non billable Ready to bill: broken down into time to be billed and billed time; using the + Invoice button, you can jump directly to the time report and create an invoice (provided you've set up one of our invoicing tool integrations). The current month is automatically selected in the time report, but you can adjust it. Absences: the sum of absent days in the time period; select Show to see the list of absences (type, time period, number of days) [!WARNING] Note: You'll only see absences after selecting a time period. Bar Chart The bar chart gives users a better overview of how tracked time is distributed across different criteria. Hovering your mouse over the bars shows more information about the times, depending on which grouping you've selected. You can also select the displayed time frame here, such as day, week, month, quarter, year, or all time. The following criteria can be grouped: Activities Billability Project FAQ What happens to recorded time when a user is deleted? When users are deleted, the recorded time from those deleted users remains. The recorded times are then displayed without being assigned to any user. Are there dummy users in awork? No, there are no dummy users in awork, meaning users that can be managed in awork but don't have an account. You could theoretically do this by using your own unused email addresses, but the users still need to be purchased. What's the difference between a user and an external user? An external user has fewer rights and functions in awork but can be added for free. External users via awork Connect can participate in projects, making it ideal for freelancers or clients. Learn more about external users in awork. How can I edit my own user profile? You have two options for editing your own user profile: 1. Go to Users in Settings, scroll to your name, click the action button next to your name, and select Edit . 2. Click your profile picture in the bottom left of the main menu (or your initials), select Account Settings , and click the Edit User button below your user image. If you don't have enough permissions to view the users overview, just use the second method. Why is my account email address different from the one in my user details? Your account email address is the email you use to log into awork. Only you can edit this through your account. You can be in multiple awork workspaces with the same account. In different workspaces, you have different users and can freely choose what information to display, such as your picture, name, position, and contact information within that workspace. Your user within an awork workspace can be edited by other users (if permissions allow), for example to add your contact information. This shouldn't affect your account and login. You'll receive your awork notifications at the email address listed there. That's why the email addresses can be different. What's the difference between deactivating and deleting users? Deactivated users remain assigned to existing projects and tasks until you manually remove them. Deleted users are automatically removed from all assigned projects and tasks. Which option is recommended: should I deactivate or delete users? If you want to keep existing data and avoid accidental data loss, you should deactivate users. Deletion is permanent and should only be used when you're sure you want the user data and access completely removed.
Inviting New Users There are 2 ways to open the window for inviting new users to awork: 1. Open Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu), select Users , and click the + Add button. 2.
Inviting New Users There are 2 ways to open the window for inviting new users to awork: 1. Open Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu), select Users , and click the + Add button. 2. Open the popup for assigning a user to a task and select Invite by Email there. To invite a new user, you need to have enough users booked in your plan. Learn more about adding or removing users. The window will show you how many more users you can invite. During your free 14 day trial, you can invite as many users as you want. ☝️ Important: Only admins can invite new users, since new licenses need to be booked and permissions assigned depending on your license count. Enter the email address for the user you want to invite in the appropriate field. awork will try to recognize the name from the email address. If awork gets it wrong, just enter the name manually. You also need to select a permission role that the user should have. If teams are active in your awork, you can also select which team the user should belong to here. After the user is invited, you can assign additional teams. You can submit multiple rows and thus send multiple invitations at once. Right after inviting, the new user is available in awork and you can edit them, assign them to projects, and delegate tasks to them. The invited user will receive an email with a link to awork, to accept the invitation, and to set a password. Inviting Many Users at Once Using the Import Users button at the bottom left of the invitation window, you can automatically fill the invitation window with a large number of user invitations by uploading an Excel spreadsheet with email addresses, names, and optionally gender and permission role names. Who can invite new users? Since permission roles can be assigned when inviting new users, only users with the Admin permission role are allowed to invite new users. Do I have to select a role? Yes, a permission role must always be selected, otherwise it won't be clear what the user is allowed to see when they first log in. Can I resend an invitation? As long as the user has the status Invited , they haven't accepted the invitation yet and haven't completed their account. Within this status, you can resend the invitation using the action button on the right in the user overview or in the user details. The invitation has expired, what can I do? If the link for the initial login in the invitation no longer works, just resend the invitation (see above).
Absences Absences (such as vacation, holidays, parental leave, or sick days) reduce your available capacity to zero, or cut it in half for half day absences. Projects and tasks won't be distributed ac
Absences Absences (such as vacation, holidays, parental leave, or sick days) reduce your available capacity to zero, or cut it in half for half day absences. Projects and tasks won't be distributed across these days in the planner's workload calculation, or will be reduced for half day absences. 🔐 Absences (+Workload area) are available starting with the Standard plan. Individual Absences for Users Creating a New Absence You can add new absences for a user by clicking and dragging in the planner's Workload view. ☝️ Important: Make sure you expand the Projects and Tasks view for the specific user so you can register the absence by clicking and dragging in that area. An absence can ideally have a name. To add a name, just type it into the field and confirm it by pressing Enter or clicking the Save button. However, you don't have to enter anything. For absences without a name, the overview will simply show "Absent". ☝️ Tip: You can also choose a name from the suggestions list that appears when you click the text field. Keep in mind that this isn't a learning list, so it won't remember your previous absence names for future entries. If you select only a half day on the first or last day for the start or end date, a half day absence will be created for that day only. This means the capacity will only be halved for that day. For the start date, the second half of the day is marked as absent, and for the end date, the first half of the day is marked as absent. Deleting an Individual Absence for a User When you hover over the absence with your mouse, a cross will appear in the top right corner of the absence that you can click to delete it. Events and Tasks on Absent Days Unlike projects and tasks, where workload can be distributed across different available days, workload for events and tasks scheduled in the calendar will remain on days when absences exist. Absences on the Dashboard There's a dashboard widget for displaying upcoming absences. You can configure it, for example, to show only the absences of your team. The absence widget can be used multiple times on the dashboard. You can find more information about this here. Managing Workspace Wide Absences The new Absences tab in Workspace Settings , which can be accessed by users with write permissions for User Planning , is divided into the following two sections: 1. Holidays (Holiday Regions) 2. Workspace Wide Absences You'll find more information about these sections below. Holidays (Holiday Regions) Creating Regional Holidays for Your Workspace To manage regional holidays for your workspace as a user with write permissions for User Planning , go to Workspace Settings and then Absences . ☝️ Note: Regional holidays from various regions are automatically transferred to awork via API. You can add regional holidays using the + Add button. In the popup window, you can then set a custom name and select a predefined region. ☝️ Tip: Do all your users come from the same region? You can also set this region as the default for new users in the popup window. In the next step, you can assign users to this region using the three dot menu on the holiday region. The regions you create can then be selected by users in their Account Settings. You can find more about selecting a region in Account Settings here. ☝️ Tip: Directly below your regional holidays, you'll see a yellow highlighted info box next to the + Add button showing how many users in your workspace haven't been assigned to a region yet. Editing and Managing Regional Holidays You can edit regional holiday regions afterward using the three dot menu on the respective holiday region, allowing you to adjust the name or region. ☝️ Tip: You can also adjust your users' holiday region in the planner by clicking the value showing weekly working hours next to the person in the User view. Deleting Regional Holidays Regional holidays can be deleted using the three dot menu. ☝️ Important: Please note that when you delete regional holidays, the corresponding workspace wide absences (for the same region) will also be deleted. ☝️ Important: Also note that this affects capacity planning, as the holidays will be removed from the workload when deleted. Workspace Wide Absences Setting Absences for the Entire Workspace To add an absence for the entire workspace as a user with write permissions for User Planning , you can go to Workspace Settings and then Absences . You can create a workspace wide absence using the + Add button in the corresponding section. In the popup window, set a time period and a title. You can also select which region this should apply to. Once you've saved the absence, it will automatically be taken into account in the workload of users who have selected this region. You can find more information about the selected region in Account Settings here. ☝️ Tip: Next to the + Add button, you'll find the current year with the option to open a dropdown menu where you can switch between years, allowing you to get an overview of dates for upcoming or past years. Editing Workspace Wide Absences You can edit workspace wide absences using the three dot menu on the respective absence. This allows you to adjust names or dates afterward. Deleting Workspace Wide Absences Workspace wide absences can be deleted using the three dot menu. ☝️ Important: Note that this affects capacity planning, as the absences will be removed from the workload when deleted. Frequently Asked Questions Are there half day absences? Yes, you can create half day absences. See the "Creating a New Absence" section for details. Can I exclude specific weekdays in general? Yes, you can simply set the working hours to 0 hours in the user's weekly availability to mark specific days as generally unavailable. What permissions are needed to register absences, set holidays, or create workspace wide absences? For a user to be able to register absences in the planner, create holidays, or create workspace wide absences, they need write permissions for User Planning (Settings Rights Management General Permission Roles User User Planning ). How can I delete an individual absence for a user? When you hover over the absence with your mouse, a cross will appear in the top right corner of the absence that you can click to delete it. ☝️ Note : If you're using the Personio integration, absences transmitted from Personio to awork must be deleted in Personio. These CANNOT be deleted in awork. How can I delete holidays or workspace wide absences? Holidays or workspace wide absences can be deleted through Workspace Settings in the Absences tab using the three dot menu. To delete holidays or workspace wide absences, the user needs write permissions for User Planning .
Calendar The calendar shows you your tasks and personal appointments in one shared overview. Scheduled tasks automatically flow into the workload calculation and give you transparency about how busy y
Calendar The calendar shows you your tasks and personal appointments in one shared overview. Scheduled tasks automatically flow into the workload calculation and give you transparency about how busy you are. You can find information about calendar integration here. Scheduling tasks in the calendar On the left side of the screen you'll find the sidebar with your tasks. If it's collapsed, you can expand it with a simple click. You can drag and drop tasks into the calendar to schedule them. In the calendar you can then move, resize, expand, duplicate , or remove tasks. Scheduled tasks that don't have planned effort automatically disappear from the list. Tasks that have planned effort can be dragged into the calendar multiple times until the total hours of planned effort are reached. [!NOTE] Important: If a task is completely scheduled according to its planned effort and scheduled tasks are hidden, the task will disappear from the list. However, it's still possible to overbooking a task, meaning you can schedule it for 3 hours even though the planned effort is only 2 hours. You can see from the small number in the planned effort how many times this task has already been scheduled in the calendar. Converting scheduled tasks into time entries Tasks you've scheduled in the calendar can now be directly converted into time entries. Just click on the three dot menu on the respective task and select Create time . [!NOTE] Note: After time has been logged on a task, it's displayed in purple next to the task. If you hover over the display with your mouse, you'll see how much time you've logged on it. If you click on the purple area, you can edit the time entry information. Creating times and tasks via drag and drop You can create new times or tasks directly in the calendar by simply dragging a section with your mouse and then selecting whether you want to create a time or a task. Viewing time entries and appointments from other users Want to see the time entries and calendar appointments of another user? Through the sidebar menu you can specifically select users, teams, or projects the calendar will then show you their time entries and appointments. [!NOTE] Note: If another user has selected in their settings not to share the titles of their appointments, you'll see them as "Private". All day elements In addition to absences and appointments from your linked calendar, the all day row at the top of each day can display tasks and bookings that are scheduled for that day. This gives you a quick overview of everything directly in the calendar without having to switch views. [!NOTE] In the calendar settings you can specify whether all day tasks should be shown or hidden . Bookings have a dotted border Tasks have a solid border When you hover over an element with your mouse, the full name is displayed in a tooltip. If you have the appropriate permissions, you can open or edit tasks and bookings directly from the calendar by clicking on the respective element. All day elements cannot be moved or resized . [!WARNING] Note: The all day row only displays tasks from active projects (yellow status). Tasks in projects with blue, red, or green status are not shown here. Calendar settings In the top right you'll find the calendar settings by clicking the button with the sliders. In the settings you can specify what's displayed in your calendar. You have the option to: Show or hide tasks scheduled in the calendar Show or hide tasks scheduled with a time Show or hide all day tasks : Shows your assigned tasks that are scheduled in the planner but don't have any hours logged in the calendar. Show or hide tasks without a start date : Shows your assigned tasks even if they only have a due date (they appear as an all day element on that day). This setting can only be enabled if all day tasks is active. Show or hide appointments from your external calendar Show or hide logged times Show or hide bookings : Shows your assigned bookings in the all day row. Integrating the calendar You can integrate your Google, Microsoft, or Apple calendar with awork so that your appointments are displayed under Calendar . You can decide whether the integrated calendar is only visible to you or should also be used for the workload calculation. You'll find all the details in the calendar integration article. Logging times to calendar appointments If you've connected your Google or Microsoft calendar, you can easily convert existing appointments into time entries. Just click on the three dot menu on the respective appointment and select Create time . If you click on the purple area, you can edit the time entry information. The title of the appointment is automatically used as a note for the time entry. Quick access to logged times for a day or week Want to know what you've logged on a specific day or during a specific week? No problem! Just click on the time badge in the calendar next to the date or above the week switcher. A popup will show you all time entries for that day or week. [!NOTE] Note: Logged times without a start or end time are also included in the total, so all times are considered, not just those visually displayed in the calendar. If the daily limit is exceeded, the badge is highlighted in red, just like in "My Week" under Times . FAQ Can I show or hide scheduled tasks in the task list? You can show or hide already scheduled tasks using the filter with the calendar icon and the checkbox. This is useful when you only want to see tasks you haven't yet scheduled in the calendar. If you show them, you can recognize tasks already scheduled in the calendar by the purple checkbox in the task list. You can always reschedule already scheduled tasks in the calendar. Can already completed tasks be shown? Completed tasks are initially hidden because they usually don't need to be scheduled anymore. You can show them in the list anytime using the icon with two checkmarks. How are the tasks in the list sorted? When you open a project, the tasks are automatically grouped and sorted by the lists within the project, just as you know it from the project. Can I log times for other users? If you have sufficient permissions you can log times for other users in the calendar. To do this, add the respective users in the calendar via the filter and select them. Can I edit my appointments from within awork? No, the appointments displayed in awork currently cannot be edited from within awork. Can I see my calendar scheduled tasks in my external calendar? Yes, you can have your tasks scheduled in the awork calendar automatically transferred to your integrated Google or Microsoft calendar. Simply activate Sync in the calendar settings. Can I open or edit tasks and bookings from the "all day" row? Yes. If you have the appropriate permissions, you can click on tasks or bookings in the all day row and open or edit them directly. Can I move all day elements or resize them? No. All day elements in the calendar can neither be moved nor resized.
Permissions Management in awork Control who can view and edit what. Learn here how to manage permissions efficiently. Key benefits and use cases Simple role management: Understand who has access to wh
Permissions Management in awork Control who can view and edit what. Learn here how to manage permissions efficiently. Key benefits and use cases Simple role management: Understand who has access to what. Clear structure: General and project roles define specific access rights. Flexibility: Customize permissions to fit your team's needs. [!IMPORTANT] Permissions management in awork is based on two levels: 1. General permission roles (workspace level): Applies to your entire awork workspace. 2. Project roles (project level): Applies only to specific projects where a user is a member. Accessing permissions management 1. Navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu). 2. Click on Permissions Management . [!IMPORTANT] Only users with the Admin role can configure these settings. General permission roles Each person in the workspace has a general permission role (e.g., Admin or User) Important: If a user is not a project member, only the rights of the general role apply. Creating a general role 1. In the General Permission Roles section, click on + Role . 2. Give it a name and choose either a blank role or a template. 3. Customize the individual permissions. Pre configured roles Admin: Full access and can manage workspace settings. User: Can work with projects but cannot change central settings. Set menu visibility per role In the details of a permission role, you'll find the Menu Visibility tab, where you can specify which areas of the menu are visible. Important: If the eye icon is disabled, the role lacks the necessary permissions. Assigning general roles At the bottom of the Permissions Management page, you'll find a list of all users where you can assign a role to each person. Note: You cannot remove yourself from the Admin role. Managing project roles Project roles define specific rights at the project level. [!WARNING] Important: Project roles can extend permissions, but cannot restrict them. Restrictions are always controlled through the general role. Creating a project role 1. In the Project Specific Permission Roles section, click on + Role 2. Give it a name and set the view and edit rights. Optional: Mark the role as Default Role so it's pre selected when adding members to projects. Editing or deleting a role In the role overview, you can edit or delete roles using the action button. Important: System roles like Admin and Guest cannot be edited or deleted. When deleting a role that's already assigned to users, you must select a replacement role. Permissions in detail <table style="min width: 50px;" <colgroup <col style="min width: 25px;" <col style="min width: 25px;" </colgroup <tbody <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Create project</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Active</strong </p <p Users can create projects.</p <p <br ​<strong Inactive</strong </p <p Users cannot create projects.</p <p <br ​<strong Important:</strong The project creator always has all rights on that project.</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Project details</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Manage</strong </p <ul <li <p see all projects in the project overview</p </li <li <p view and edit project details of all projects</p </li <li <p delete projects</p </li </ul <p <strong Read</strong </p <ul <li <p see all projects in the project overview</p </li <li <p view project details of all projects</p </li </ul <p <strong None</strong </p <ul <li <p only see projects you're a member of</p </li </ul </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Project tasks</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Manage</strong </p <ul <li <p view, edit, create, and delete tasks in all projects</p </li <li <p use task templates within projects</p </li </ul <p <strong Read</strong </p <ul <li <p view tasks in all projects</p </li <li <p no editing of task details (including no comments)</p </li </ul <p <strong None</strong </p <ul <li <p no general view of project tasks (except through project membership and project role)</p </li </ul </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Project times</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Manage</strong </p <ul <li <p view, edit, and delete times from all projects</p </li <li <p see aggregated times for project/task progress</p </li </ul <p <strong Read</strong </p <ul <li <p view times from all projects</p </li <li <p see aggregated times for project/task progress</p </li </ul <p <strong None</strong </p <ul <li <p no general view of project times (except through project membership and project role)</p </li <li <p no aggregated times for project/task progress</p </li </ul </td </tr </tbody </table Users New users can only be created by Admins . <table style="min width: 50px;" <colgroup <col style="min width: 25px;" <col style="min width: 25px;" </colgroup <tbody <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong User details</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Manage</strong </p <ul <li <p view overview and details of all users</p </li <li <p activate or deactivate users</p </li <li <p edit users</p </li </ul <p <strong Read</strong </p <ul <li <p view overview and details of all users</p </li </ul <p <strong None</strong </p <ul <li <p no overview/details visible</p </li <li <p only people with whom you share projects are visible (e.g., for mentioning or assigning)</p </li </ul </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong User times</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Manage</strong </p <ul <li <p view and edit all tracked times of other users (even without project relation)</p </li </ul <p <strong Read</strong </p <ul <li <p view all tracked times of other users (even without project relation)</p </li </ul <p <strong None</strong </p <ul <li <p no general view of other users' times (except through project membership, project roles, or general rights to project times)</p </li </ul </td </tr </tbody </table Customers <table style="min width: 50px;" <colgroup <col style="min width: 25px;" <col style="min width: 25px;" </colgroup <tbody <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Customer details</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Manage</strong </p <ul <li <p view, edit, and delete all customers</p </li <li <p create new customers</p </li </ul <p <strong Read</strong </p <ul <li <p view customer overview and details</p </li <li <p customers are available when creating new projects</p </li </ul <p <strong None</strong </p <ul <li <p no access to customer overview and details</p </li </ul </td </tr </tbody </table Settings <table style="min width: 50px;" <colgroup <col style="min width: 25px;" <col style="min width: 25px;" </colgroup <tbody <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Project settings</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <ul <li <p create and manage project templates and project types</p </li </ul </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Task settings</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <ul <li <p create, edit, and delete activities and task templates (also in project templates)</p </li </ul </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong General settings</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <ul <li <p manage workspace settings (e.g., name, logo, URL)</p </li <li <p manage integrations</p </li <li <p manage time tracking settings</p </li </ul <p <strong Note:</strong The workspace can only be deleted by <strong Admins</strong .</p </td </tr </tbody </table Tips & hints Please note: Project roles only extend permissions, they cannot remove rights. You cannot remove yourself from the Admin role. Project creators always retain full rights on their projects. Tip: Access to only specific projects If users should have access to only selected projects, we recommend this approach: In the general role , keep cross project rights (e.g., view of all projects/project tasks/project times) restrictive. Then specifically add the person as a project member and give them the needed rights in that specific project via the project role . FAQ Is it possible for users to only see their own projects and tasks? Yes. You can configure a general role so that users only see projects they're a member of. Is there a setting so users fundamentally cannot track time? Yes. Admins can disable time tracking for the entire workspace under Settings Workspace. This is available starting with the Professional Plan. Who can delete projects? Users who are allowed to manage project details (in the general role and/or via project role) can delete projects. Additionally, each user can delete projects they created themselves at any time. Do the permissions also apply in the API? Yes, the permissions configured in permissions management also apply to access via the awork API.
Configure Time Tracking Settings [!NOTE] 🔐 Available from the Professional Plan onwards. Time tracking settings let you decide whether and for which projects or time periods time entries can be recor
Configure Time Tracking Settings [!NOTE] 🔐 Available from the Professional Plan onwards. Time tracking settings let you decide whether and for which projects or time periods time entries can be recorded and edited. You'll find these settings under Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Workspace Time Tracking . [!WARNING] ☝️ Note: Users in the Admin group are not affected by these settings and can edit, create, or delete time entries at any time. This means corrections can still be made to completed projects without having to override the settings. The one exception is disabling time tracking this setting applies to all admins as well. Disable Time Tracking In the Enterprise Plan , admins have the option to disable time tracking for all users. When this setting is active, no users can record time entries. Prevent Time Tracking on Completed Projects When this setting is active, you can't record time on completed projects, and existing time entries on those projects can't be edited. Prevent Time Tracking in the Future This setting prevents recording time entries for dates further in the future than today. Limit Time Tracking to the Past Here you can restrict both recording and editing of time entries to only a certain number of days in the past. The value is specified in days. 0 days means time entries can only be recorded for today. Time entries from before this period can no longer be edited. If you leave the field empty, time entries can be created and edited freely in the past, as long as they aren't restricted by any of the other settings. ☝️ Note: You can still edit the billing status ( Billed / Billable ) even with this restriction in place, so time entries can be billed after project completion and the corresponding status can be set. 10 Hour Limit for Time Tracking German labor law (ArbZG) requires that a maximum of 10 hours can be worked per day: If you want to limit time tracking in your awork workspace to 10 hours per day to remind your team members or simply keep your time tracking data clean, you can activate this setting. When this setting is active, it immediately affects all ways of creating or editing time entries: Start/Stop timer Edit window Day and week views Quick actions Time reports Mobile app Existing time entries are only affected when being edited. ☝️ Note: As mentioned at the beginning of this article, users in the Admin group can still create and edit time entries over 10 hours because they're not subject to this restriction. Require a Project for Time Tracking If you want to make sure that only time entries assigned to a project can be recorded in your workspace, you can enforce this with this setting. For all non admin users, the Project field becomes mandatory when creating or editing time entries. When this setting is active, it also affects the timer. The timer only starts once a project has been selected. Recording time on private tasks will no longer be possible.
Creating Time Reports [!NOTE] 🔐 Global time reports are available from the Professional plan onwards. In time reports, you can comprehensively analyze your tracked time. Various filtering, grouping,
Creating Time Reports [!NOTE] 🔐 Global time reports are available from the Professional plan onwards. In time reports, you can comprehensively analyze your tracked time. Various filtering, grouping, and summarization options are available. From here you can create timesheets, generate invoices through external tools, export time entries, or mark them as billed. Overview of Time Reports You'll find the reports in the main menu under Time Reports . The overview page is divided into My Reports and Shared Reports . However, you'll only see the Shared Reports section if there are actually reports shared with you. Under My Reports you'll find all the reports you've created. Under Shared Reports you can find all the reports that other users have shared with you. Using the + Report button in the upper left corner, you can create a new report. To open an existing report, you can simply click on its name. In the overview, you can also search for reports or delete them. Saved reports can be sorted by name or last modified date in ascending or descending order. Creating, Saving, Deleting, Sharing & Duplicating Reports Creating and Saving a Report Once you've created a new report, you can set a name for it at the top and save it. Saved reports can be displayed on your dashboard as widgets. When you create or edit a report and leave the page, you'll be prompted to confirm whether you want to save the report. You don't need to save your report to export it or create invoices. Deleting, Duplicating, and Sharing a Report Using the action button on the right in the respective report row, you can delete the report again, duplicate it, or share it with your team. When you've shared a report with your team, they can view and use your saved report. Of course, the results can vary depending on which data the user is allowed to see according to the rights management. [!WARNING] Note : Shared reports can only be deleted by the person who created the report or by an admin. Using Filters The filters for creating reports are divided into four sections/rows: 1. Time filter 2. Data filter 3. Sorting & Grouping 4. Displayed columns 1. Time Filter Here you can select the time period to be used in the report. awork distinguishes between relative and absolute options. If you select a specific month (e.g., August), the report will always show the data for August. Of course, you can still manually switch between months at the top of the report. However, if you choose a relative time period, such as This month , the current month will always be displayed. 2. Data Filter You have various options for data filters: Filter by user Filter by project Filter by activity Filter by tags Filter by billing status Filter by time entry notes All filters can be used in combination. An AND operation is always performed, for example all billed time entries and a specific activity. 3. Sorting & Grouping There are several options: Select grouping Choose summation by field Sort list by Set rounding Select Grouping Here you can define how the data in the report should be grouped. The groups are then displayed as headings in the list. Choose Summation by Field Here you can set up summations for the list. For example, if you sum by user, the list will show one entry for each user with the total sum of tracked time in the selected period. This can then be expanded to show the entries below it. [!WARNING] Note: When grouping or summing by task list, keep in mind that if tasks exist in multiple task lists, a primary list should be selected for the time report. Sort List By Here you decide which field the list should be sorted by in ascending or descending order. You can also sort by fields that you don't display in the list. You can now see at a glance whether sorting is set to ascending or descending. Depending on which sort order is selected, the ascending or descending sort icon will be displayed. Set Rounding Here you can define how entries are rounded. There are two options: Round to the nearest full unit up or down (15 min., 30 min., or hour). For example, 1:17 becomes 1:15 Round up: this always uses the next larger value, for example 1:17 becomes 1:30. 4. Choose Displayed Columns This function is located further down the page and can be accessed through the menu to the right of the time entries. Here you define which columns are displayed in the table. Only the columns available in this selection can be displayed. It's not possible to create additional columns. Totals and Charts in the Summary In the summary you'll find the sum of time by billability in the individual widgets: Total (Purple): Sum of all time tracked in the selected period. Billable (Yellow): Tracked time that is billable. Billed (Green): Tracked time that is billable and has been billed. Non billable (Red): Tracked time that is not billable. If it needs to be billed, it must first be marked as billable. For the chart there are three settings: bar chart, matrix, and pie chart. awork automatically displays the bar chart when data is not grouped. For grouped data, the matrix view is automatically used. Bar Chart If the report is not grouped, bars are displayed in the height of the tracked time for the respective time period. By moving your mouse over the entry, the exact date and value of tracked hours is displayed. Matrix If the report is grouped, a matrix is displayed. The rows correspond to the respective group of the report. In the matrix itself are the entries for the respective units being reviewed, such as days, as well as the total sum for the group at the end. By moving your mouse over the entry, the exact date and value of tracked hours is displayed. [!WARNING] Important: For better readability, all values are rounded to an hourly basis when there isn't enough space. When you hover your mouse over the entry, the exact value is displayed. Pie Chart If the report is not grouped, this shows the ratio of non billable, not yet billed, and already billed time. If the report is grouped, the ratio of group totals is displayed. When you move your mouse over an entry, the value of the entry and the percentage share are displayed. Exporting Data The data from the report can be exported in two ways. As a Timesheet in PDF Format Print your report or save it as a PDF. To get an excerpt of the filtered values as a PDF and attach it to, for example, an invoice in your invoicing tool, click on the document icon . Your browser's print window will open. Here you can make various settings (depending on your browser) and print the excerpt or save it as a PDF. The groups, totals, and column filters you've selected are taken into account. [!NOTE] Tip: You can add your logo under Settings General so it appears on the PDF. As a Table in Excel Format (.xlsx) Export the raw data or create a formatted export. Using the filter options, you can format the export (only available for PDF format and formatted export) as you wish by grouping, summing, or sorting your data. You can also specify which columns to export or decide how the data should be rounded. You can find more information about exporting here. Editing Time Entries There are several ways to edit time entries in the report view. Editing Individual Time Entries You can open the edit window using the action button for a time entry to edit the entry. Editing Multiple Time Entries at Once You can also edit multiple time entries at the same time, for example to mark them as billed. In accordance with your rights (rights management), you can change the activity, project, task, or user for multiple time entries at once, or also delete time entries. To do this, select individual time entries or entire groups using the checkboxes to the left of the time list. The checkboxes appear when you hover your mouse over the task rows or groups. An action menu appears at the bottom of the screen. Here you can now perform various actions or deselect the selection. [!WARNING] Note: Currently, not all time entries can be selected with one click. However, if you've set a grouping, you can select the time entries per grouping with one click and don't have to click on each time individually. Marking Time Entries as Billed You can simply mark all time entries in your report as billed. To do this, set up your desired filter and then click the dollar icon in the upper right and select Mark as billed . [!WARNING] Note : Only time entries that haven't been marked as billed yet can be transferred to invoices. Creating Invoices Time entries are billed through integrated invoicing tools. To do this, click the dollar icon in the upper right and select Create invoice . [!WARNING] Note : Time entries that have been invoiced can no longer be edited. Only an admin has the right to mark a time entry that is already set to billed back to not billed , which then allows the time to be edited again. Learn more about billing time here. FAQ Are breaks (paused time) shown in the time report when tracking time? Paused time is not shown here initially. If you click on Edit using the action button of a time tracking entry, you can view the paused time/duration. The paused time cannot be changed but can be deleted. Paused time can only be deleted if the time entry is not yet marked as "billed". You can find more information here. Can I report on planned effort for tasks? Yes, there's a column you can add for this. In this column you see the total planned effort for a task regardless of the selected time period of the report. This means: If a task has a total of 10 hours of planned effort but the report only covers the current month, we still show the full 10 hours not just the portion in the selected time period. Why is a URL visible in my PDF file? If, for example, a link is visible at the bottom of the PDF, it's likely due to your print settings. These settings need to be disabled in the print window.
Reminders for Time Tracking Use the daily and weekly overview In the Times menu, you'll find a visual overview of your times. In the daily view, you can check out individual days and spot any gaps rig
Reminders for Time Tracking Use the daily and weekly overview In the Times menu, you'll find a visual overview of your times. In the daily view, you can check out individual days and spot any gaps right away. In the weekly view, you get an overview of your entire week and can easily check whether you've missed recording anything on certain days. Use time reports, for example as a dashboard widget If you have access to time reports, you can create your own dashboard widget where you can see your recorded times for the current day or from a saved time report. Saved time report Step 1 First, create a time report for your user. Here's how to do that. Step 2 Add a new widget to your dashboard and select the time report you just saved. Here's how you can edit your dashboard. Enable weekly and monthly reports (emails) Use awork's email reports to get an overview of your recorded times at the end of the week or end of the month. In the email, you can see at a glance which days you've recorded times (and how much) and whether any still need to be added. You can enable the reports in your account settings. Learn more about this here.
Connect Trust Connect Trust cuts down on the hassle of working together repeatedly. Workspace admins can set external workspaces as trusted partners, so Connect invitations from those workspaces get a
Connect Trust Connect Trust cuts down on the hassle of working together repeatedly. Workspace admins can set external workspaces as trusted partners, so Connect invitations from those workspaces get accepted automatically. No approvals. No delays. Start collaborating right away with people you already trust. Key Benefits and Use Cases Simplified collaboration with partners Skip approval steps for known partners. Faster onboarding for shared projects External team members can get tasks assigned, be booked on projects, and jump right in right away no need to wait for the invitation to be accepted. Less admin work No more repetitive approval work for Connect invitations from known partners. How to Use Connect Trust Workspace admins set up Connect Trust in the workspace settings. Add a Trusted Workspace 1. Head to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) 2. Select Connect 3. In the Trusted Workspaces section, click + Add . 1) Enter the Workspace ID or URL of the partner workspace. 2) Click Save . After you save, a badge shows up to confirm the trust connection. [!NOTE] Important: The receiving workspace always sets the trust. How Connect Trust Works When a trusted workspace sends a Connect invitation to users in your workspace, the invitation gets accepted automatically. Automatic acceptance Invitations from trusted workspaces skip the manual approval process. Control at the workspace level The receiving workspace has to turn on the trust first. [!CAUTION] Security fallback for multi workspace users: If a user belongs to multiple workspaces and the right one can't be figured out for sure, the standard approval process kicks in to make sure users never get connected to the wrong workspace. Permissions and Access Control Workspace admins can add and remove trusted workspaces. Regular team members can't see or change settings for trusted workspaces. Known Limitations and Notes Trust is one way by default . If Workspace A trusts Workspace B, only invitations from B to A get accepted automatically. For trust to work both ways, both workspaces need to add each other as trusted. FAQ Who can set up Connect Trust? Only workspace admins can add or remove trusted workspaces. Do Connect invitations always get accepted automatically? Only invitations from a trusted workspace to the receiving workspace get accepted automatically. What happens if a user belongs to multiple workspaces? If the system can't figure out which workspace is the right one, the invitation goes through the normal approval process. Is Connect Trust two way by default? Nope. Both workspaces need to add each other if you want invitations to be automatically accepted in both directions. Can regular team members see trusted workspaces? No. Settings for trusted workspaces are only visible to workspace admins.
Converting Guests to External Users [!CAUTION] This article only applies to workspaces that were created before 21.06.2024 and still have active guest licenses. Learn how you can convert guests to ext
Converting Guests to External Users [!CAUTION] This article only applies to workspaces that were created before 21.06.2024 and still have active guest licenses. Learn how you can convert guests to external users so you can collaborate seamlessly on projects. Key Benefits and Use Cases Flexibility: Invite partners, clients, or freelancers to projects without requiring a full user license. Collaboration: Share project access with the same features available in guest licenses. How Does the Conversion Work? 1. Navigate to Settings Rights Management in the left menu. 2. Scroll down to the list of assigned permission roles. 3. Type "guest" in the search bar at the top left to see all guest users. 4. Select a guest you want to convert and click the Connect icon next to that user's permission role. 5. After confirmation, the guest will see a popup in awork the next time they visit your workspace ( Note: You may need to refresh the page). 6. Once they accept the migration, the guest gets their own free awork workspace and access to your shared project. Important Information A person with a full awork license CANNOT be migrated to an external user. Deactivated guests can be migrated to external users. If the migration frees up a full license, you can reduce the number of licenses under Settings Manage Plan . This will be reflected in your next billing cycle.
awork Connect - Invite Your External Partners
awork Connect Invite Your External Partners With awork Connect, you bridge the gap between your project team and your external partners by sharing your project simply, directly, and for free with exte
awork Connect Invite Your External Partners With awork Connect, you bridge the gap between your project team and your external partners by sharing your project simply, directly, and for free with external people. Invite them with awork Connect to collaborate on your project and you're good to go whether they're agencies, clients, or freelancers. 🪢 Are you an external partner? Then check out the awork Connect article for external users here. How does awork Connect work? An external user gets access to a project from another workspace. Once the invitation is accepted, the shared project appears directly in the external person's workspace. The prerequisite is that the invited person already has an existing workspace or alternatively sets up a free awork Connect workspace. The invitation contains all the necessary information to ensure a smooth onboarding process. How to invite external people? What invitation options are available? You can invite external people in four ways: 1. Project Home: via the Add or remove team members Invite external user icon 2. Project Home: via the Connect button in the top right 3. Project Home: via the Action button Assign members Invite external user 4. In the project settings under Assigned users + Add Invite external user [!IMPORTANT] ☝️ Note : You cannot add external people during project creation. You need to create the project first. 💡 Tip: If you've already invited an external person to another project, they'll be automatically suggested to you as soon as you type the first letters of their email address. After the invitation What happens next? The external user receives an invitation via email along with information about further usage. After accepting the invitation, the person appears in the project settings under "Assigned users". There you can assign a project specific permission role or change it later. You can invite as many external people as you want to a project. Once they accept the invitation, they'll be visible in the project. If the invitation isn't accepted within three days, the external person automatically receives a reminder email. After accepting the invitation, the person who sent it gets an email notification. Control external invitations Activate or deactivate Connect in the workspace Under Settings General , you'll find the button "Allow inviting external people to projects (Connect)" . If you deactivate this button: Existing external connections remain active. However, new invitations are not possible. You can enable the feature again at any time. Managing and collaborating with external people Where can I find an overview of external people? In the general workspace settings, there's a menu item called "Connect" . All external people in your workspace are listed there, including information about which project they belong to and when they were last active. Via the three dot menu next to a person, you can directly open the project or remove the person from the project. The list can be sorted and grouped by last activity, project, or user. You can use the search field to search specifically by name, email address, project, or workspace. What options do I have with external people in the project? When a project is shared with an external person, you can assign them to tasks within the project. You can also mention them in the activity log both in the project itself and in project tasks. If the external person makes changes, such as changing the status of a task, you'll be notified according to your account settings as usual. What is not possible with external people? They don't appear in the "User" menu item, only in the Connect overview in the settings. They cannot be selected in the Planner (workload and calendar). They cannot be added to teams. It's not possible to share task filters with them. In task, project, and time report filters , they cannot be used. In automations , they cannot be selected directly as users however, selection via their project specific permission role is possible. They cannot independently schedule tasks from shared projects in the calendar or planner. Rights management Permission roles for external users An external person always receives a project specific permission role automatically (defined specifically for external users) for the shared project. The person's general permission role in their own workspace is irrelevant because access concerns only this one shared project, and the workspace where the project was created determines the permissions. Set and change roles for external users When creating a new project specific permission role, you can specify whether this role should apply to external users. This setting is permanent and cannot be undone. In the project details, edit rights cannot be granted to external people. Hiding content from external people What content can be hidden? You can make either entire task lists or individual comments invisible to external people. This allows you to maintain clear internal communication without having to switch to additional tools. To hide a comment, activate the button with the eye icon in the comment field. When the button is active, it appears with a red background and the comment is not visible to external people. If you want to make the comment visible again, you can edit it and deactivate the button. Show or hide entire task lists If you want to hide a complete task list, open the three dot menu of the list and select "Hide from external users". A note appears above the list indicating that it's hidden. To make the list visible again, click the menu again and select "Show to external users". The note will then disappear. Can I make only individual tasks visible? It's possible to completely hide tasks from external people so that they only see the tasks they're directly assigned to. To do this, set in the project specific permission role that external users don't have general task rights. The external person will then only see the assigned tasks in the "My tasks" tab and can access them via the "My tasks" task filter. FAQ Can I invite my own employees to my projects via awork Connect? It's not possible to invite users with the same email domain via awork Connect. awork Connect is designed for collaborating with external users. Internal users must have a license in your workspace. The domain of the workspace creator is decisive for the comparison. Are there valid reasons why you want to invite your employees to your projects via awork Connect? In that case, feel free to contact our support team. We'll review your request individually. Can I use awork Connect during the 14 day trial period? Yes, awork Connect can be tried out without restrictions during the free trial period. What happens when the trial period or subscription ends? If the trial period or subscription of the inviting workspace ends, the external person sees a notice box in the project. They can continue to create tasks and change their status, but commenting at the project level is temporarily not possible. Once the workspace is active again on a paid plan, the notice box disappears and project level commenting is allowed again. How do I recognize external users in the workspace? The workspace logo of external users is displayed in the bottom right of their profile picture. All project members can see the external person. Can a person with a full awork license be migrated to an external person? No, internal users cannot be converted to Connect users. How does awork Connect work if, for example, customers haven't used awork yet? Customers receive an invitation via email and are then asked to register with awork and create their own workspace where the shared project will appear. What happens to existing guest licenses? Previously, you could add external people as guests. This feature has been replaced by awork Connect. Existing guests can be migrated to external people. You can find more information about this in a separate article. Can external people access the planner? Yes, but they only see themselves as a user and only the shared project and their own projects. They cannot plan tasks or projects. Is awork Connect automatically available to me or do I need to add it? awork Connect is available to every awork customer regardless of plan. There's nothing to add and no extra costs. Does the external person see all other users in the shared project? Yes, external users can see all project members. Do automations also work with external people? External people themselves cannot be selected as individual users in the automation. However, selection of external users is possible via the project specific permission role. Can external people be considered in API integrations? External people are listed when creating an integration via our API and can therefore also be selected. They're also marked as "external". Can I share any number of projects with an external person? You can invite external people to any number of projects. Where are the external person's hours recorded? The hours are recorded in the workspace where the shared project was initially created. This corresponds to the inviting workspace. Can the external person view their recorded hours in their own workspace under "Time reports"? The external person sees their own hours in the menu on the left under "Time", but not in time reports. Can other users record hours for external users? No, only external users themselves can record their own time. Other users cannot create time entries for Connect users. How is data protection ensured? We can guarantee data protection because external users are not connected to the entire workspace, but really only to the project. Does it cost anything to integrate external users into the workspace? No, awork Connect is included as a feature in all plans and doesn't cause any additional costs. Who can invite external people? People who have edit rights on projects can add external people to projects.
Creating a New Task Tasks are the heart of work organization in awork. You can write detailed briefs in them, collaborate with your team, track time, and make progress transparent. To find out what ta
Creating a New Task Tasks are the heart of work organization in awork. You can write detailed briefs in them, collaborate with your team, track time, and make progress transparent. To find out what tasks can do and what each field means, check out the article on task details. How to create a task You can create tasks in several places: using the quick action button + in the floating action bar at the bottom of your screen: add Task using the shortcut in a Project: tasks, board, or timeline view by forwarding emails Create a task using the Quick Creator 1. You can access the pop up for creating new tasks in several ways in awork (for example, using the quick action button or the shortcut ). 2. Enter the title of the task in the text field. 3. Click on Add details to include additional information. 4. Save by pressing or click on Save . [!NOTE] After saving, the window stays open so you can create the next task right away. To close the pop up, click on the Close icon in the top right, press , or click outside the Quick Creator. Clicking outside only works if you haven't entered any text or additional details yet. When a task is created successfully, a confirmation message appears in the top right of the window. If you click on it, you'll go directly to the task. [!IMPORTANT] Tip: If you open the Quick Creator to create a task within a project, that project is already pre selected. Add details using slash commands You can add details without using your mouse. 1. Type in the task field to start the slash commands. 2. Type or select the command you want to execute. [!IMPORTANT] A list of available commands appears as soon as you type while the pop up is open. Create a task in a project Click on the + Task button: it's located in the top left of the Tasks, Board, or Timeline tab in a project. Or click on Add task at the beginning of a task list. Alternatively, move your mouse between two tasks to the desired position and click on the + Task or + Subtask button. Create tasks from emails You can create private and project tasks by forwarding emails. Find out more here: Creating tasks from emails. Best practices Use slash commands to add details without your mouse Start in the project if the task should be assigned to the right project right away (the project will be pre selected) Open the task from the confirmation message to continue working right after creating it FAQ How can I create new tasks? You can add tasks using the quick action button + in the floating action bar at the bottom of your screen, using the shortcut , creating them in a project, or by forwarding emails. How do slash commands work when creating tasks? Type in the task field to start the slash commands. Then you can type or select the command you want. You can see the list of available commands while the pop up is open. How do I close the Quick Creator pop up? You can close the window using the Close icon in the top right, pressing , or clicking outside the pop up. Clicking outside only works if you haven't entered any text or additional details yet.
Private Tasks vs. Project Tasks Private tasks are designed for your personal work routine. Project tasks belong to a project and are visible to everyone who has permission to see the project's tasks.
Private Tasks vs. Project Tasks Private tasks are designed for your personal work routine. Project tasks belong to a project and are visible to everyone who has permission to see the project's tasks. Main benefits and use cases Here's how this distinction helps you in your everyday work: What's private stays private – Private tasks can only be seen by you Controlled handoff – You can pass a private task to someone else by assigning it to them Project work for all with access – Project tasks are visible to all users who have permission to see the project's tasks How to use private tasks and project tasks Creating a private task 1. Create a task using the quick action button + in the floating action bar at the bottom of your screen or with the shortcut T 2. Don't select a project 3. Save the task – it will automatically be a private task Finding and organizing private tasks To view and organize your private tasks, navigate to the views section. Your private tasks will appear in the standard views Private Tasks and My Tasks . If you group by project in the My Tasks view, each private task will get its own list. Creating a project task (or converting a private task) Create a task with a project by selecting a project when you create it Or assign a project to an existing private task. The task will move into the project and become a project task. [!CAUTION] Important: Once a task is linked to a project, all users who have permission to see that project's tasks will be able to see this task too. Limitations and notes No multiple assignments – Other users don't have access to your private tasks, so multiple assignments aren't possible No task lists – Private tasks can't be added to custom task lists Limited status options – You can't change existing statuses or create custom statuses for private tasks Task status language not customizable – Task statuses are displayed in the language you selected when creating your workspace FAQ Who can see my private tasks? Private tasks can only be seen by you, unless you assign them to someone else. What happens when I assign a private task to someone else? You can pass along a private task by assigning it to another person. You'll still see the task in your My Tasks filter. Can I assign private tasks to multiple people? No. Multiple assignments aren't possible for private tasks. Can I organize private tasks in custom task lists? No. Private tasks can't be added to custom task lists.
Subtasks in awork Here's how you can use subtasks in awork to better organize and manage your projects. Key Benefits and Use Cases Improve clarity: Subtasks bring structure to larger projects. Easy ed
Subtasks in awork Here's how you can use subtasks in awork to better organize and manage your projects. Key Benefits and Use Cases Improve clarity: Subtasks bring structure to larger projects. Easy editing: You can easily convert tasks into subtasks or rearrange them. Flexibility: Subtasks can be adjusted without affecting the parent task. Creating Subtasks You can convert tasks in awork into subtasks: 1. Use Drag & Drop: You can convert tasks in awork into subtasks. Drag an existing task under another one to nest it as a subtask. 2. Create new subtasks: Click + Subtask below a task to open an input field. 3. Assign a parent task: When creating new tasks, select Add details Attach as subtask to choose a parent task under which the new task should be placed. Changing the Order Drag & Drop: Change the order and levels by simply dragging tasks. Convert a Checklist into Subtasks If your task has a checklist and you want to convert it into actual tasks, click the action button next to the checklist and select Convert to tasks . Progress and Time Tracked A task with subtasks displays the total time tracked and progress in both the detail and list view, including the subtasks. Subtasks in Board and Timeline Board view: Only the top level tasks are displayed. Click expand/collapse to see the subtasks. Timeline: Here you can plan both parent and subtasks and set dependencies. Subtasks are clearly recognizable by an icon and the name of the parent task. Subtasks in Task Filters When you create a task filter, it's possible that both subtasks and parent tasks match your criteria. Parent tasks are displayed if they match the filter, while subtasks appear at the top level if their parent task is not shown. FAQ How can I create subtasks? You can create subtasks via drag and drop by dragging a task, or by creating a new subtask in the task list. What happens when I move a parent task? When you select a parent task, the subtasks automatically come along. You can reassign or move an entire task group in a single action. What happens when I filter a subtask? If a subtask meets the filter criteria, it will be displayed in the results list, even if the parent task is not shown.
All Task Details In the task details, you can see the task along with information and progress, and you can edit it directly. Main Functions The task details are your control center for everything rel
All Task Details In the task details, you can see the task along with information and progress, and you can edit it directly. Main Functions The task details are your control center for everything related to a task: Check and change info quickly name, description, status, dates, tags and more Bundle collaboration comments, @mentions, files and activity log all in one place Planning & analysis planned effort, logged time, remaining effort and calendar scheduling Control notifications via the bell icon and the list of followers Task Name and Description The task name is the title of the task. The description lets you write detailed briefings, for example. The toolbar of the text editor supports the following formatting: Text sizes : Header, Title, Subtitle, Text Text styles : Bold, Italic, Strikethrough, Underlined Code : Display with corresponding font Links : Insert hyperlinks Quote : Insert quotes Lists : Numbered and unnumbered lists, checklists Section divider : Aesthetic separation of content Files : Attach files The toolbar appears when your cursor is on an empty line (click the + button ) or when you select text. [!IMPORTANT] Select text in a task and ask AI to: Request translations Create summaries Suggest next steps Generate subtasks Task Status Each task has a current status . You can change it via the round status icon. [!NOTE] For private tasks there's a standard set of five statuses. These cannot be edited. For project tasks , statuses can be defined individually for each project. They are also the columns in the Kanban board of the project. Color Meaning of Task Statuses Gray / Blue (To Do) : Tasks that are not actively being worked on yet. Yellow (In Progress) : Tasks that are actively being worked on. Purple (In Review) : Tasks in a feedback or review loop. Red (Blocked) : Tasks that are currently not being worked on or are postponed. Green (Done) : Tasks that are completed. Project and Task Lists [!IMPORTANT] A task in a project is a project task , while a task without a project is a private task . You can change a task's project in the edit window via the action button Edit . Alternatively, you can select Move to Project directly from the action button. Task Lists (projects only) Task lists only exist in projects. That's why the list fields are only visible for project tasks. [!WARNING] A task can be in no list, one list, or multiple lists at the same time it remains the same task. If you complete it in one list, it's completed everywhere. A task list is the primary list . [!IMPORTANT] Logged time and planned effort are only counted for the primary list. Activity The activity categorizes tasks and time. This helps with reporting, billing and filtering tasks and time. Each task must be assigned to exactly one activity. By default, the most recently used activity is preselected. More on this: Using activities correctly. Assignees You can assign tasks to users visible to you in the workspace. When a task is assigned, it appears in the task filters of the respective users. When assigning, notifications for updates to that task are also activated for the users. [!IMPORTANT] Note: If the status is set to To Do , the task doesn't have an assignee yet, and you change it to In Progress , you'll be automatically set as the assignee. One or Multiple Assignees in the Workspace You can set in the workspace whether tasks can have only one or multiple assignees. 1. Navigate to Settings select Workspace and scroll to the Tasks section 2. Enable A task can have multiple assignees Only One Assignee If you disable multiple assignees, you can only assign one user. A new assignment will then replace the previous one. Multiple Assignees When multiple assignees are enabled, you can select multiple users one after another and remove them individually. Via the person icon in the user selection, you can replace all assignees with a single user. [!NOTE] Note: Multiple assignment is not possible for private tasks. More on this: Private Tasks vs. Project Tasks. Start Date, Due Date and Times A task can have a start date and an end date, or just one of them. If both fields are filled in, the task will be displayed in the project timeline on the timeline. The end date is considered the due date . This field is displayed in lists and overviews and is used to flag tasks coming due soon. In addition to the date, you can also set times for start and end. awork automatically sets 8:00 AM (start) and 6:00 PM (end). Checklist Each task can have a checklist with as many items as you want. A checklist item has only two statuses: open and completed . Items can be as long as you want and will automatically wrap. You can change the order by drag and drop and edit the text by clicking on it. You can see the progress of the checklist in the list view of the task. Subtasks In awork there are two task levels: under first level tasks you can add further tasks (subtasks). These are regular tasks with all functions. In the details of a top level task, there's a Tasks section. There you can create and view subtasks. In the details of a subtask, you can additionally create a checklist. More on this: Subtasks. Planned Effort, Logged Time and Calendar Scheduling Planned For each task, you can set a planned effort. This is the expected time commitment. When setting it, you can choose whether the planned effort is distributed automatically or manually among the assignees: A = Automatic the effort to be distributed is automatically assigned M = Manual the effort to be distributed is manually assigned [!IMPORTANT] Planned effort is required if the task should impact workload and be used for capacity planning. If you only set a total value, it will be distributed equally among all assignees. However, you can also enter a separate planned effort for each user. Logged In the task details and in lists, you can see the sum of all time logged to the task. To view all time for a task, go to the detail view and click the green Logged button in the task KPIs. A window will open showing all logged time. There you can search and export the time directly. In Calendar If a task is scheduled in the calendar, you'll see the scheduled entries directly in the task details. Click In Calendar to view the date, time and duration of scheduled entries. Via the action button you can directly Reschedule and adjust the time range or Remove Scheduling . Files and Attachments You can attach as many files as you want to a task (e.g. images, PDFs). Upload them via the Upload File button or the paperclip icon in comments, or drag and drop them into the task or comment. [!IMPORTANT] Files you attach to a comment will automatically also appear as attachments to the task. You can also link files from Google Drive or OneDrive . These files are only linked. Other people need the appropriate permissions in their respective drive to open them. Here's how: Google Drive & Microsoft OneDrive Integration. [!NOTE] A preview of Google Drive or OneDrive files is not currently possible in awork. Mention Files Type @ and the name of the file (only files belonging to the task) to reference it in the description or a comment. [!NOTE] Note: If you delete a comment, the attached file is not automatically removed from the task. If you delete the file from the task, it's no longer accessible in the comment. You can view files from tasks in the project under the Files tab including information about which task the file belongs to. More on this: Files in Projects. Tags Tasks can have tags . You can create new tags or select from the tag pool. [!IMPORTANT] Project tasks and private tasks have different tag pools. Depending on the task type, different tags will be suggested to you. More on this: Using Tags. [!NOTE] Tags are displayed in alphabetical order. Priority Flag Via the flag icon, you can mark a task as priority . The flag is visible in the details and overviews. You can filter by it or build automations on it. Activity Log and Comments In the activity log below the task details, you can see all changes and comments on the task. You can mention other users with "@" to trigger an explicit notification. You can also mention: @Workspace notifies every user in the workspace @Task notifies everyone assigned to the task or who has the bell icon enabled @"Team" (e.g. @Marketing) notifies every team member Requirements for these notifications: Profile settings the corresponding notifications are enabled Bell icon is enabled in the task Permissions the task is visible according to rights management Notifications and Followers Via the bell icon in the top right of the task details, you can enable or disable notifications for a task. More on this: Receive or disable notifications. Followers are users who receive notifications for a task. They are listed in the task details. Notifications are automatically enabled for a user if they: Created the task Are assigned to the task Are mentioned in a comment If you disable notifications, you'll be removed from the list of participants and won't receive any more updates. Each user can only remove themselves from the list. Important: Assignees are not additionally shown in the followers list, even though they receive notifications. Recurrence Rule You can mark tasks as recurring via the icon with the circular arrow. More on this: Recurring Tasks. Custom Fields In the task details you can use custom fields . More on this: Custom Fields. Tips and Best Practices You can resize the detail view: hover over the edge of the detail view and drag it to make it bigger or smaller. With the To Do status, you can choose between two layouts: gray or with a blue background. FAQ I deleted a task. Can it be restored? Yes. If you accidentally delete a task, our support team can restore it. Contact support and share the task title. Can I make the detail view bigger or smaller? Yes. Hover over the edge of the detail view and drag it to make it bigger or smaller. Can private tasks have multiple assignees? No. Multiple assignment of assignees is not possible for private tasks. Is there a limit for file size when attaching? No. There's no limit regarding file size in awork. How can I see all logged time for a task? Open the task in the task details and click the green Logged button in the task KPIs. A window will then open showing all logged time.
Integrating Your Calendar With the calendar integration, you can display your appointments in Times, Calendar, and Planner in awork. Additionally, your appointments are included in the workload calcul
Integrating Your Calendar With the calendar integration, you can display your appointments in Times, Calendar, and Planner in awork. Additionally, your appointments are included in the workload calculation, or you can automatically sync tasks from awork to your calendar. Your appointments are not stored in awork and visibility can be configured through settings. Which calendar providers does awork support? awork supports the following calendar services: Google Workspace Microsoft (Outlook & Exchange) Apple iCloud You can connect as many of your own calendars as you like from the same or different providers. [!WARNING] Please note: Only cloud based Microsoft Exchange Server can be linked. awork does not support self hosted local Exchange servers. Linking Your Calendar Google & Microsoft 1. Start the integration in awork via: the Calendar icon in Times, Calendar, or Planner or the Integration library under Settings Integrations. 2. You'll be redirected to the provider's login page. 3. Sign in and authorize awork to access your calendar. 4. Select the calendar groups in awork that you want to display. Your appointments now appear in awork. You can identify the respective provider by the icons. Apple iCloud 1. Enter your Apple ID in the awork popup. 2. Go to appleid.apple.com and follow the instructions in the awork popup. 3. Navigate to the Security App Specific Passwords section and generate an app password. 4. Confirm in awork that you've completed the steps. 5. Enter the password in awork. Your appointments now appear in awork. You can identify the respective provider by the icons. Calendar Settings You can edit the settings in the same place where you started the integration. Select Calendars Choose which calendars you want to display. Visibility for Other Users Use the Share Calendar & Use for Workload button to decide whether your calendar events are visible to others in awork. Use the Share Event Names (Non Private Only) button to specify that event names are visible in the Planner (except for private events). Load Out of Office Events You can load out of office events from your linked calendar and treat them as absences in awork. To do this, enable or disable the "Load out of office" events and treat as absence option in the calendar integration settings. When this setting is enabled: out of office events are displayed in the awork Calendar they reduce the available capacity of the user in the Planner's Workload the total duration of out of office time per day is shown in the Workload detail popup similar to calendar entries This setting is disabled by default and can be enabled per user in the calendar integration settings. [!WARNING] Note: awork recognizes overlaps between out of office events and existing absences (from awork or external sources). If an overlap is detected, the time is not counted twice . Task Sync (Google & Microsoft Only) Enable Sync tasks from awork with your calendar so they're automatically synced to your external calendar. Select the target calendar (for example, your main calendar). You can change the target calendar later, and awork will ask you what to do with the previous events in the old calendar: Keep all, delete all, or delete only future events. [!CAUTION] Note : Only tasks from awork are transferred to your external calendar. Changes made in the external calendar to events created from awork are currently not synced back to awork. Changes to events may be overwritten by awork. [!NOTE] Task Sync is not available for Apple iCloud Calendar . Integrating Calendar for Your Entire Workspace With Google Workspace and Microsoft Office 365 , you can set up a workspace wide integration. [!WARNING] Requirement: Setup can only be performed by people who have the Admin role in both awork and the Microsoft account. [!CAUTION] Note: With a workspace wide integration, individual users can no longer change their own calendar settings. Workspace Wide Google Calendar Integration 1. Navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu), select Integrations , and open the Integration library . 2. Select Workspace wide Google Calendar Integration . 3. Install the awork app in the Google Workspace Marketplace . 4. Select the Domain . 5. Save . The matching with awork users runs automatically: Users in awork and Google are matched based on this domain and the email addresses users have entered. 6. Now edit user settings or disable the integration for individual users. Workspace Wide Microsoft Calendar Integration The awork Microsoft Calendar Integration requires a Microsoft 365 Tenant . We authenticate users via <u Microsoft Entra ID</u . We read and write data (calendar entries, user mapping, etc.) via <u Microsoft Graph</u . To set up, an admin in the awork workspace must also be an admin in the Microsoft Tenant (Global Administrator, Privileged Role Administrator, Cloud Application Administrator, or Application Administrator). [!WARNING] For synchronization, the email addresses of the admin must be identical in both accounts. During authentication, the following scopes are requested and required for ongoing operation: , , , and . 1. Navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu), select Integrations , and open the Integration library . 2. Select Workspace wide Microsoft Calendar Integration . 3. Install the awork app in your Microsoft 365 account . 4. Select the Domain the Tenant ID is pre filled by the redirect after installation. 5. Save . The matching with awork users runs automatically: The email domain of users in the awork workspace must match the Microsoft 365 Tenant domain. 6. Now edit user settings or disable the integration for individual users. [!WARNING] Note: With a workspace wide integration, individual users can no longer change their own calendar settings. How Do Appointments Affect Workload Calculation? Busy is counted in the workload Free is not counted in the workload Focus time is not counted in the workload (shown with hatching) All day absence/out of office events : choose whether these should be counted in the workload FAQ Can I modify or delete an existing integration? Yes, via the Calendar icon in Times you can: Edit calendar, Delete calendar, Add more calendars. The workspace wide calendar integration can also be modified under Settings Integrations. Why can awork read user data in Microsoft Entra ID? awork can read data in Entra ID and user data to match users by their email address and ensure that only authorized people can set up the integration. This ensures secure account linking and prevents unauthorized access. Why are write permissions needed for the workspace wide Microsoft Calendar Integration for the calendar integration to work? The calendar integration works bidirectionally. Calendar entries are synced from the external calendar to awork. And depending on the calendar settings, planned tasks from awork can also be transferred back to the external calendar. Our users are receiving a permission error message after signing in with their Microsoft account. What can we do? If your users receive an error message after signing in with their Microsoft account when connecting their calendar, they may not have the required permissions to connect the calendar. Please make sure they're allowed to install apps or can request admin consent. To do this, go to the Entra Admin Center to Enterprise Applications Consent and Permissions and make sure either User consent is enabled or that users can request admin consent . If necessary, please contact a Microsoft administrator to set up the permissions correctly.
Working on Multiple Tasks at Once Use the multiple selection feature in task filters and in the list or table view of project tasks to perform certain actions on multiple tasks at the same time. Main
Working on Multiple Tasks at Once Use the multiple selection feature in task filters and in the list or table view of project tasks to perform certain actions on multiple tasks at the same time. Main Benefits and Use Cases Multiple selection is ideal when you don't want to click through repetitive changes one by one. Clean up faster by updating status, due date, or priority for many tasks at once Assign consistently by setting or removing users for multiple tasks Reorganize strategically by moving tasks to other projects or task lists How to Work on Multiple Tasks at Once Select Tasks 1. Open a view or the Tasks tab of a project. 2. Select individual tasks or entire lists using the checkboxes on the left side. Apply an Action to Your Selection 1. At the bottom of your screen, you'll find a floating action bar showing how many tasks are selected (click the X to clear your selection ) 2. Click the action button in the bar (the three horizontal dots) 3. Choose the action you want and apply it to all selected tasks. [!NOTE] Multiple selection is not available on the Dashboard (Home) or in the Board or Timeline view. Available Actions These actions are available when using multiple selection: Add tags : Add one or more tags to all selected tasks. Duplicate tasks : Duplicate the selected tasks. Change task list : Move all selected tasks to a different list. To keep the tasks in the current list as well, optionally uncheck Remove from current lists . Change project : Change the project for all selected tasks. A new task status must be selected since task statuses can vary in the new project. Optionally, you can choose a list to move the tasks to. Change due date : Change the due date for all selected tasks or remove it. Move : Move the start and end dates of the selected tasks or lists. Set priority : Change the priority for all selected tasks. Change status : Change the status of the selected tasks. Set or remove assignee : Change the assignee for all selected tasks or remove them. Change activity : Change the activity for all selected tasks. You can also choose whether the same activity should be changed for all time entries logged to the task. Move to subtask : Convert the task into a subtask. Select the new parent task that the task should be moved under. Delete tasks : Delete the selected tasks. FAQ Where can I select multiple tasks at once? In task filters and in the list view of project tasks. How do I select tasks or entire lists? Using the checkboxes to the left of the task list. You can select individual tasks or entire lists. What permissions do I need for bulk editing? In the list view of a project's tasks, you need edit rights for the tasks in that project. In task filters , any user can edit their own private tasks and project tasks at the same time.
Setting a Task as Recurring Learn how to create and manage recurring tasks to make your work day more efficient. [!IMPORTANT] Recurring tasks are copies of the original task and are only created when
Setting a Task as Recurring Learn how to create and manage recurring tasks to make your work day more efficient. [!IMPORTANT] Recurring tasks are copies of the original task and are only created when the configured recurrence rule is triggered. Key Benefits and Use Cases Recurring tasks are especially useful when you need to do the same thing over and over again: Less manual setup through automatic creation of new tasks More reliability for regular to dos in your daily workflow Clear planning through timeline preview and workload consideration How Recurring Tasks Work When a task is set as recurring, it gets copied from the original task when the rule is triggered and assigned a new due date . [!WARNING] Each copied instance is independent: it can be edited, deleted, and moved separately. Through the recurrence rule settings, you can edit the original task at any time, for example if you want to adjust the name of tasks that will be created in the future. These values are copied from the original task: Name Description Subtasks Files Watchers Assignees List membership (for project tasks only) Tags Activity Priority Planned effort Everything else (like comments or logged time) is not carried over. [!WARNING] Note: Users added to a recurring task later won't be automatically assigned to future recurring tasks. Only assignees from the original task will be assigned repeatedly. The same applies to other settings (like budget adjustments). Making a Task Recurring There are 2 ways to make a task recurring: Click the circular arrow icon in the task detail view Or click the action button in the task detail view and select the option Make task recurring [!IMPORTANT] Recurring tasks are marked with an activated circular arrow icon in task lists and task details. Recurrence Rule Settings Setting up the recurrence rule happens in several steps: Interval: Decide how often the task should be copied (days, weeks, months, years). Start date: Choose when the rule should take effect (default: today). Due date: Set when the task is due, relative to its creation. Configuring the Interval Day(s): Choose which weekdays the task should be created on. Week(s): Decide whether the task should be created every week or at intervals (e.g., every 2 weeks). Month(s): Choose a fixed calendar day or a relative week and weekday for creation. Year(s): Define whether the task should be created every year or at intervals (e.g., every 2 years). Setting the Start Date Rule begins: Choose a date in the Rule begins field from which the rule should take effect. The interval starts from this point. Default value: Today (meaning the interval starts immediately). Alternatives: You can choose any date or select the task's due date as the start point. In this case, the counting only begins with the due date of the current task. Make sure the due date is set in the task. The window below shows the date when the next task will be created. Creation time: The Creation time field sets the time at which the task will be created. By default, this is set to 8:00 AM (local time). Due Date Due after: The due date is specified relative to the task's creation. For example, a task created every four weeks might have a relative due date of seven days after creation. This way it appears every four weeks but doesn't immediately have a due date. The assigned user then has seven days to complete the task. Deleting the Recurrence Rule To mark a task as no longer recurring, click the circular arrow icon in the task details and select Remove . This works both on the original task and on all recurring tasks. [!NOTE] Important: The recurrence rule is automatically deleted as soon as the project status is set to Completed . Recurring Tasks in the Timeline In the timeline, recurring tasks are displayed as a preview for the duration you set in the recurrence rule under Due after . [!WARNING] These entries are just a preview : Tasks can only be edited and moved once they're actually created. When you click on a preview, you'll see the recurrence rule and can jump directly to the original task. Previews only show the next 8 months on a rolling basis. In the workload calculation, recurring tasks are also taken into account, provided the original task (as the basis for follow up tasks) contains planned effort and assigned users. FAQ Are recurring tasks always the same task or new tasks? No, they're copies of the original task. Each instance gets a new due date and can be edited, deleted, and moved independently. How do I edit a recurring task? Edit the original task through the recurrence rule settings. Changes will be applied to all future tasks. How do I remove the recurrence rule? Click the circular arrow icon in the task details and remove the rule. This works on the original task and on all recurring tasks. Why can't I edit the preview in the timeline directly? The timeline entries are just a preview. You can only edit and move tasks once they've actually been created.
Custom Fields Custom Fields are user defined fields in awork where you can store individual information for projects and tasks. They give your team the flexibility to adapt projects and project tasks
Custom Fields Custom Fields are user defined fields in awork where you can store individual information for projects and tasks. They give your team the flexibility to adapt projects and project tasks clearly to your processes. Key benefits and use cases This makes projects not more complicated, but clearer: Capture individual information centrally for projects and tasks Create a unified structure in your team through workspace wide defined fields Get better overview in task lists through columns for custom fields Improve filtering by using custom fields as criteria in task filters How to create custom fields Custom fields are created, edited, and deleted in Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) under Custom Fields . [!WARNING] Important: You need permissions for Project Settings (General Permission Role) to manage custom fields in Settings. 1. Navigate to Settings and select Custom Fields 2. Click + Add under Custom Fields for Projects or Custom Fields for Tasks 3. Enter a Name and choose a Field Type 4. Save the field [!IMPORTANT] After creating them, custom fields for projects are available in every project under Home in the details and can be used. [!WARNING] Custom fields for tasks are created at the workspace level, activated at the project level , and then used in tasks. These field types are available: Text for text input Number for numeric values Date optionally with time Selection optionally with color Link for URLs Checkbox to enable/disable User to select a user in the workspace (including external users) Customer to select a customer [!CAUTION] Important: Field types cannot be changed afterwards. Activate custom fields for tasks in a project In Settings in the main menu Custom Fields : 1. Click the Action button of a field Activate in Projects 2. Select as many projects as you want and confirm with Select In Settings of a project : 1. Click + Add in the Custom Fields for Tasks section 2. Assign the available fields to the project and click Save [!WARNING] Only users with write permissions on project details can activate the fields needed in the project. After activation, the fields are available in the project tasks. Use custom fields in tasks Activated fields appear in tasks as additional details. [!NOTE] Users with write permissions on tasks can fill in the fields. Users with read permissions on tasks can view the fields but cannot edit them. In Task details as additional detail fields As a column in the table view of task lists As a criterion in Task filters In Project templates Manage custom fields Sort custom fields via drag and drop for projects through settings in the main menu for tasks through settings of a project Edit a custom field in the settings in the main menu via the Action menu on the respective field Delete custom fields Option 1: Delete custom fields for tasks from a project 1. Open Project Settings 2. Click the X (Remove) on the field 3. Confirm with Remove Field [!CAUTION] This will delete the field's data from all tasks in the project. Option 2: Delete custom fields workspace wide 1. Open Custom Fields in the main menu Settings 2. Click the Action button on the respective field 3. Select Delete and confirm with Delete Field [!CAUTION] For custom fields for tasks: The field's data will also be deleted from all tasks in the projects where the field is used. For custom fields for projects: The field's data will also be deleted from all projects that use the field. Permissions Create, edit, delete custom fields: Permissions for Project Settings (General Permission Role Settings Project Settings) Activate custom fields for tasks per project: Write permissions for project details Use custom fields in tasks: Write permissions for project tasks to edit; read permissions to view FAQ Why can't I create or manage custom fields? You probably don't have enough permissions. Best to check with a workspace admin. Are custom fields automatically visible in my project? Once custom fields for projects have been created at the workspace level, they are displayed in every project. Custom fields for tasks must be activated at the project level and can then be used in tasks. Can I change the field type afterwards? No. Field types cannot be changed afterwards. Can custom fields be used in automations? No. Custom fields are currently not available for automations.
Filter Create simple filters in seconds or build more complex logic when you need to. Key Benefits and Use Cases Filters help you focus on what matters by narrowing down lists based on specific criter
Filter Create simple filters in seconds or build more complex logic when you need to. Key Benefits and Use Cases Filters help you focus on what matters by narrowing down lists based on specific criteria. Quickly find the right tasks by showing only tasks that are due this week. Find specific tasks across all projects for a particular client. Filter by many criteria like users, teams, and custom fields. Combine conditions to get very specific results. Applying Filters [!IMPORTANT] You can filter in various places in awork, including task filters (saved as Views ) and overview pages for projects, clients, and users . Task Filters in Views Task filters are saved as Views and accessible via Views in the sidebar menu. In the sidebar, you can create new task filters, search for them, organize them, and share them with other users or your entire workspace (with view or edit permissions). Default Filters The first section in the Views sidebar contains your default filters ( New Tasks , My Tasks , Private Tasks ). [!WARNING] Default filters cannot be edited or deleted , but you can collapse the entire section to hide it. New Tasks: Shows all tasks assigned to you in the last 7 days that aren't complete. My Tasks: Shows all tasks assigned to your user. Tasks from projects with the status "Not Started", "Blocked", or "Done" are excluded. Private Tasks: Shows all your private tasks. How to Create a Task Filter (View) Create a task filter from the Views sidebar. It starts as an empty draft that you fill with Quick Filters or the Advanced Filter modal. Creating a New Draft View 1. Navigate to Views in the sidebar menu 2. Click the + button in the Filter section in the Views sidebar 3. Add criteria using Quick Filters or Advanced 1) Click Save in the filter bar at the top right and select Save as New 2) Give the task filter a name and press ENTER or click outside the popup [!CAUTION] The Unsaved Changes indicator with an orange dot shows you that a filter hasn't been saved yet or changes haven't been applied [!NOTE] Once a draft is saved, the filter can be shared and favorited. How to Use Quick Filters Quick Filters are the fastest way to filter data directly on a page. Display as badges in the filter bar Are always linked with AND Advanced criteria display as an "Advanced Filter" badge when they can't be shown as quick filter badges anymore Available options vary depending on the page and may be fewer than in the advanced filter modal Quick filters are available on: Task filters (Views) Project overview User overview Client overview Applying Quick Filters 1. Open a supported overview page (e.g., Projects) or a task filter (View) 2. Click + Filter by 3. Select one or more properties as fields 4. Click outside the popup to apply them 5. See the results immediately Saving a Quick Filter Configuration 1. Make changes until the Unsaved Changes indicator appears 2. Click Save/Load Filter 3. Save the changes in the current filter (if one is loaded) or save as a new one 4. Enter a name and click outside the popup to confirm [!NOTE] Tip: You can add more quick filters anytime by clicking + Filter by again. If you need more complex logic, click Advanced . Loading a Saved Filter on Overview Pages This applies to overview pages for projects, users, and clients. 1. Click Save/Load Filter in the filter bar 2. Select a saved filter from the list Removing a Loaded Filter on Overview Pages To remove a loaded filter on an overview page, click the X button on the far right of the filter bar. [!WARNING] You might see an arrow instead of an X. This means you have local changes to your saved filter and must discard them before you can remove the loaded filter. How to Use Advanced Filters Advanced Filters let you create more complex logic. You can open the modal in any view where filtering is possible, using the Advanced Filter button (if the filter bar is visible). You can: Combine multiple conditions Use AND/OR logic Use operators like Is , Is Not , Contains Group conditions in filter groups Create a filter using AI Creating an Advanced Filter 1. Click Advanced Filter (if the filter bar isn't visible, enable it using the funnel icon at the top right Show Filters ) 2. Click + Add Filter and select or search for a property 3. Enter a value or select an item from the popup 4. Click outside the popup to confirm 5. Adjust the operator (e.g., from Is to Is Not or Contains ) 6. Add as many filters as you want 7. If you have two or more filters in a filter group, switch between AND and OR 8. Click Apply to apply the changes 9. Click Save to update the filter or save it as a new one Using Connectors (AND / OR) Connect segments with: AND All conditions must be met OR At least one condition must be met [!WARNING] You can only use the same connector within a filter group (either only AND or only OR). Using Filter Groups (Parentheses) Group segments in parentheses to control the logic. Example: (Status = "In Progress" OR Status = "Review") AND Assigned to = Me This lets you create complex structures without it getting messy. Building Blocks of Filters (Filter Bar, Segments, and Groups) Filter Bar The filter bar can be shown or hidden using the filter button in the action bar. It's available for task filters and on the overview pages for projects, clients, and users. [!CAUTION] Default filters don't have a filter bar. [!WARNING] If the filter bar isn't visible but the filter icon is blue, a filter is active. The filter bar gives you access to: Add or remove quick filters Open the advanced filter Save changes Discard local changes Filter Segments Every filter consists of segments. [!NOTE] A segment is a single condition: Property Operator Value Examples: Status is "In Progress" Due Date before tomorrow Filter Groups To bundle filters, use filter groups . 1. Click + Add Filter Group 2. Add the filters you want 3. Click the connector to change the connection 4. To delete an entire filter group, hover over the group on the right until a red X appears, and click it Local Changes to a Filter You can make local changes to a filter anytime (even shared filters) when you need a specific configuration. Discard local changes using the rotating arrow icon in the filter bar: Reset Changes Save changes in the filter if you have permission to do so [!WARNING] Changes to a filter aren't saved automatically. If changes are made to a filter, the Unsaved Changes indicator is displayed. Available Filter Options and Operators Available Filter Options Depending on where you use filters, you can filter by: Tasks Projects Users Clients Operators Explained Operators define how a filter works. Common operators are: Is / Is Not Exact match Contains / Does Not Contain Text based comparison Is Set / Is Not Set Checks if a value exists Before / After / Between Date based filters How to Save Filters You can save filters to reuse them later. Available actions: Save a new filter Update an existing filter Duplicate a filter Delete a filter To access saved filters: Open the filter menu Select a filter from your list of saved filters How to Share Task Filters You can share advanced task filters with other users, teams, or your entire workspace. 1. Click the three dot menu on a filter and select Share 2. Add users or teams in the popup and set permissions Permissions include: View Access : Users can only view the filter Manage Access : Users can edit and save the filter (changes apply to everyone with access) How to Use Filters in Dashboard Widgets You can add task filters and project filters as widgets to your dashboard in the Home area. 1. Open Edit Mode and then click + Widget 2. Select List of Projects or List of Tasks 3. Name the widget and select an existing filter or create a new one via + Create Filter Tips and Limitations Start simple with quick filters and then refine Use groups (parentheses) to control complex logic Save filters you use often to save time Use "is not" and "not set" to exclude results Check results before saving FAQ Where can I use quick filters? Quick filters are available in task filters (Views) , the project overview , the user overview , and the client overview . Why is the filter icon blue but I don't see the filter bar? If the filter bar is hidden but the filter icon is blue, it means a filter is active. Can I share every filter with my workspace? Only task filters can be shared with other users, teams, or your entire workspace. What's the difference between archiving and deleting a filter? Archived filters are moved to Archived Filters and can be restored later. Deleted filters can't be restored. Why can't I edit an archived filter? It's not possible to make changes to an archived filter. You need to restore it first. Why do I see no results? The conditions might be too restrictive. Remove one segment at a time and try again. Why can't I edit a segment? Some properties need to be removed and added again to be changed.
Views Views is a dedicated space for your saved task filters. Create views with filters, save them, and open them anytime exactly as you left them. A sidebar keeps everything organized with sections,
Views Views is a dedicated space for your saved task filters. Create views with filters, save them, and open them anytime exactly as you left them. A sidebar keeps everything organized with sections, search, favorites, and archive. Key benefits and use cases Everything in one place Access standard views and all your saved views bundled in one location Always start the same way Your views open every time with the same filters and settings Stay on the same page together Share views with your team so everyone works with the same information Save time and get started right away Skip repetitive filtering and jump straight into work Stay organized effortlessly Keep on top of things by sorting, favoriting, and structuring views in your sidebar Opening views Navigate to views from the main menu Click on Views in the left sidebar. You'll find this menu item at the top of the sidebar, right below Times . If the sidebar is hidden, click the Views button to expand it. Using standard views Every user automatically gets these views: New Tasks My Tasks Private Tasks Favorited views You can save a view as a favorite using the star icon in the top right. When a view (task filter) is marked as a Favorite , it appears in the Favorites section of your Views sidebar. Creating and saving a new filter view 1. Click the + button in the Filter section of your sidebar to create a new view. 2. Set your filters (projects, users, status, due dates, custom fields, etc.) 3. Click Save Sharing a view 1. Open a saved view 2. Click Share 3. Choose users, teams, or your entire workspace 4. Set permissions (Read or Edit) [!IMPORTANT] Tip: Share views with edit permissions if you want to work on them together, or read only to keep everyone on the same page without making changes. Finding views shared with you Under Shared with me you can see all filters that were shared with you, your team, or your workspace. Archiving a view You can archive any view personal or shared to remove it from your sidebar without deleting it or affecting others. 1. Click the action button on a view 2. Select Archive Archived filters appear in the Archived Filters section. The Archive area only shows up if at least one view is archived. [!WARNING] Archived filters cannot be changed while they're archived. Restoring a view Scroll to the Archived section in your sidebar Click the action button on the archived view Select Restore The view returns to its original section [!NOTE] Important things to know about archiving Archiving is personal it only affects your sidebar. Other users won't see any change The person who owns the view is not notified when you archive it Archived views are read only Archived views are still accessible through search and direct URL Archived views cannot be used in dashboard widgets Deleting views 1. Click the three dot menu on a filter 2. Select Delete filter [!CAUTION] Important: Deleted filters cannot be restored. Reordering views in the sidebar You can reorder filters in your Views sidebar using drag and drop. [!WARNING] Standard and archived filters cannot be reordered. Managing views in your sidebar Search views: Find saved views by name Reorder views: Drag and drop views within sections Favorite views: Mark important views for quick access using the star icon in the top right Collapse and expand sections: Keep your sidebar clean and focused Archive a view: Hide a view from your sidebar without deleting it Smart sections: Favorites, Shared with me, and Archived only show up if they contain at least one view Best practices Save filters you use often Save recurring views once and skip the double work Use clear names Pick simple, easy to understand names so everyone knows what each view is about Share strategically Only share views that are actually relevant Favorite your important views Mark your most important views so you can find them quickly anytime Set team standards Create shared views for typical workflows (like daily triage or sprint planning) [!IMPORTANT] Pro tip: Create role based views (for example, for managers or specific teams) to stay focused and cut down on distractions. FAQ Can I share views with my team? Yes. You can share views with individual users, teams, or your entire workspace with read or edit permissions. Can I edit a shared view? Yes, if you have edit permissions. Otherwise, you only have read access. What happens if I change a view that's shared? If you have edit permissions, everyone the view is shared with will see your changes right away once you save them. Can I create private views? Yes. If you don't share a view, it stays visible only to you. Can I organize my views? Yes. You can reorder, favorite, and archive views in your sidebar and collapse or expand sections. Can I create views across multiple projects? Yes create a filter view without project restrictions and it'll show tasks from all your projects. Can I create private tasks directly in the view? Yes. In the "Private Tasks" view, you'll see a placeholder row at the top of the list. Click on it to create a new private task directly in the view.
Tasks in Projects Project tasks are your control center for daily work in your project: Plan work in the Tasks tab of your project Monitor progress and keep track of what's being done Collaborate with
Tasks in Projects Project tasks are your control center for daily work in your project: Plan work in the Tasks tab of your project Monitor progress and keep track of what's being done Collaborate with other users directly on tasks Easily switch views between Tasks , Board , and Timeline How to use tasks in projects Switch views (Tasks, Board, Timeline) 1. Open your project. 2. Choose how to display tasks: Switch to Tasks , Board , or Timeline as needed. [!IMPORTANT] The tasks remain the same in every view, and awork remembers which view you last used for each project. For details on each view, check out these articles: Tasks in Lists Tasks in the Kanban Board Project Planning in the Timeline [!WARNING] There's no task filter available for project tasks. Instead, you can use the search function to filter tasks by user or tags, for example. Open and edit task details In the task details, you add the information your task needs. 1. Click on the task name 2. Edit or add details like description, due date, or assignee Learn more here: All task details. Edit multiple tasks at once If you want to edit several tasks at once, check this out: Edit multiple tasks at once. Reset view You can reset the view to its default settings. This resets the sorting, grouping, and column selection to their original values. 1. Click on the action menu in the top right 2. Select Reset to default The view will then show the default sorting, default grouping, and default columns again. FAQ What views are available for tasks in a project? You can switch between Tasks , Board , and Timeline . Do tasks change when I switch views? No. The tasks stay the same in every view. awork also remembers which view you last used for each project. Are there filter options directly in project tasks? No. However, you can use the search function in your project to search by user or tags, for example, to filter tasks. How do I open the details of a task? Click on the task name. In the details, you can set things like description, due date, and assignee. Learn more here: All task details. Can I edit multiple tasks at once? Yes, select the tasks you want or entire lists using the checkboxes to the left of the task list. You'll find detailed instructions here: Edit multiple tasks at once.
MOCO Integration for Transferring Projects, Time Tracking, and Absences
MOCO Integration for Transferring Projects, Time Tracking, and Absences 💡 This interface is a paid add on. If you'd like to use our MOCO integration, just reach out to us at sales@awork.com. We'd lov
MOCO Integration for Transferring Projects, Time Tracking, and Absences 💡 This interface is a paid add on. If you'd like to use our MOCO integration, just reach out to us at sales@awork.com. We'd love to hear from you! MOCO is agency software that lets you handle your accounting and many other helpful features without stress and paperwork. We offer several integrations for MOCO: 1. Free MOCO integration for invoices 2. Paid MOCO integration for transferring projects and time tracking 3. Free MOCO browser extension for Chrome and Firefox to log time directly in MOCO while you're working in awork General Information The MOCO integration is a paid add on module that enables seamless transfer of projects, time entries, and absences between awork and MOCO . This keeps all relevant data centrally available and supports your workflow efficiently. In this article, you'll learn how to set up the integration and what features it offers. What features does the integration offer? Projects Synchronize new projects from MOCO to awork Use project templates from awork Transfer existing projects from awork to MOCO Time Tracking Automatic transfer of all time entries, no manual follow up needed Option to start the transfer from a specific point in time Ability to distinguish between billable and non billable time Absences Only new or changed absences are synchronized from MOCO to awork No synchronization in the other direction (awork to MOCO) How does the integration work technically? 1. Project Creation: The project is created in MOCO and tagged with "Sync to awork" . The interface automatically creates the project in awork. The following data is transferred: Project number Project name Start and end date Client (is created or selected and assigned to the project) Project manager and project members are synchronized to awork by default. 2. Tasks from Service Items: For each service item from the MOCO project, a task is created in the "MOCO" list in awork. 3. Time Tracking: A time entry is created in awork on the linked project. If the time was logged on a task that originated from a MOCO service item, the time is assigned directly. If direct assignment isn't possible, the time entry is matched based on the activity name and the MOCO position name. If no match is found, a new service item called "Unassigned Time Entry" is created in MOCO and the time is assigned there. Subtasks are assigned to the same MOCO service item as the main task. The user from MOCO and awork is matched via email address. Important: The email address in awork must be set as a business email under Account Settings (click on your profile picture in the top right) Edit User Contact . Admins can also update the email for other users under Users in the left navigation bar. Information about whether the time is billable or non billable is carried over. Time entries can be changed or deleted in awork after the fact. These adjustments are also transferred to MOCO. Time Tracking Modes: Task Lists vs. Tasks There are two supported modes for synchronizing time tracking between MOCO and awork: 1. Time tracking via task lists (recommended) 2. Time tracking via tasks Each mode determines how service items and logged time are mapped between the systems. 1. Time Tracking via Task Lists (Recommended) A separate task list is created in awork for each service item. Tasks are not automatically created. Users can manually create tasks or subtasks within the generated task lists. Reusing existing task lists: If the project template already contains task lists with identical names, these existing task lists are reused and tasks are assigned to the matching existing lists instead of creating duplicates. Time entry assignment: All time logged within the corresponding task list is assigned to the linked service item, including time on tasks and subtasks. Assignment logic: MOCO service item = task list in awork. Time logged on tasks/subtasks = assignment to the corresponding service item. [!NOTE] This mode is recommended because it offers: More flexibility in task organization Better compatibility with project templates Clearer project structures Simpler manual task management 2. Time Tracking via Tasks A list called "MOCO" is automatically created in awork. Within this list, a separate task is created for each MOCO service item. Time entry assignment: Time logged directly on these created tasks is synchronized back to the corresponding service item. The assignment happens directly via the task created from the service item or via the linked awork activity. Assignment logic: MOCO service item = task within the "MOCO" list in awork. Time logged on task or activity = transfer to the corresponding service item. How do I set up the integration? Step 1: Create an API Key in MOCO In your MOCO account: Settings (gear icon in the top right) Extensions API and Webhooks Create a new API key with: A name (e.g., "awork") Full access , unlimited validity Copy the key and store it securely 2. Create Custom Fields in MOCO To ensure the transfer works correctly, custom fields must be set up in MOCO: 1. Go to Settings (gear icon in the top right) Custom Fields . 2. Create the following fields: awork Project (Type: Link) Sync to awork (Type: Yes/No) awork Project Template (Type: Single Select). Add template names as described above. 3. When creating each field, select Project in the second row. 4. Pay attention to uppercase and lowercase letters. 5. Save the fields. 3. Activate the Integration in awork Now contact our support team and ask them to enable the MOCO interface in awork for you. Send them the API key you just created and your MOCO subdomain . We need both to configure the interface. [!NOTE] Please let the team know how you'd like the following details configured: 1. Synchronization of absences from MOCO to awork: Yes/No 2. Time tracking via task lists or via tasks 3. Time entries from a specific point in time onwards 4. First Test 1. Create a project: Create a new project in MOCO and enable the Sync to awork field. Save the project. 2. Check the transfer: Verify in awork that the project was transferred correctly. Additional Optional Integration Settings The following optional settings can be configured: [!NOTE] Ignore non plannable absences: Decide whether non plannable MOCO absences should be excluded from synchronization Disable MOCO controlled updates of awork project data: Prevents changes from MOCO from overwriting existing project data in awork (including project budget and project description) Or only disable updates to awork project descriptions: allows project data to continue syncing while preserving existing awork project descriptions to avoid text overwrites Remove MOCO ID prefix from awork project names: ensures more consistent naming in your workspace ("Project Name" instead of "P1234 Project Name") Update project budget from planned durations: calculates the awork project budget based on the total planned durations of tasks and task lists Disable project member updates during project updates Or never transfer project members: completely disables synchronization of project members between MOCO and awork Please let us know which options you'd like us to enable for your workspace. Project Creation in awork with Templates 1. Create a custom field: Go to Settings (gear icon in the top right) in MOCO and create a custom field named "awork Project Template" as type "Single Select". 2. Add templates: Add the templates you want to use in MOCO/awork to the single select options. Important: Make sure there are no spaces before or after the comma. 3. Use template: The selected template is automatically used for project creation in awork. [!IMPORTANT] If you'd like no template to be preselected by default , or if users should be able to create a project completely without a template , then add a comma at the beginning, right before the project template names in the awork Project Template field. Important Notes User permissions in both systems: Check that user permissions are correctly set in both systems and that the user is assigned to the respective projects. This must be identical in awork and MOCO. In MOCO, the user needs full access to projects and must be added as a "person for time tracking" to the project. Transfer existing MOCO projects to awork: If you want to create existing MOCO projects in awork, simply activate Sync to awork retroactively. The project will then be created in awork. Custom subdomain: If you change your awork domain after activating the MOCO integration, please contact support so we can update the domain for the integration. Transfer existing awork projects to MOCO: If you want to retroactively transfer existing awork projects to MOCO, create a MOCO project, add the corresponding link to the awork project, and then activate Sync to awork . [!CAUTION] Project linking is only possible once . Already used awork project links cannot be inserted into another MOCO project. This will cause synchronization errors. Canceling the MOCO Integration You cannot cancel the MOCO integration yourself in awork. Please contact our support team at support@awork.com to do this. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) What does the integration cost? We charge a flat rate of 50 euros per month for the integration. The minimum contract term and cancellation period for this add on are based on your current plan's terms. Is the task title in awork transferred to the time entry description in MOCO? Yes, the task name can be transferred to the notes field of the time entry in MOCO. Just let our support team know when activating the integration if you'd like to use this feature. The feature can also be enabled later. Can a task in awork be renamed or will time entries no longer be assigned afterwards? Time entry assignment continues to work even if a task is renamed. Are changes to time entries in awork also updated in MOCO? Yes, duration and notes of a time entry are transferred to MOCO when you make changes in awork. Will time entries be synchronized again from awork to MOCO if the time entries were already manually transferred to MOCO and the integration is activated afterwards? Yes, the time entries would be transferred again, but you can define a point in time from which the transfer of time entries should begin. Inform our support team about this point in time when the interface is activated. Is it possible for changes to projects in MOCO to be synchronized to awork even after the initial project creation? Subsequent transfer occurs only for newly created service items and project members specified in MOCO. To trigger synchronization, the project name must be edited (for example, by adding a space at the end). If time entries are edited or deleted in MOCO, are they also edited or deleted in awork? If a time entry is edited or deleted in MOCO, no synchronization occurs with awork. Conversely, if you change or delete a time entry in awork, it is updated or deleted in MOCO as well. If a project is deleted in MOCO, is the project in awork also deleted? No, deleting a project in MOCO has no effect on the project in awork. The project in awork will not be deleted. Can time entries be synchronized from MOCO to awork? Time entries are only transferred from awork to MOCO, not the other way around. Is the budget of tasks created in MOCO also transferred to awork? The budget is not transferred directly from MOCO to awork. MOCO uses a monetary budget, while awork uses a time based budget. The planned effort of a task in awork, however, is based on the budget of a MOCO service item and the hourly rate stored in MOCO. (Formula: MOCO budget / MOCO hourly rate = awork planned effort) If no budget is set for the service item, the integration uses the budget of the MOCO project. Is the service item description from MOCO transferred to the description field in awork? Yes, that's possible. The description should be transferred here. Can the transfer of project members from MOCO to awork be disabled? Yes, project member transfer can be disabled either only for existing projects or completely when creating new projects. Please contact support so we can configure the interface accordingly. I already created a project in MOCO that was transferred to awork. Can I create a new awork project from this project? The projects are automatically linked. If you want to remove the link, you can deactivate the sync checkbox in MOCO. If you want to create a new awork project from the MOCO project, proceed as follows: Edit the project in MOCO and delete the awork link In the link field, enter the following text: <https://recreate Once you save the project in MOCO, a new project will be created in awork Can I change the link later and link an awork project to a different MOCO project? No, an awork project can only be linked to one MOCO project. For example, if a MOCO project is archived, the awork project cannot be linked to another MOCO project. The original link remains.
Integrationen für Abrechnung & Agentursoftware
Exporting Tasks Here's how you export tasks from awork: as an Excel file (.xlsx) for further processing or the Timeline as an image ( png or svg ). [!IMPORTANT] After a successful export, you'll recei
Exporting Tasks Here's how you export tasks from awork: as an Excel file (.xlsx) for further processing or the Timeline as an image ( png or svg ). [!IMPORTANT] After a successful export, you'll receive a notification in awork with a link to download your file. Main benefits and use cases Exports are handy when you want to use tasks outside of awork: Process tasks further Download tasks from a project or task filter as .xlsx Share your timeline Export the timeline as an image and send it to clients or include it in presentations, for example How to export tasks as an Excel file In a project, you can export tasks in list view , table view , or board view . 1. Open the project and switch to the view you want ( Tasks , Board , or Timeline ). 2. Click the action button in the top right below the header. 3. Select Export tasks . Exporting a view 1. Open Views in the main menu 2. Choose a standard view or a filter you've created. 3. Click the action button in the top right below the header. 4. Select Export . Exporting the Timeline as an image You can export and download the entire timeline in png or svg format . 1. Open the Timeline in your project. 2. Click the action button in the top right below the header. 3. Select Export as SVG or Export as PNG . [!IMPORTANT] The export includes all displayed tasks as well as the entire time range of those tasks plus one week at the start and end. Your complete view settings are preserved (for example, zoom level, language, dark mode). FAQ Which tasks can I export? You can download all tasks from a project or task filter in Excel format ( .xlsx ). Where do I find the download link after exporting? After a successful export, you'll get a notification in awork with a link to download your file. What formats can I use to export the Timeline as an image? You can export the entire timeline as png or svg . What's included in the Timeline image export? The export includes all displayed tasks as well as the entire time range of those tasks plus one week at the start and end. Your view settings are also preserved (for example, zoom level, language, dark mode).
Integrating Invoicing Tools By integrating an invoicing tool, you can transfer time entries recorded in awork directly to invoices in the integrated tool. In this article, you'll learn how it works. [
Integrating Invoicing Tools By integrating an invoicing tool, you can transfer time entries recorded in awork directly to invoices in the integrated tool. In this article, you'll learn how it works. [!WARNING] 🔐 Available from the Professional Plan onwards. awork supports the following integrations: sevDesk Lexware Office HQ Easybill MOCO bexio Xero Setting up a new integration To set up a new integration, go to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Integrations in awork. Open the integration library and select the appropriate tool in the Invoicing Tools section. You can also start setting up the integration directly from the time reports if no invoicing tool is integrated yet. Simply click on the dollar icon in the top right and select Generate Invoice . sevDesk awork users get 60% off for the first 12 months with sevdesk click here to redeem it. A window will open where you need to enter the API Key from sevDesk . After you've copied the API Key into the field, click Save and the integration is set up. You can find the API Token in sevDesk under Extensions / Integrations . From there, you can copy it and paste it into awork. Here you'll learn how to bill time from awork using the Sevdesk integration (create invoices). Lexware Office When you start the Lexware Office integration from awork, you'll be redirected to Lexware Office and need to log in with your Lexware username and password. You'll then be directed back to awork and can use the integration right away. The integration remains valid until the authorization is removed or blocked in Lexware Office. Here you'll learn how to bill time from awork using the Lexware Office integration (create invoices). HQ A window will open where you need to enter the API Key from HQ . After you've copied the API Key into the field, click Save and the integration is set up. You can find the API Token in HQ under Admin API Clients . From there, you can copy it and paste it into awork. Here you'll learn how to bill time from awork using the HQ integration (create invoices). Easybill A window will open where you need to enter the API Key from Easybill. After you've copied the API Key into the field, click Save and the integration is set up. You can find the API Token in Easybill under Profile Profile & Settings Api Key . From there, you can copy it and paste it into awork. Here you'll learn how to bill time from awork using the Easybill integration (create invoices). MOCO A window will open where you need to enter your MOCO subdomain (for example, your subdomain.mocoapp.com) and the API Key from MOCO. 💡 You can find the API Key in MOCO under: Profile Integrations Personal API Key. From there, you can copy it and paste it into awork. After you've entered all the information into the fields, click "Save" and the integration is set up. Here you'll learn how to bill time from awork using the MOCO integration (create invoices). bexio awork users get 40% off their first year with bexio 🎉 💡 Use the promotion code awork40 when signing up with bexio or click here . You can also start setting up the integration directly from the time reports if no invoicing tool is integrated yet. Simply click on the dollar icon in the top right and select Generate Invoice . When you start the bexio integration from awork, you'll be redirected to bexio and need to log in with your bexio username and password. You'll then be directed back to awork and can use the integration right away. Here you'll learn how to bill time from awork using the bexio integration (create invoices). Xero A window will open where you can start the connection process with Xero. Click on Connect with Xero . You'll be redirected to the Xero website, where you can log in and allow awork to access your Xero account. After successful authorization, you'll be redirected back to awork and the integration is set up. Xero uses OAuth 2.0 for authentication. This means that when you connect awork with Xero, you'll be redirected to Xero's login/authorization page, where you log in and grant awork the appropriate permissions. Here you'll learn how to bill time from awork using the Xero integration (create invoices).
awork AI - Your Smart Project Assistant (Beta)
awork AI Your Smart Project Assistant (Beta) awork AI is an integrated project assistant controlled through natural language (prompts). It delivers context aware support for projects, tasks, time trac
awork AI Your Smart Project Assistant (Beta) awork AI is an integrated project assistant controlled through natural language (prompts). It delivers context aware support for projects, tasks, time tracking, docs and more , so you can get answers, take action, and create content without leaving your workflow. You can use awork AI wherever you see the awork AI button in the floating toolbar, in project view, or via keyboard shortcut. The assistant understands what you have open and gives you relevant, tailored answers. Key benefits and use cases Get your work done faster and smarter: Answer questions with context like about your current project or a specific task. Execute actions directly such as creating or editing projects and tasks. Generate summaries and content for projects, status updates, reports, or docs. View, edit, and summarize time entries without clicking through menus. Display info about people and workload with simple prompts. Search awork documentation and help articles directly within AI. Brainstorm, plan, and refine ideas with built in creativity and text features. How to use awork AI Open the assistant Click the awork AI button in the floating menu at the bottom center. Or use keyboard shortcuts : Mac: Windows: Or click awork AI in the project task overview (top right) to work directly with project content. To close, press Esc or click Close in the top right. Choose a display mode Popup mode Appears over the floating toolbar. Enter prompts at the top, get answers below. Collapse or expand as needed. Sidebar mode Opens on the right across the full height. Can be pinned so the assistant stays open alongside your workflow. Manage conversations 1. Enter your prompt awork AI responds in the same thread. 2. Use History (at the top) to reopen or continue earlier conversations. 3. Click New (start a new conversation) or use the shortcut to start fresh. Working with context awork AI understands the context of your screen . Phrases like "current project" or "this task" are interpreted based on what you have open. [!NOTE] Important: AI only sees information you have permission to access. What awork AI can do Projects Create and edit projects Assign members Change status Create project summaries Tasks Create, edit, reassign Change task status Reorder, mark as done Time tracking View recorded time Display sums and aggregates Edit entries People and workload Show user info, absences, and workload Docs Search, read, edit, translate Add content and ideas Create new docs Files Summarize project files or extract information from them Help Center Answer "how to" questions using help articles directly General AI features Brainstorming Writing and content enrichment Project planning Bulk actions Before larger or extensive changes, AI asks for confirmation before executing the action. Known limitations Copying or duplicating projects may not work correctly. Distributing tasks across lists may stop mid process. Inviting users to the workspace or via Connect is not possible. You cannot invite users via AI. You cannot create custom fields via AI. AI can occasionally make mistakes always verify important results. [!WARNING] Important: As a beta feature, awork AI may provide inaccurate or incomplete suggestions. Please review results before using them. Tips for best results Make prompts as specific as possible rather than very general requests. Carefully check all generated content before you use or apply it. Use awork AI as a starting point not as a final decision maker. Rate answers with 👍 / 👎 to help improve the system. Try the example prompts shown at the bottom of the popup. Compliance and security Important: awork AI is fully GDPR compliant, hosted in the EU, and meets transparency requirements of the EU AI Act. It does not use customer data for training and respects permissions AI only sees what you're allowed to see. FAQ What is awork AI? awork AI is a smart project assistant that helps you create, improve, and work faster with project content directly in awork. Does awork AI work automatically in the background? No. awork AI only makes suggestions when you actively ask for them and never makes changes on its own. Can I edit AI generated content? Yes. All AI results are fully editable you can adjust them, regenerate them, or discard them. Is awork AI included in my plan? During the beta phase, awork AI is available in all plans. Can I disable AI features in my workspace? Yes. Admins can completely disable awork AI under Settings General. Who can read my AI chats? Only you can read your AI conversations. Admins cannot see or access AI chats from other users.
Creating Tasks from Emails You can convert emails into tasks by forwarding them to a unique email address . These addresses exist for both projects and individual users . Main Benefits and Use Cases T
Creating Tasks from Emails You can convert emails into tasks by forwarding them to a unique email address . These addresses exist for both projects and individual users . Main Benefits and Use Cases This helps you organize processes efficiently, for example: Invoice approvals by forwarding invoices to a central project Handling customer inquiries for things like regular social media posts Processing applicants in a structured way Collecting feedback and bugs for software products How Email Based Task Creation Works Creating a Task in a Project via Email 1. Open your desired project and go to Settings . 2. In the Create Tasks via Email section, copy the email address for this project . 3. Select the task list where emails should be converted into tasks . 4. Forward the email to this address. Creating a Private Task via Email 1. Open your Account Settings . 2. In the Create Tasks via Email section, copy the email address for your private tasks . 3. Forward the desired email to this address. Information Extracted from the Email The following information is transferred from the email to the task: <table style="min width: 50px;" <colgroup <col style="min width: 25px;" <col style="min width: 25px;" </colgroup <tbody <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong Email</strong </p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p <strong awork</strong </p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Recipient</p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Assignee</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Subject</p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Task name</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Tag in tag format in subject</p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Task tag</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Email content</p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Task description</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Attachments</p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Task attachments<br (up to 30 MB per email)</p </td </tr <tr <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p CC recipients</p </td <td colspan="1" rowspan="1" <p Followers</p </td </tr </tbody </table [!NOTE] If there are multiple recipients, the first one besides the awork email address is selected. If awork can match this user, they will be set as the assignee of the task. Automating Email Tasks In your Project Settings , you can set up automations for tasks created from emails. This lets you automatically perform additional actions on email based tasks, such as: 1. Set assignees 2. Add tags 3. Change the status 4. Add a due date Tips and Hints Keep an eye on the task type , since it's set automatically based on your most recently used type or the top one in the list. [!IMPORTANT] You cannot select the task type when creating from an email: The default is the most recently used task type for the respective user in that project . Alternatively, the task type at the top of your activity list will be selected automatically. You can edit the task type after creation. Use HTML emails , as only these can be correctly converted into tasks Permission check : Creating tasks via email is done anonymously without permission verification. Users without write permissions can also create tasks. Use vCard for your address book [!NOTE] Next to the email address stored in your Project or Account Settings, you'll find the option to download vCard . This lets you quickly save the email address in your address book and forward emails faster. FAQ Where can I find the email address for a project? You'll find the project email address for task creation in your Project Settings . Where can I find the email address for private tasks? You'll find the email address for creating private tasks in your Account Settings . Why can't I select the task type when creating from an email? When creating from an email, the task type is preset: the default is the most recently used task type for the respective user in that project. Alternatively, the task type at the top of your activities list will be used. You can edit the task type after creation. Which email formats are supported? Only HTML emails can be correctly converted into tasks. If your email program is sending RTF instead of HTML, you can change that setting. Are email attachments included? Attachments are included as task attachments (up to 30 MB per email ).
sitebrunch Integration sitebrunch combines Accessibility Center and UX Center in one platform. Thanks to the browser extension, you can apply all features directly on your website. Key benefits and us
sitebrunch Integration sitebrunch combines Accessibility Center and UX Center in one platform. Thanks to the browser extension, you can apply all features directly on your website. Key benefits and use cases Holistic: Combines Accessibility Center & UX Center in one tool from compliance to performance Legally compliant & inclusive: continuous automated WCAG checks (including monitoring) & manual review catalogs according to WCAG 2.2 AA (EN 301 549) Analytics and dashboards: Individually configurable interface, comments and task distribution via browser extension Live click heatmaps to visualize user activity User flows: Display of the three most common user paths Marketing tracking: UTM campaign tracking for measuring marketing success Direct comment function for elements including integration with all common project management tools such as "awork" How sitebrunch integration works 1. Create an account: Create a sitebrunch account via the sitebrunch website or the awork integration library. [!IMPORTANT] With the promo code AWORK you get 50% off for the first 3 months. 1. Create your first project: Click the gray plus icon and enter the URL of the website you want to analyze. 2. Activate awork integration: Open the project menu in sitebrunch and click integrate awork . Sign in to awork, select a workspace if needed and agree to the privacy policy. Activate the integration in the pop up in sitebrunch. Select a default project and set the status and type of work. 3. Install Chrome extension: Download the sitebrunch Chrome extension from the Chrome Web Store. 👉🏼 <u Go directly to the store</u 1) Create comments & sync tasks: Open the website stored in sitebrunch and activate the extension. Click the comment icon and create your comment. Select that this comment should be created as a ticket in awork. After saving, the comment will automatically be created as a task in the predefined awork project. 2) Unlock advanced features: To use all of sitebrunch's analysis functions, add the code snippet from your sitebrunch project to the section of your website (example with dummy data): [!NOTE] Once the snippet is embedded, you'll automatically get a 30 day trial period. Tips and best practices You decide with each comment whether an awork task should be created Comments can be exported and then imported into awork When you create a task, you can give it a name, the comment can be used as the task description and a current screenshot is automatically attached FAQ What is sitebrunch? sitebrunch is an all in one agency software for digital accessibility and user experience. With sitebrunch, you make your website accessible, user friendly and future proof all in one software. What does the sitebrunch integration in awork do? When reviewing a website, you can create a comment that automatically appears as a task in a predefined awork project. Does every comment need to be created as a task in awork? No. With each comment, you can individually decide whether a task should be created in awork or not. What gets transferred to the task in awork? When a task is created, you can give it a name, use the comment as the task description and a current screenshot of the website is automatically added as an attachment. Can I also get comments to awork without direct integration? Yes. Comments can be exported and then imported into awork without direct integration. Is there a discount for new users? Yes, with the promo code AWORK you get 50% off for the first 3 months.
Integrationen für Workflows & Produktivität
easyJOB Integration with awork easyJOB is a versatile ERP solution for agencies and service providers in project business. From estimation through project management to billing and controlling easyJOB
easyJOB Integration with awork easyJOB is a versatile ERP solution for agencies and service providers in project business. From estimation through project management to billing and controlling easyJOB bundles your data, delivers reports, and can be integrated via interfaces like a RESTful API. With the easyJOB integration , you synchronize the management of your projects and tasks between easyJOB and awork. Mark in easyJOB what should go to awork, and the systems automatically exchange the relevant data. Main benefits and use cases If you use easyJOB for project planning and awork for task management and time tracking, the integration connects both tools seamlessly. Less manual work through automatic synchronization Clear project overview through consistent data in both systems Project structure and tasks in sync (e.g., service items → tasks) Times automatically sent back to easyJOB for billing and project monitoring How to use the easyJOB integration with awork The integration follows a clear workflow: you mark in easyJOB what should be synchronized. In awork, this creates a project including tasks, and recorded times flow back. Synchronizing jobs from easyJOB to awork 1. Mark a job in easyJOB using the custom field "Sync to awork". This automatically synchronizes the job with awork. 2. Check the automatically created project in awork. Important data is transferred: Job number and name from easyJOB → Project name in awork Customer/Product from easyJOB → Customer field in awork Start and end date of the job from easyJOB → Start and end date in awork Service items from easyJOB → Tasks in awork 3. Each service item in easyJOB is created as a task in awork. Continue working with the tasks in awork (e.g., break down tasks or add additional subtasks) Recording times in awork and syncing back to easyJOB 1. Record times in awork on the tasks 2. The recorded times are automatically synchronized to easyJOB 3. In easyJOB, the times are transferred to the respective service item Typical workflows The integration is customizable. Here are typical usage patterns from practice: Example: Creative agency Jobs are marked in easyJOB and automatically created as projects in awork. This keeps task management and time tracking in awork clear and organized. Project creation : Jobs from easyJOB are automatically synchronized to awork. Job number and name are taken as the project name, the customer field is synchronized Task management : Service items are created as tasks and further structured in awork Time tracking : Times from awork are transferred back to easyJOB and assigned to service items Example: Full service agency Here, the focus is on synchronizing project structure and time tracking, plus user matching via email. User synchronization : Employees are automatically matched based on the email address stored in both systems Project setup : During synchronization, a template from awork is loaded; planned hours from easyJOB are taken as target hours in awork Time reconciliation : Recorded times in awork are automatically assigned to matching service items in easyJOB; if this isn't possible, there's a process for "Unassigned time entries" Example: Event agency The agency works with structured task list management: service groups from easyJOB are mapped as task lists in awork. Task lists : Service groups in easyJOB are taken as task lists in awork, tasks are created automatically Flexibility with tasks : Tasks can be edited, added, or deleted in awork while keeping the structure intact Time tracking : Times from awork are linked with service lines in easyJOB; if no assignment is possible, a special service line is created [!WARNING] Make sure the email address is stored in both systems. Setting up the easyJOB integration [!NOTE] To use the easyJOB integration in awork, you need a valid license for both systems . The setup is done together with our team so the integration is clean and tailored to your requirements. For technical configuration, we offer a special onboarding package that guides you step by step through the entire process. If you want to use the easyJOB integration, get in touch with us at sales@awork.com. FAQ What is easyJOB? easyJOB is an ERP solution for agencies and service providers in project business. It supports the value chain from estimation through project management to billing and controlling, and provides detailed reports. What data is synchronized from easyJOB to awork? When a job in easyJOB is marked with "Sync to awork" , awork creates a project and takes over, among other things, the job number and name (as project name), customer/product (into the customer field), start and end date, and service items (as tasks). How does time synchronization between awork and easyJOB work? Times you record in awork are automatically synchronized to easyJOB and transferred to the respective service item there. Do I need licenses for both systems? Yes. To use the easyJOB integration in awork, you need a valid license for both systems. How can I get the easyJOB integration and have it set up? The setup is done together with our team. For technical configuration, there's a special onboarding package. Just write to us at sales@awork.com.
Raycast Integration <u Raycast</u is a versatile launcher for macOS that lets you quickly access important features of your favorite tools with just a keyboard shortcut. Key Benefits and Use Cases Con
Raycast Integration <u Raycast</u is a versatile launcher for macOS that lets you quickly access important features of your favorite tools with just a keyboard shortcut. Key Benefits and Use Cases Control awork via Raycast and save time Log time directly in Raycast for projects or tasks Automate recurring workflows with custom commands Raycast also supports many other tools like Slack, Notion, and Spotify, and offers helpful features like clipboard history, window management, and the ability to create your own scripts. How the Raycast Integration for awork Works To set up the integration, follow these steps: 1. Add an API Client in awork: Go to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Integrations API Clients [!NOTE] Note: Admin rights required. 1. Create a new API Client: Fill in the following information: Name: awork Integration for Raycast Client ID: Your choice, e.g. raycast YourCompanyName extension Redirect URI: 2. Save your Client Secret: A Client Secret will be generated. Save it securely. 3. Install the Raycast extension: Download the awork extension from the Raycast Store. 4. Enter your credentials: Enter your Client ID and Client Secret. 5. Complete the login: Log in on the awork page that appears. After logging in, you'll be automatically redirected back to Raycast. The integration is now active. Useful awork Commands in Raycast Projects Find projects: Filter by project or client name Open in browser: Press ⏎ Copy to clipboard: Press ⌘⏎ Copy project email address: Press ⌃E Log time: Press ⌃⌘⏎ Show tasks: Press ⌃Space Tasks Search tasks: Optionally filter by project Open in browser: Press ⏎ Copy to clipboard: Press ⌘⏎ Copy task ID: Press ⌃I Log time: Press ⌃⌘⏎ Log Time Log work hours directly in Raycast for either a project or a task Confirm: Press ⌘⏎ to complete your entry FAQ What is Raycast? Raycast is a versatile launcher for macOS that lets you quickly access features of your tools with a keyboard shortcut. What can I do with the Raycast integration for awork? You can search and view projects and tasks, log time for projects or tasks, and automate recurring workflows with custom commands. What rights do I need to set up the integration? You need admin rights to add an API Client in awork. What credentials do I need to enter in Raycast? You need to enter your Client ID and Client Secret in Raycast and complete the login on the awork page that appears. What Redirect URI should I use for the API Client? Use as your Redirect URI.
MOCO Browser Extension The MOCO plugin is the perfect extension to effortlessly track your time and manage projects efficiently while using awork. Main Benefits and Use Cases Stress Free Work: MOCO is
MOCO Browser Extension The MOCO plugin is the perfect extension to effortlessly track your time and manage projects efficiently while using awork. Main Benefits and Use Cases Stress Free Work: MOCO is agency software that lets you handle your accounting alongside many other helpful features without stress and paperwork. Real Time Time Tracking: Track your work hours directly in MOCO while you're in awork. How to Set Up the MOCO Extension 1. Install the MOCO plugin: Chrome: MOCO Time Tracking Firefox: MOCO Time Tracking 2. Open the MOCO Time Tracking plugin. 3. Enter your sub domain and API key. You can find this information in MOCO under Profile Integrations Personal API Key Profile Integrations URL to Display Planning in External Calendar 4. Refresh awork. 5. Click on a task in awork; the MOCO extension will appear in the bottom right. When you click on the MOCO extension, the task name is automatically entered in the comment field, and you can select the activity. [!WARNING] The extension remembers the activity you selected for this task and automatically displays it the next time you log your time. Best Practices Time Monitoring: The extension recognizes how much time you've already logged for the task and displays it to you. Settings: Make sure all activities are set up in your MOCO account. FAQ Does the MOCO Extension Work in Every Browser? The MOCO extension is available for Chrome and Firefox .
awork Community Connect with other awork users, share product feedback with us, and discover all the different ways you can use awork. Head to the Community [!IMPORTANT] The language of our awork Comm
awork Community Connect with other awork users, share product feedback with us, and discover all the different ways you can use awork. Head to the Community [!IMPORTANT] The language of our awork Community is German. The Developer Forum is exclusively in English. Key Benefits and Use Cases Inspiration: Let's build an inspiring and supportive community together to get the most out of awork! Exchange: Ask questions and share valuable tips with other users. Stay Updated: Keep up to speed with news, webinars, and events. Sign Up for the Community Log in with your awork credentials. [!IMPORTANT] Users with an awork account can log in, ask questions, and connect with others. If you don't have an awork account yet, you'll only have read access for now. Community Structure Categories: Getting Started: Information on how to use our Community Help, Tips and Use Cases: Supportive discussions about specific use cases Webinars, Podcasts and Events: Stay informed News: Latest updates from the Community Product Feedback: Share your feedback directly with us Developer Forum: Discuss technical topics Change the Interface Language You can change the interface language, but not everything will always be translated. 1. Log in. 2. Click your profile picture in the top right. 3. Click your profile in the bottom right. 4. Go to Settings . 5. Click Interface in the top right. 6. Select a different interface language . 7. Scroll down and click Save changes . FAQ How do I get to the awork Community? You can head to the awork Community using this link or by clicking the question mark icon in the bottom left of the main menu. What languages are supported? The language of our awork Community is German. The Developer Forum is exclusively in English. You can change the interface language. However, not everything can be translated at the moment. What can I do if I don't have an account? Only users with an awork account can log in. If you haven't created an awork account yet, you'll have read only access in the Community.
Personio Integration The Personio integration is available starting with the Professional plan. Here's how the integration from awork to Personio works and what it can do for you. Key Benefits and Use
Personio Integration The Personio integration is available starting with the Professional plan. Here's how the integration from awork to Personio works and what it can do for you. Key Benefits and Use Cases Automatic Absence Transfers : Absences are automatically transferred from Personio to awork. Hourly Synchronization : Changes in Personio appear in awork with a maximum delay of 1 hour. Past and Future Transfers : Absences are transferred up to 14 days in the past and up to 365 days in the future. How the Personio Integration Works 1. Navigate to Personio : Log in to your Personio account. 2. Open Settings : Click on Settings in the bottom left and then go to the Marketplace . 3. Search for awork : Search for awork and select it. 4. Connect : Click on Connect . 5. Generate API Credential : Generate a new API credential, give it a name, and click Go to awork . 6. Enter in awork : You'll be redirected to awork, where you can enter your API credentials. 7. Settings in awork : Go to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Integrations and open the Integration Library . 8. Select Personio : Select Personio and click Set up Integration . 9. Copy IDs : Copy the Client ID and Client Secret from Personio and paste them in the awork window. 10. Save : Click Save to set up the integration. [!NOTE] Note: If "Hide absence details in awork" is active, no absence types or notes will be transferred. You'll then see a window showing the matched users (based on their email address in both tools). Check the email addresses if unexpected users appear in the list of unmatched users. Notes Matching is done using the account email address. This must be the same in Personio and awork. Absences that come from Personio cannot be edited or deleted in awork. They're marked accordingly with the Personio icon. You can, however, manually create and edit absences in awork. Important: Holidays are NOT transferred from Personio to awork. FAQ What happens if I transfer an absence outside the 14 day window? Absences that start or end outside this timeframe are still transferred as long as they end or start within the 14 day period. How often does synchronization occur? Synchronization between Personio and awork happens hourly. What should I do if I see users in the list of unmatched users? Check the email addresses of the users in both tools. Can I edit absences in awork? Absences that come from Personio cannot be edited or deleted in awork.
Cancelling your awork subscription Here's how to cancel your awork subscription quickly and easily. [!WARNING] With admin permissions, you can cancel your subscription anytime on your own. The cancell
Cancelling your awork subscription Here's how to cancel your awork subscription quickly and easily. [!WARNING] With admin permissions, you can cancel your subscription anytime on your own. The cancellation takes effect directly in your account and applies at the end of your current billing cycle. You'll receive a confirmation email after cancelling. How does cancelling awork work? 1. Open Settings in your awork workspace (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu). 2. Select Subscription . 3. Click the Manage subscription button. 4. Then click Options . 5. Click Cancel subscription . 6. Confirm your cancellation. FAQ Who can cancel the subscription? Only admins of an awork account can process a cancellation. Will I get a cancellation confirmation? Yes after you cancel, you'll receive a confirmation email. Can I cancel my annual subscription early? You can cancel your annual subscription. However, it will remain active until the end of your already paid term. There will be no partial refund. Can I book a new subscription after cancelling? Yes you can sign up for a new subscription anytime as long as you haven't deleted your data. Will my account be deactivated immediately after cancelling? No after you cancel, your contract continues until the end of your current billing period. Your account will only be deactivated after that. Will my workspace data be kept after cancelling? Yes your project data will be kept until the end of your contract. You can export it if needed and delete it anytime.
Tracking Time About time tracking in awork For every project based service provider, time tracking is an essential part of billing clients. That's why it's important that every team member working on
Tracking Time About time tracking in awork For every project based service provider, time tracking is an essential part of billing clients. That's why it's important that every team member working on projects logs their time. Time tracking is often seen as a necessary chore by employees. That's why time tracking in awork is fully integrated into task management and designed to be so fast, easy, and flexible that it doesn't burden anyone. What is a time entry? A time entry always contains: Date Duration Assignment to a user Optionally, you can add: Start and end time Project and task Notes Activity type Billability Who can track time? Every user in awork can log time. However, you can only log time to projects and tasks that you have access to (according to rights management). ☝️ Note : From the Professional Plan onwards, admins have the option to disable time tracking for all users. How can I track time? There are many ways and places to log time in awork. The main difference is between retroactive entry and live tracking using a start stop timer. The different options are described in detail below. Start Stop Timer Only one timer can run in awork at a time. When you start a new one, the previous one stops automatically. The main entry point is the global timer at the bottom center of your screen. You can control it using the stopwatch icon and add additional information like project, task, or notes. You can start a timer in various places: directly in the global timer in the task details at the top right in the project details at the top right in the action menu of an existing time entry (adopts all settings except date and time) First, you can search for a project or task using the search function and log time to it. While the timer is running, you have several options: Pause: The timer turns blue and flashes, and you can resume it later. Delete a pause: If you delete paused time, the duration is added to the total entry. Stop: Click the square icon to end the timer. Cancel: Use the trash icon to discard the entire entry. For safety, awork also stops the timer automatically: either after 24 hours or when the daily limit set in your settings (for example, 10 hours) is reached, regardless of whether the timer was paused in between. Manual Time Entry You can log time manually in the following ways: Using the + button in the left menu, right next to Times . This appears when you hover your mouse over the word Times . In the time overview ( Main menu Times ) using the + Time button in the top left corner. Using the shortcut Z . Select Add time using the + button in the action bar at the bottom center. A pop up opens where you can set the duration either using a slider or by entering it manually. Click "Add details" to include additional information like activity type, start and end time, or a note. Slash commands are particularly handy: Use to open commands like searching for projects or tasks. sets the end time to the current time and, with a default duration of 1 hour, sets the start time back one hour accordingly. automatically creates an entry from 08:00 to now. The duration and start time adjust dynamically as needed. You can also insert line breaks in the notes field using Shift + Enter for multi line notes. Daily and weekly views In the "Times" section, you have various views available. In daily view , you can log entries directly by dragging and clicking. The window opens automatically with suggested start and end times. In weekly view , you add times by day by clicking on the dashed fields. This lets you plan the entire week quickly and clearly. You can find more information about the My logged times section here. Editing a time entry You can easily edit time entries using the action menu . You can change the start time or end time independently; the duration changes accordingly. When you change the duration , awork automatically adjusts the end time and keeps the start time . If you explicitly changed the end time last, when you change the duration , the start time will be adjusted instead. Duplicating a time entry To duplicate an existing time entry, open the action menu and click Duplicate . This creates a copy that you can adjust as needed without having to re enter everything. Deleting a time entry To delete an existing time entry, open the action menu and click Delete . This entry will then be permanently removed from the user and the project. Logging time for other users If you have write access to a project, you can also log time for other team members. When creating an entry, simply select the relevant person. If you move a time entry to a project for which you don't have write access, the entry is automatically assigned to your own profile. FAQ Can I edit the start time while the timer is running? Even while the timer is running, you can edit and adjust the timer's start time. The logged time will adjust accordingly. Once the time entry is complete, you can adjust the start time retroactively under Times , provided the workspace settings allow it. Can I pause the timer? You can pause the timer at any time. When the timer is paused, it turns blue and flashes so you don't forget to resume it. Clicking on the paused timer opens it again, and you can continue time tracking using the play icon . If you go to Edit via the action button in the time entry, you'll see how long the logged time was paused. By clicking the "x", you can delete the paused time and add it back to the total logged time. Can I cancel the timer? If you click on the running timer and then click the trash icon, you can cancel and delete the time tracking. It won't appear anywhere in awork. Can I hide the timer? Yes, from the Professional Plan onwards, admins can hide the timer under Settings Workspace Time tracking for the entire workspace. Time can still be logged manually. Can I disable time tracking? Yes, from the Professional Plan onwards, admins can disable time tracking under Settings General for the entire workspace. Can multiple timers run at the same time? No, only one timer can run at a time. Does the timer stop automatically? The timer continues for up to a maximum of 24 hours (even if the browser is already closed). After 24 hours, the timer stops automatically, unless you've activated the maximum time tracking of 10 hours per day in your time tracking settings. Then, of course, the timer stops automatically after 10 hours. Can external users log time? External users who are assigned to a project via awork Connect can also log time. This is booked normally to the project and can be viewed in time reports. It's also visible to external users in their own workspace under My times .
Working with Teams Teams let you group projects and users in your workspace and restrict visibility to other teams. This means teams can see only their own projects, but not the projects of other team
Working with Teams Teams let you group projects and users in your workspace and restrict visibility to other teams. This means teams can see only their own projects, but not the projects of other teams. Creating Teams In the Settings menu (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Teams , you can manage the teams in your workspace. As long as you haven't created any teams, you won't see options in your workspace to assign users or projects to teams or filter by them. To create a new team, click the + Team button first. You need to give your team a name, and choose a color and an icon. Icons with a small blue checkmark are ones you've already used for other teams. You can still use them for additional teams though. Once you've created a new team, you'll immediately see the user selection. Here you can fill your new team right away. Assigning Users to Teams You can distribute users to your teams in the team management under Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Teams . Each user can belong to any number of teams at the same time. To do this, click the action button for the team in question and then click Assign users . A window will open where you can select or deselect users. Users have a team selection on their detail page (directly below their name), where team membership can be set. Since these changes can involve permission changes, admin rights are required to make the changes. When inviting new users, you need to select a team to which the user will be assigned. You can change the teams anytime after the invitation in the settings or user details. Assigning Projects to Teams Projects have a team selection on their detail page and in the editing window, where team membership can be set. If you have sufficient permissions for the project, the teams can be changed. However, you can only choose from projects you can see yourself. When creating a new project, if you as a user are only allowed to see projects from your own teams, the project must already be assigned to one of your teams when creating it. Restricting Visibility to Your Own Teams In the settings of permission roles ( Settings Rights Management General Permission Roles Click on Role Name ), there are two options: Only projects from own team (Projects section) and Only users from own team (Users section). If these are activated, users with this permission role will only be able to see projects or users from their own teams, and the set permissions will apply. For example, if I activate Only projects from own team for a permission role and then grant only read permissions for project details, tasks, and time entries, users can only see projects from their own team and only with read permissions. If the setting is not activated, the set permissions for project details, tasks, and time entries apply to all projects in the workspace. Which Projects Can I See Anyway? If a user is assigned to a project that doesn't belong to their team, they will still be allowed to see it. The permissions of the project role that the user has on the project apply. If the user is the creator of the project, they can view and edit the project at any time. If a user is only assigned to a task of a project they're not supposed to see, they will be able to see the tasks but won't be able to view the project details. Filtering by Teams If teams are set up in your workspace, there are filters that allow you to filter by teams. You can find these filters for example in: Team planning Time evaluations Tasks Project overview User overview Attention : Keep in mind that it makes a difference whether you filter, for example, time evaluations by teams via users or via projects. If you filter projects by teams, all times recorded on projects assigned to the team are displayed. This can also include times from users who don't actually belong to the team. If you filter users by teams, all times from users belonging to the team are displayed. But this might not include all times recorded on the project. Deleting Teams Teams can be deleted at any time in the team overview under Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Teams via the action menu of the action button. Users are automatically removed from the deleted team. If projects were assigned to the team, they can be moved to another team by selecting a different team in the deletion window. Deactivating Teams If you no longer want to use teams in your workspace, you just need to remove all teams and the team filters and selection options will disappear from your workspace.
Adding or Removing Licenses How can I book additional licenses? You can add more licenses at any time and they'll be active immediately. Here's how: Go to: Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of th
Adding or Removing Licenses How can I book additional licenses? You can add more licenses at any time and they'll be active immediately. Here's how: Go to: Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Subscription Manage Subscription Increase the number of users using the slider or by entering a number in the text field Click the purple confirmation button Your new license is active right away You'll receive a prorated invoice for the remaining time in your current billing cycle Example: Monthly price for one license: 12 € → A second license is added after two weeks → Approximately 6 € additional charge for the current month → Starting next month: 24 € for two licenses How can I remove or reduce licenses? License reductions take effect at the end of your next billing cycle. Follow these steps to reduce your licenses: Open: Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Manage Plan Manage Subscription Reduce the number of users using the slider or by entering a number in the text field Click the purple confirmation button Your change will take effect in your next billing cycle . Until then, you can continue using all your licenses FAQ What happens if I deactivate or delete a user? Deactivating users does not automatically decrease the number of licenses you've booked. To lower your license count, you need to manually adjust your subscription in the "Manage Subscription" menu. Can I undo scheduled changes? Yes, you can adjust or cancel scheduled changes at any time, as long as the change hasn't become active yet. When do changes take effect? Increasing licenses: active immediately, prorated billing Reducing licenses: effective starting with your next billing period
Getting Help When you have questions about awork, the question mark icon in the bottom left of the main menu is your go to starting point. There you'll find access to our chat and support team, the on
Getting Help When you have questions about awork, the question mark icon in the bottom left of the main menu is your go to starting point. There you'll find access to our chat and support team, the onboarding tutorial, and our community. Help & Documentation 1. Click on the question mark icon in the bottom left of the main menu 2. Choose the section you need: Onboarding: Your personal awork guide Help Center: Guides, tips & tricks Community: Share your feedback, submit feature requests, and more Support Chat: 24/7 chat with bot Fin, reach out to the team anytime What's New? Stay informed about all updates About awork: Details about your workspace, releases, versions, and more FAQ When is the chat available? Chat with our bot Fin 24/7. Fin is available around the clock. You can also request to speak with the team anytime and report issues or bugs directly. Our support team is available Monday through Friday from 09:00 to 17:00. Can I contact support via email? Yes, feel free to send us an email at support@awork.com. Why can't I open the support chat? If you click on Contact support and the chat window doesn't open, an ad blocker is probably blocking the chat from loading. Disable the ad blocker for awork and try again. Once you've disabled the ad blocker, you should be able to start the chat with the support team as usual.
Book and Manage Your Own Subdomain in awork
Book and Manage Your Own Subdomain in awork What is your own subdomain in awork? With your own subdomain, your workspace gets a custom URL in the format: yourteam.awork.app This makes access easier an
Book and Manage Your Own Subdomain in awork What is your own subdomain in awork? With your own subdomain, your workspace gets a custom URL in the format: yourteam.awork.app This makes access easier and strengthens your team branding. How much does the subdomain cost? The price for your own subdomain is 15 € per month. If you book it during an ongoing billing period, we'll charge you a prorated amount for the remaining time. Subdomain Availability by Plan Which plans include your own subdomain? The subdomain is already included in : Professional Enterprise Enterprise+ In the Basic and Standard plans , you can book the subdomain as a paid add on. Management & Changes Can you change the subdomain yourself? 1. After booking, you can set the subdomain once yourself. To do this, open Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu). 2. Select the Workspace section. 3. Click the pencil icon next to the URL in the Workspace section and enter your desired subdomain. What if you want to change the subdomain again later? Any further changes are only possible through support . Contact our support team for a manual adjustment. Cancellation & Validity What happens to the subdomain if you cancel your awork plan? If you cancel your awork plan, your custom subdomain will be automatically canceled as well. FAQ Is your own subdomain mandatory? No using your own subdomain is optional. Can you use multiple subdomains? No only one subdomain per workspace is possible. Is the subdomain automatically activated? Yes it's active right after you book it and set the URL. Can you cancel just the subdomain? Yes please contact our support for that. If you cancel, your old subdomain will be restored.
Referral Program With the Referral Program , you can share your personal referral link, choose a reward, and get rewarded when someone books an awork subscription with a 12 or 24 month contract throug
Referral Program With the Referral Program , you can share your personal referral link, choose a reward, and get rewarded when someone books an awork subscription with a 12 or 24 month contract through your link. Key Benefits and Use Cases Recommend awork and benefit from it: Share a personal referral link and track successful referrals through it Choose a reward you actually want (account credit, gift card, or merch package) Your referral also gets a discount (a one time discount equal to one month) How to Use the Referral Program Your Personal Referral Link 1. Click on your profile picture in the bottom left of the main menu (or your initials) 2. Click on Recommend awork to open the referral window with your personal link 3. In the same window, select your preferred reward 4. Copy your personal referral link and share it [!NOTE] Important: You can only recommend awork from a workspace with an active subscription. Rewards and Terms of Participation In the referral window, you can select your preferred reward. This selection is saved. After a successful referral, you'll receive the reward that was selected at the time the new subscription was booked. Available Rewards Credit toward your next awork invoice: For every subscription of at least 12 months booked through your referral link, you get a discount on your next invoice. Amazon Gift Card: For every subscription of at least 12 months booked through your referral link, you get a 30 euro Amazon gift card. The card will be sent to you by email 4 5 business days after a successful referral. Mystery Merch Package: For every subscription of at least 12 months booked through your referral link, you get an awork Mystery Bag (with a tote bag or notebook, plus stickers). You'll receive your reward once the person you referred: registers through your personal referral link books a paid subscription with a contract duration of 12 or 24 months If a monthly subscription is booked first, your referral (and thus your reward) only becomes valid once they switch to a 12 or 24 month subscription. [!NOTE] Important: At the time your referral books, your workspace must still have an active subscription. Applying the Referral Link After Registration If the person registered without your link, they can still apply it during checkout. Share your personal referral link with the person you referred Ask them to enter the code after clicking Buy Now . A pop up will then appear where they can click Apply Coupon . [!WARNING] Important: The code can only be entered once. If a link is already attached or the workspace was created via a referral link, entry is not possible. FAQ Who can use the referral program? Anyone in an awork workspace with an active subscription can recommend awork through the user menu. What rewards are available? You can choose between account credit toward your next awork invoice, an Amazon gift card, or a mystery merch package. When do I receive my reward? After the person registers through your personal referral link and books a paid subscription with a 12 or 24 month contract. If monthly billing is set up first, the reward becomes valid once they switch to 12 or 24 months. How much credit do I get if I choose credit as my reward? The credit amount is based on the value of the new subscription and equals exactly one month's cost. How does the person I referred benefit from registering through my link? The person you referred also gets a one time discount equal to one month. For example, if a 12 month subscription is booked, they only pay for 11 months on their first invoice. Can the referral link be applied if the workspace wasn't created through my link? Yes, as long as no subscription has been booked yet. The referred person can enter the code after clicking Buy Now . A pop up will then appear where they click Apply Coupon . Why can't I enter the referral link during checkout? The referral field is locked if a link is already attached or the workspace was created via a referral link.
Getting Invoices for Your awork Contract
Getting Invoices for Your awork Contract General Information About Your Invoice Overview Where can I find my invoices in awork? You can access all your invoices anytime directly in awork. Here's where
Getting Invoices for Your awork Contract General Information About Your Invoice Overview Where can I find my invoices in awork? You can access all your invoices anytime directly in awork. Here's where to find them: Go to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Click on Subscription Open the Invoices tab There you can view and download all your previous invoices. Invoice Details and Download Can I download invoices? Yes you can download each invoice as a PDF. What information is included on the invoice? Each invoice contains: Company name and address VAT ID (if provided) Payment amount Invoice period Payment method FAQ Do I receive invoices automatically by email? Yes each invoice is automatically sent to the email address registered on your account for invoices. What should I do if I can't find an invoice? Check the Invoices section under Manage Subscription or contact awork Support. Can I update my invoice details? Yes go to Manage Subscription under Payment Methods & Invoices and edit your company and payment information there. Changes only apply to future invoices.
Importing Data To make it as easy as possible for you to take over your existing tasks, awork has a data importer. To use it, your tasks including projects just need to be in Excel format (.xlsx). ☝️T
Importing Data To make it as easy as possible for you to take over your existing tasks, awork has a data importer. To use it, your tasks including projects just need to be in Excel format (.xlsx). ☝️Tip: You can find out how to export your data from Trello, Asana, Monday, Jira, or Meistertask and prepare it for import into awork here. Who can import data? Only admins can import data. What data can be imported? The data import in awork primarily covers tasks with their details. The following fields can be imported along with the tasks: Task name Project (name) Customer (name) Task description Activity Start date Due date Planned effort Assignee Task status Task list Here, projects , customers , and task lists are independent objects in awork. If they are not found in awork during import, these objects will be created new. If objects with the same name are found, they will be reused. This way you can also import customers and projects, but not as standalone imports with all project or customer details. Can I also import time entries? No, importing time entries into awork is currently only possible via the API. Can I import just customers or projects? Standalone import of customers or projects with all their details is only possible via the API. However, you can import projects and customers in simple form through tasks (see above). Step by step: The data import Step 1: Navigate to Settings Under Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Importer you'll find the section for importing data. Step 2: Prepare your data Clicking the Start Import button opens a window where you can download a template that's already perfectly configured for import. You can find out how to export your data from other tools here. Fill in the template, use or create your own Excel spreadsheet (.xlsx) and populate it with your tasks. In the same window, you can upload your Excel spreadsheet for import. Step 3: Map the fields between awork and your Excel columns If the column headers in your Excel spreadsheet cannot be automatically linked to the fields in awork, a window will open where you need to manually assign them. If you use the template provided in awork, this step will be skipped. Step 4: Review the data and manually correct it All your data will now be displayed clearly in a large window. The data has not yet been imported at this point. If there are issues, such as incomplete records, you'll be notified at the top of the window. Required fields like the task name must always have a value in order to be imported. The corresponding fields will be marked in red in the table. If projects or customers with the same name already exist in awork, they will be used for the import and no new objects will be created. You can tell that an existing project or customer is being used by the small star next to the name in that field. You can edit all data here row by row and cell by cell before it's imported. Just click on the corresponding cell. Incomplete or faulty rows will be skipped during the import. Step 5: Start the import When you click Import , the data will be created in awork. Once the import is complete, you'll receive a notification via email.
Notion Importer How to get started with the import You can find the Notion Importer in two places: On the Docs homepage Click on the import icon on the Docs page. In Settings (gear icon in the bottom
Notion Importer How to get started with the import You can find the Notion Importer in two places: On the Docs homepage Click on the import icon on the Docs page. In Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) under "Importers" Click on "Start import" next to Notion. Preparing your Notion export To export your data from Notion, you have two options: 1. Export your entire workspace : Go to Notion Settings General Export. Select HTML format, enable "Include contents: Everything" and "Create folders for subpages". 2. Export a single page with subpages : Open the page you want in Notion, click the menu icon (three dots) in the top right, and select "Export". Make sure you select HTML format and the "Include subpages" option. ☝️ Note: The export only includes content you have access to. Ideally, the export should be performed by someone with admin rights . Importing into awork 1. Upload the exported ZIP file in the Notion Importer. 2. Select the Docs Space in awork where you want the content imported. 3. Decide whether the imported documents should be private (visible only to you) or accessible to your team. What gets imported? Pages and subpages : Imported as documents in awork. Databases : Imported as tables based on the view settings you selected in Notion. For best results, we recommend exporting the database separately. Comments and trash content : Not imported. Maximum file size : Exports larger than 1.5 GB are not supported. In that case, please export individual sections separately. Managing permissions After import, you can adjust access permissions for documents and spaces in awork individually.
Monday Importer With the Monday Importer, you can import projects and their associated content from Monday.com into your awork workspace. ☝️ The import takes between 2 and 15 minutes, depending on the
Monday Importer With the Monday Importer, you can import projects and their associated content from Monday.com into your awork workspace. ☝️ The import takes between 2 and 15 minutes, depending on the number of projects you're importing. Benefits of Importing Structured Migration: Import projects from Monday.com including tasks, subtasks, files, and comments into awork. Flexible Mapping: Map Monday columns to custom fields and decide which content you want to include. Transparent Progress: See your import progress and estimated remaining time directly in the import process. How to Start Importing Your Monday Data 1. Navigate to the awork Importer tab in Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) and click "Start Import" next to Monday. 2. Click on your profile in Monday.com and then click "Developers" in the menu. 3. Click on "My Access Tokens". 4. Click on "Show". 5. Copy the access token. Project Import 1. Paste the access token into the corresponding field and click "Next". 2. In the next step, you can select one or more projects you want to import. 3. You can also choose a project type and project template. Note: These must be created in awork first. 4. In the next step, you can map columns to custom fields. Note: Custom fields must be created in awork before you can use them in the import. Important: A status must first be created in a project template before you can use it. Otherwise, the status won't be imported correctly. 5. Users assigned to a task must exist in both Monday.com and awork with identical email addresses. 6. If you don't want to map a column, select "Don't Map". 7. You can map subtasks separately. You can also choose whether you want to import comments. Important: Imported comments won't be assigned to the person who commented, but rather to the person performing the import. 8. In the next step, you'll see a summary of your imported projects, tasks, subtasks, files, and comments. This may take a few seconds. 9. Then click "Start Import". 10. Your import will now start. You'll see the progress of your import and an estimated remaining time will be displayed. 11. If your import was successful, you'll see a confirmation message. 12. If the import fails, you'll also receive a notification. By clicking "Back to Home" you can restart the import process from the beginning. 13. In your awork workspace, you'll now see your imported project. Mapping Columns to Custom Fields You can map columns from Monday.com to the following custom fields in awork: Item (Monday) → Task (awork) Sub Item (Monday) → Subtask (awork) Update (Monday) → Comments (awork) Text (Column) → Tags (awork) Text (Custom field in awork) Task description Number (Column) → Number (Custom field in awork) Date (Column) → Text (Custom field in awork) Date (Custom field in awork) Timeline (Column) → Timeline (Start/due date in awork) Label (Column) → Text (Custom field in awork) Selection (Custom field in awork) Status Checkbox (Column) → Priority (awork) Checkbox (Custom field in awork) People (Column) → Assigned User (awork) Person (Custom field in awork) Location (Column) → Text (Custom field in awork) Link (Column) → Text (Custom field in awork) Link (Custom field in awork) Files (Column) → Task files (awork) Time Tracking (Column) → Time logged on task (awork)
Asana Importer With the Asana Importer , you can import projects, tasks, and optionally subtasks, comments, and attachments from Asana into awork. The import typically takes between 2 and 15 minutes a
Asana Importer With the Asana Importer , you can import projects, tasks, and optionally subtasks, comments, and attachments from Asana into awork. The import typically takes between 2 and 15 minutes and depends on the number and size of the projects you're importing. Prerequisites You have access to the Importer Hub in awork (typically Admin/Owner rights). You can create a Personal Access Token in Asana (access to the Asana Developer Console). If you want to use Custom Fields , Project Templates , or Project Types , these must be created in awork beforehand. Important: User assignments only work reliably if the people exist in both Asana and awork with identical email addresses . How do I start the Asana import? The import consists of two parts: (1) Create a token in Asana and (2) Start and configure the import in awork. 1) Open the Importer Hub in awork 1. Open Settings in awork (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) and navigate to Importer . 2. Select Asana and click Start Import . 2) Create a Personal Access Token in Asana For the import, awork needs an Asana Personal Access Token . Here's how to create it in Asana: 1. Open your Asana workspace. 2. Click on your Profile in Asana and select Settings . A popup will open. 1. Scroll down to the bottom of the popup and click Show Developer Console . 1. A new tab will open. Click Create New Token . 1. Give it a name (for example, awork Token ), confirm the Asana API terms of use, and click Create Token . 1. Your token will be displayed in the next popup. Copy it and save it securely so you can paste it into awork right away. 3) Insert the token in awork 1. Switch back to awork. 2. Paste the token into the corresponding field and click Next . 4) Select project type and project template (optional) Optionally, you can select a Project Type and a Project Template . Both must exist in awork beforehand. 5) Map custom fields In the next step, you can map Custom Fields from Asana to Custom Fields in awork. The custom fields must already be created in awork before you can select them in the import. Important: A Status must first be created in a Project Template before you can use it in the mapping. Otherwise, the status will not be imported correctly. Important: Person assignments only work if the person exists in both Asana and awork with identical email addresses . If you don't want to map a column, select Do not assign . 6) Select import options (subtasks, comments, attachments) You can separately choose whether to import Subtasks , Comments , and Attachments . Note: In awork, there is only one level of subtasks. 7) Review summary and start the import Before starting, you'll see a summary of your selections (for example, projects, tasks, subtasks, files, and comments). The calculation may take a few seconds. Then click Start Import . 8) Track progress and review results During the import, you'll see the progress and an estimated time remaining. If your import is successful, you'll receive a confirmation. If the import fails, you'll also see a notification. You can click Back to Home to restart the import process. After a successful import, you'll find your imported project in your awork workspace. Tips & Limitations Known Limitations Subtasks: awork supports only one level of subtasks. Deeper nested structures from Asana will be flattened accordingly. Status Mapping: A status must exist in a Project Template , otherwise it won't be imported correctly. Person Assignments: Assigned people are only imported correctly if the person exists in both Asana and awork with the same email address . Custom Fields: Fields you want to map to must be created beforehand in awork. Tips for Clean Results Before importing, create a suitable Project Template (including statuses) and optionally a Project Type in awork. Align email addresses of your team members between Asana and awork before you import. Consistently use Do not assign in the mapping if you don't want to import certain fields. If you're unsure, start by importing a few projects first and expand later. Mapping Columns to Custom Fields You can map columns/fields from Asana to the following awork fields (excerpt/overview): 1. Task Name (Asana) Task (awork) 2. Approval Status (Asana) Task (awork) 3. Mark Task Complete (Asana) Status (awork) 4. Subtask (Asana) Subtask (awork) as well as Timeline (start/due date) (awork) and Date (awork) (Custom Field) 5. Assignee (Asana) Assigned To (awork) and Person (awork) (Custom Field) 6. Description (Asana) Description (awork) as well as Text (awork) (Custom Field) 7. Comments (Asana) Comment (awork) 8. Attach Files (Asana) Attachment (awork) 9. Single Select (Asana) Text (Custom Field), Select (Custom Field), or Status (awork) 10. Multi Select (Asana) Text (awork) (Custom Field) 11. Date (Asana) Timeline (start/due date) (awork) and Date (awork) (Custom Field) 12. People (Asana) Assigned To (awork) and Person (awork) (Custom Field) 13. Text (Asana) Description (awork) and Text (awork) (Custom Field) 14. Number (Asana) Text (awork) (Custom Field) and Number (awork) (Custom Field) The number in Asana is linked with Text and Number in awork. 15. Formula (Asana) Text (awork) (Custom Field) 16. ID (Asana) Text (awork) (Custom Field) 17. Time Tracking (Asana) Logged Time (awork) 18. Rollup (Asana) Text (awork) (Custom Field) 19. Projects (Asana) Text (awork) (Custom Field) 20. Tags (Asana) Tags (awork) as well as Text (Custom Field) or Select (Custom Field) 21. Completed At (Asana) Text (Custom Field) and Date (Custom Field) 22. Modified At (Asana) Text (Custom Field) and Date (Custom Field) 23. Created At (Asana) Text (Custom Field) and Date (Custom Field) 24. Created By (Asana) Assigned To (awork) and Person (awork) (Custom Field) 25. Followers (Asana) Assigned To (awork) and Person (awork) (Custom Field) Security: Handling the Token Treat your Asana Personal Access Token like a password and don't share it publicly. If you suspect your token has been compromised, revoke it in Asana and create a new one. FAQ How long does the import from Asana take? The import usually takes between 2 and 15 minutes . The duration depends on the number of projects and the amount of tasks, subtasks, comments, and attachments. Why aren't tasks assigned to the right person? Assignments only work if the person exists in both Asana and awork with identical email addresses . Also check whether the person has access to the workspace in awork. Why aren't statuses imported correctly? A status must first be created in a Project Template in awork before you can use it in the mapping. If no matching status exists, it can't be assigned correctly during the import. Can I map custom fields from Asana to awork? Yes. However, the target fields must be created as Custom Fields in awork before the import . You can also intentionally skip fields in the mapping by selecting Do not assign . Are nested subtasks from Asana fully imported? awork supports only one level of subtasks. If you use multiple nesting levels in Asana, they will be flattened accordingly during the import.
Setting Up Single Sign On (SSO) Single Sign On (SSO) lets your team sign in with an existing account from an identity provider, without having to set a password in awork. [!NOTE] SSO is only available
Setting Up Single Sign On (SSO) Single Sign On (SSO) lets your team sign in with an existing account from an identity provider, without having to set a password in awork. [!NOTE] SSO is only available in the awork Enterprise plan. [!WARNING] Important: awork does not support SAML 2.0 . Instead, awork uses the OpenID Connect standard based on OAuth 2.0. Key Benefits and Use Cases SSO makes signing in simple and consistent: Let your team members use their existing identity provider accounts instead of creating a new awork password Use a modern OpenID Connect login based on OAuth 2.0 Optionally disable other sign in methods once SSO is set up How to Set Up Single Sign On (SSO) Choose a Supported Identity Provider Supported identity providers include: Okta (website) Auth0 (website) Microsoft Entra ID (formerly Azure AD) (website) OneLogin (website) GSuite (Google IAM: website) Keycloak (website) If your identity provider isn't listed, contact us via Support and we'll check if we can set up a connection. Set Up SSO in awork 1. Go to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Integrations 2. Open the Integration Library and select your desired provider 3. Fill in the displayed fields and complete the setup [!WARNING] Note: By Subdomain , we don't mean your awork workspace URL, but rather the subdomain of the provider. Enable Required Redirect URLs The following redirect URLs must be enabled: https://app.awork.com/enterprise login https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/authorize slack https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/external/{Name of Login Provider} https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/msteams/authorize https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/authorize Service specific redirect URLs: Web Login : Slack Authorization : Microsoft Teams Authorization : Zapier : Configure SSO via Okta 1. Open the Okta configuration at YOUR SUBDOMAIN.okta.com/admin 2. Go to the Applications section in the menu 3. Add a new application and name it, for example, awork 4. Copy the Client ID , Client Secret , and Subdomain into the awork configuration and save by clicking Save [!NOTE] Important: The Login Redirect URLs must be configured correctly so that Okta can redirect users properly. The Implicit (Hybrid) Flow (including the ID Token grant type) must be enabled. User consent is not required since awork only accesses the user's name and email address during login. Also set the following in Okta under the Login section: 1. Initiate login URI: AWORK SUBDOMAIN.awork.com/login 2. Login redirect URIs: https://app.awork.com/enterprise login https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/authorize slack https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/external/okta https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/msteams/authorize https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/authorize ) Configure SSO with Auth0 1. Open the Auth0 configuration 2. Go to the Applications section in the menu 3. Add a new application of type Regular Web Applications and name it, for example, awork 4. Copy the Client ID , Client Secret , and Subdomain into the awork configuration and save 5. Set the following URLs in the Application URLs section: 6. Application login URL: AWORK SUBDOMAIN.awork.com/login 7. Allowed callback URLs: https://app.awork.com/enterprise login, https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/authorize slack, https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/external/auth0, https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/msteams/authorize, https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/authorize 8. Allowed web origins: AWORK SUBDOMAIN.awork.com app.awork.com [!WARNING] Note: All other settings are already configured correctly by default. ) ) Configure SSO with OneLogin 1. Open the OneLogin configuration at SUBDOMAIN.onelogin.com 2. Go to the Applications section in the menu 3. Add a new application by clicking Add App in the top right and name it, for example, awork 4. Select OpenID Connect (OIDC) as the type, set the name to, for example, awork, and save 5. In the SSO section, you'll find your Client ID and Client Secret . You can find the Subdomain in your OneLogin account URL ( {Subdomain}.onelogin.com ). Enter these values in awork and save 6. Set the following URLs in the Configuration section: 7. Login URL: AWORK SUBDOMAIN.awork.com/login 8. Redirect URIs: https://app.awork.com/enterprise login https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/authorize slack https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/external/onelogin https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/msteams/authorize https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/authorize Configure SSO with Microsoft Entra ID (formerly Azure AD) 1. Open the Entra ID configuration in the Azure Portal 2. Click on App registrations in the Manage section of the menu 3. Add a new registration and name it, for example, awork SSO 4. Set Supported account types to Accounts in this organizational directory only (your Domain only Single tenant) and enter as the Redirect URI for the Web platform. Then click Register ) 5. In the Overview , you'll find the Application (client) ID (= Client ID in awork) and the Directory (tenant) ID (= Subdomain in awork) ) 6. Under Certificates & secrets , you can create a new Client secret and enter the value in awork as Client Secret. [!WARNING] Important: Copy the value, not the Secret ID ) [!WARNING] To rotate Client secrets, you need to delete the SSO integration in awork and add it again with the new secret. 7. Under Authentication , enter the following Redirect URLs for a Web platform: https://app.awork.com/enterprise login https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/authorize slack https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/external/azure https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/msteams/authorize https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/authorize ) Under Implicit grant and hybrid flows , you must check the box for ID tokens . Under Supported account types , Accounts in this organizational directory only (your Domain only Single tenant) must be selected ) The login flow uses the preferred username claim of the Entra user by default. If you want to use the instead, you can configure the UPN as an optional claim in the Token configuration : Token type : Claim : Then click Add . ) [!WARNING] Important: UPN as an optional claim is only supported for app registrations for tenants and not for personal Microsoft accounts. Make sure this is configured correctly in the Authentication section. Configure SSO with GSuite (Google IAM) 1. Go to <https://console.cloud.google.com/apis/credentials and select your project 2. Click on Create credentials and select OAuth client ID 3. Select Web application as the type 4. Give it a name, for example, awork 5. Add the following redirect URLs under URIs: https://app.awork.com/enterprise login https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/authorize slack https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/external/gsuite https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/msteams/authorize https://app.awork.com/api/v1/accounts/authorize 6. Save by clicking Create 7. You'll find the Client ID and the Client secret on the right, which you need to enter in awork ) ) You can find more information about SSO with GSuite here. Configure SSO with Keycloak [!NOTE] Important: Please contact our Support if you want to set up SSO via Keycloak, as this option is not yet available in the web application. To set up Keycloak SSO via OpenID Connect: 1. Log in to your Keycloak admin console 2. Navigate to Clients 3. Download the client configuration file: Keycloak awork Client Configuration 4. Drag the file into the resource field to import the required settings 5. Save the new client ) 6. In the Client Details, go to the Credentials tab and copy the Client secret ) 7. In the Realm Settings , you'll find the link at the end of the General settings ( OpenID Endpoint Configuration ). The URL typically looks like: https://{your keycloak url}/realms/master/.well known/openid configuration ) 8. Contact Support with the Client ID , Client Secret , and the URL so we can set up the integration for you [!WARNING] Important: The URL must remain permanently available to prevent login errors with SSO. Configure Custom SSO Providers (OpenID Connect) awork also supports other SSO providers that support OpenID Connect. You'll need the complete OpenID Configuration URL (for example, ), the Client ID , and the Client Secret . Sign In via SSO on app.awork.com 1. Go to app.awork.com 2. Select Sign in with SSO 3. Enter your workspace subdomain You'll be redirected to the SSO login screen or, if you're already logged in, directly to your awork dashboard. Tips and Notes After Setup If the configuration was successful, SSO Sign in will be available in the login area. [!NOTE] Note: Permissions, users, or groups are currently not managed through the identity provider. SSO only enables login for existing awork accounts. A user must already exist in awork. User matching is done via email address. Disable Other Login Methods Once SSO is configured, you can disable and hide other login methods (email & password as well as social login via Google & Apple). 1. Go to Settings General . 2. Disable other login options This is only advisable if no external users are working in the workspace who are not managed through identity management. [!WARNING] Note: If you remove the SSO settings in awork, login with email and password will automatically be enabled again so you can always log in with your admin account. Global vs. Workspace Login If you've disabled email/password and/or social login, these options will still be shown on the global page app.awork.com. They'll only be hidden on your workspace page . [!NOTE] However, login via the global page won't be possible. Use to log in via SSO. Once SSO is configured, Sign in with SSO will also appear on . You'll be redirected to the SSO login screen or directly to your dashboard. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) Is SSO available in every plan? No, SSO is only available in the awork Enterprise plan. Does awork support SAML 2.0? No. awork does not support SAML 2.0 and uses OpenID Connect based on OAuth 2.0 instead. Can my identity provider manage permissions, users, or groups in awork? No. Permissions, users, and groups are currently not managed through the identity provider. SSO only enables login for existing awork user accounts that are matched via email address. What happens if I remove the SSO settings after disabling other login options? Email and password login will be automatically enabled again so you can log in with your admin account at any time. Can I set up SSO with Keycloak in the awork web interface? Not yet. Please contact Support to set up Keycloak SSO, as this is currently not possible through the web interface (coming soon).
Integrationen für Single-Sign-On (SSO) & SCIM
Setting Up SCIM What is SCIM? System for Cross domain Identity Management, or SCIM for short, simplifies user management by allowing you to synchronize users between different applications using a sta
Setting Up SCIM What is SCIM? System for Cross domain Identity Management, or SCIM for short, simplifies user management by allowing you to synchronize users between different applications using a standard protocol. This way, you can use a single application as your central source of information where you manage all your users. Examples of such identity providers include Microsoft Entra ID (formerly Azure AD), OneLogin, or Okta. From these, you can import users to awork or deactivate users from awork. Changes to user information like name, timezone, or user role are then automatically imported into awork. This integration supports the current version SCIM 2.0. Why should I use SCIM with awork? Using SCIM with awork has many advantages. First, you don't have to worry about importing users to awork. When configuring SCIM, you choose which information should be synchronized with awork. The minimum setup includes first name, last name, and email. In addition to this information, you can also synchronize your preferred language, timezone, awork user roles, awork teams, absence region, and more. Second, SCIM works best with Single Sign On (SSO). This way, users only need to manage a single login for all their apps, don't set up potentially insecure passwords, and can use additional security features like multi factor authentication (MFA). If you only have internal users in your workspace who are managed by your identity provider, you can disable all login options except SSO. If you also have external users in your awork workspace, you can still allow password based login. How does SCIM synchronization work? SCIM synchronization only works in one direction from your identity provider to awork. Information is sent to awork, but not back from awork to your identity provider. So if you manually change information in awork for a user who is synchronized via SCIM, those changes won't be synchronized back and might get overwritten the next time the user is updated from your identity provider. To use SCIM synchronization, you typically create an app in your identity provider. In the configuration, you can specify which fields should be synchronized. You also have control over which users should be synchronized with awork. This is done by adding user groups or individual users to the SCIM app in your identity provider. Supported features Create user Update user Deactivate user Assign awork user roles Update awork team assignments Update awork absence region Update awork global permission role Requirements SCIM provisioning with awork requires: An active Enterprise subscription A configured SSO (OpenID Connect) integration Note : For OneLogin, we have a pre configured app that integrates SCIM and SSO (OpenID Connect) in a single app. What happens to existing users in awork? Once you enable SCIM at your identity provider, awork retrieves the existing users. They are then matched with existing users in your SCIM app using their email address. ☝️ Note : We use the account email of the user, which can only be changed by them through their profile, not the primary work email that can be configured in the user details. Existing users who match by email are updated in awork, users who don't yet exist in awork are imported, and all other users in awork remain unchanged. This means you can use SCIM for only some of your awork users without affecting others. When importing new users to awork, they don't receive an invitation to awork. You need to send them the link to your awork workspace once you've finished setting up. Users can then log in directly with SSO. You also need to make sure you have enough unused user licenses in awork for the user to be activated. If you don't want to do this manually, we've created a workspace setting that allows new user licenses to be booked automatically. The invoice is generated 30 minutes after the first additional user is booked, so if you import multiple users at once, multiple invoices won't be created. You can find this setting in your awork workspace under Settings General Workspace Settings with the name Allow automatic user bookings via SCIM ☝️ Note : However, if a user is reactivated by an admin, that person receives an email notifying them about the reactivation. ☝️ Note : Currently, awork doesn't show which user was synchronized via SCIM. However, you can check the synchronization status at your identity provider. Setting up SCIM for awork Setting up SCIM involves three steps: 1. Prepare awork for SCIM 2. Set up awork at your identity provider 3. Configure the mapping 1. Prepare awork for SCIM In this section, you'll be guided through the setup steps in awork. 1. Log in to your awork workspace. 2. Set up SSO for your workspace (if not already done). 3. Go to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Integrations . 4. Click Open Integration Library . 5. In the SCIM section, select the provider you want to connect. If your provider isn't in the list, you can choose the generic SCIM integration. If you need help with setup, feel free to contact our Support. 6. Confirm and set up the integration. 7. A popup appears with a Bearer Token. Copy this to your clipboard . You'll need it to grant your identity provider access to awork. 8. You should now see the new SCIM integration in the integrations list and a new client application below it named API Access . The client application is used to authenticate the SCIM client and can be used to regenerate the Bearer Token if you need to copy it again. Please don't edit or delete this client application! 2. Set up awork at your identity provider For OneLogin, Okta, and Microsoft Entra ID (formerly Azure AD), we provide additional information to guide you through the setup. Jump to the section for your provider for the next steps. For OneLogin, we offer a pre defined awork app that includes helpful default values and can also be used as an SSO app. So you only need one app for SSO and SCIM. Okta 1. Go to Menu Applications Applications 2. Click Browse App Catalogue 3. Search for SCIM 2.0 4. Select SCIM 2.0 Test App (OAuth Bearer Token) 5. Click Add Integration 6. Enter an app label, e.g., awork SCIM integration, and click Next 7. Skip the sign on methods (since we don't support SAML for SSO) 8. Under Credentials Details, select Email from the dropdown 9. Click Done 10. Go to the Provisioning tab and click Configure API Integration 11. Enable Enable API Integration 12. Enter https://app.awork.com/api/v1/scim in the SCIM 2.0 Base Url field 13. Copy the Client Secret from your awork SCIM integration into the OAuth Bearer Token field 14. Click Save OneLogin 1. Go to the OneLogin administration area and open Applications Applications 2. Click "Add App" in the top right 3. Search for awork in the search field 4. Click the awork.com app and then click in the top right 5. After saving, you'll see a basic configuration that we've already set up for you. You can adjust this configuration to your use case. 6. Open the Configuration tab on the left 7. In the Login Url field, you can enter either " https://app.awork.com/login " or the link to your subdomain directly, for example " https://your subdomain.awork.com/login " (preferred). 8. In the awork.com subdomain field, you need to enter the link to your workspace before awork.com, so for https://precious asteroid.awork.com it would be precious asteroid. 9. In the API Status section, you can simply click Enable. 10. In the SCIM Bearer Token section, you can now paste the token you received from the SCIM integration in awork. 11. In the SCIM JSON Template field, you can specify which information from OneLogin should be synchronized with awork. The default configuration synchronizes only email, first name, and last name and looks like this: { "schemas": [ "urn:ietf:params:scim:schemas:core:2.0:User" ], "userName": "{$parameters.scimusername}", "name": { "givenName": "{$parameters.firstname}", "familyName": "{$parameters.lastname}" }, "emails": [ { "value": "{$parameters.email}", "primary": true, "type": "work" } ] } 12. You can expand this configuration to map additional user fields. You can find the available fields in the Mappings section. For each field, you need to create a parameter in the Parameters tab and assign the value from OneLogin. Contact us for more information. 13. Then go to the Provisioning tab on the left 14. Under Workflow, you can enable provisioning. 15. You can also decide whether admin approval is required before certain actions. We recommend enabling these options only for initial setup and testing. 16. In the Entitlements section, click Refresh to retrieve the user roles from awork. Note: The guest role is not displayed here as it can only be used for external users. 17. If you want to set default user roles for your users in awork, go to the Rules tab on the left. Click Add Rule to add a new rule. 18. Click Add Rule to add a new rule. 19. Enter a name and add a condition for your rule, e.g., "user is in group Admin". 20. Now you can add actions, such as setting the group in awork. It's important that you first perform the Entitlements Refresh to retrieve all user roles. Also select "From Existing" because user roles can only be created/updated directly in awork. After selecting a role, don't forget to click Add, otherwise the group won't be added. Only add one group, as an awork user can only have one role at a time. 21. Click Save. 22. Repeat these steps for all your awork user roles. 23. Complete the configuration by clicking Save in the top right. 24. Attention: You've completed all configurations to add users to your app. If you want to test the configuration, we recommend adding a test user to the app (under Users Users Select Test User Applications) 25. In the last step, you can add your users to the app either individually or via policies (recommended). 26. For policy access to the app, go to the Access tab on the left, select the roles to be added to the app. 27. For individual assignments, go to the user details and the Application tab. Here you can add a new app by clicking the plus icon in the top right. 28. You can find the provisioning history under Users Provisioning. 29. You can find all events for the awork app under Activity Events. Known Issues If you encounter an error with the description " Invalid Accept Header Value ", you can solve the problem by adding the following custom header in your SCIM application setup: Accept: application/scim+json Microsoft Entra ID (formerly Azure AD) 1. Go to Microsoft Entra ID 2. Go to Enterprise Applications 3. Create a new application 4. Click "Create your own Application" in the Entra ID Gallery 5. Enter a name, e.g., awork SCIM 6. Select "Integrate any other application you didn't find in the gallery" 7. Click "Create" 8. Go to the newly created app 9. Go to the Provisioning tab 10. Edit the provisioning 11. Set the Provisioning Mode to "Automatic" 12. Set the Admin credentials 1. Set the Tenant URL to: https://app.awork.com/api/v1/scim 2. Set the Secret Token to the token you received from the SCIM integration in awork 3. Test the connection to verify the secret is correct 13. Save the configuration. Two more sections will then appear 14. Edit the mappings 1. Click Groups. Disable this feature and save. Currently, awork doesn't support groups with Entra ID. 2. Go back to the mappings and edit the Users mappings 1. Set Target Object Actions to all: Create, Update, Delete 2. The default list of mappings already contains the correct mappings for the required fields. The remaining mappings must be deleted so the synchronization works as expected. The required mappings from Entra ID Mapping to customappsso Attribute are: 3. userPrincipalName userName (userPrincipalName must be set to the user's email) 4. Switch([IsSoftDeleted], , "False", "True", "True", "False") active 5. mail emails[type eq "work"].value 6. preferredLanguage preferredLanguage 7. givenName name.givenName 8. surname name.familyName 9. Optionally, you can also currently map: 10. jobTitle userType (displayed as a position in awork) 11. If you want to synchronize absence regions, user roles, and/or awork teams, you must configure the awork SCIM user extension: 12. Enable: "Show advanced options" 13. Click Edit attribute list for custommapsso. Add the following fields as strings: 1. urn:ietf:params:scim:schemas:extension:awork.com:2.0:User:teams 2. urn:ietf:params:scim:schemas:extension:awork.com:2.0:User:absenceRegion 3. urn:ietf:params:scim:schemas:extension:awork.com:2.0:User:userRole 14. Click Save at the top and go back to the mapping 15. Add a new attribute for each extension you want to use 1. As the source attribute, we recommend saving the value as a text field on the Azure user as a custom field and selecting it here, e.g., awork user role. 2. Select the newly added extension field as the target, e.g., urn:ietf:params:scim:schemas:extension:awork.com:2.0:User:absenceRegion 3. Click Ok to add the new attribute mapping 15. Save the user mappings 16. Edit the settings 1. Enable "Prevent accidental deletion" if desired. This prevents many users from being deleted at once if, for example, the wrong group was removed. We recommend a number like 50, depending on your user count and typical group sizes. 2. Enable "Sync only assigned users and groups" 17. Set the Provisioning Status to On and save 18. Test provisioning for a single user 19. Go to the Provisioning tab of the Enterprise Application and click "Provision on demand" 20. Select a single user by email 21. Click Provision 22. Check the validation results. Your user fields should now be updated in awork. 23. Add the groups/users who should use the app. An additional license is needed for each new user make sure you have enough awork licenses booked. 24. Go to the Provisioning tab. Click Users and Groups and add the desired groups and users. Group assignments are only available with an Entra ID Premium P2 subscription. 25. Go to the Provisioning Overview and start the Provisioning Job. This runs every 40 minutes and synchronizes all changes between Entra ID and awork. Fields not included in the mapping won't be overwritten in awork. awork User Extension Attributes Examples Absence Regions Absence region must be a string field that matches the name of the absence region configured in awork. Note: The absence region cannot be removed via the SCIM integration, only updated. The name matching is case sensitive. User Roles The global user role for workspace wide permissions can be updated via the userRole extension. The user role name must match the configured name in awork. Note: The name matching is case sensitive. The guest role cannot be assigned. A user can only have one role at a time. There must always be at least one admin user. The user role cannot be removed. Set a default value here if needed, if you want to control which default permission a newly invited user should have. Troubleshooting Entra ID SCIM Sync If SCIM synchronization is not working as expected, you can go to Enterprise App Provisioning Overview and click View provisioning logs. There you'll find information about the synchronized users and properties. If there are problems, the status will be set to Failure. Click on the entry, go to Troubleshooting & Recommendations, and copy the error message. Then contact our support and send the error message so we can take a closer look. [!NOTE] For more information about the Entra ID side of SCIM integration, see the Microsoft Entra ID documentation: How Application Provisioning works in Microsoft Entra ID 3. Configure the mapping The awork user fields are mapped to the SCIM user resource. You can find a list of supported fields here: | SCIM Field | awork Field | awork Account | Note | | | | | | | SCIM user | awork user | awork account | | | | Id | | | | | Contact Infos (primary user email) | Email | This email is used to match the awork user/account with the SCIM user. | | | LastName | LastName | | | | FirstName | FirstName | | | | Title | | | | | Position | | | | | Language | | Currently only de DE or en GB are supported (other en or de prefixes are converted to en GB) | | | | Timezone | The IANA timezone information (https://www.iana.org/time zones) | | | User Deactivated | | | | SCIM User multi value attributes | | | | | | Contact Infos | | The first work email is set as the primary email. | | | Contact Infos | | | | | Contact Infos | | | | | Custom User Schema | | | | | User to Team assignment | | Comma separated list of team names. Case sensitive. | | | Absence Region of User | | Name of the user's absence region in awork. Case sensitive. | | userRole | Global permission role of the user | | Name of the global user role. Case sensitive. | | SCIM Group | awork User role | | | | | Id | | (not supported in Entra ID) | | | Name | | (not supported in Entra ID) | | | User to Role assignment | | (not supported in Entra ID) | If there are fields you want to synchronize that aren't listed here, please let us know. Note: awork offers its own extension for team assignments, absence regions, and user roles via the schema urn:ietf:params:scim:schemas:extension:awork.com:2.0:User. The mapping is done via the name of the team and absence region, so they must match exactly in awork and your SCIM provider. Note: awork user roles can be managed in two ways: either via the /Groups feature or the awork user extension. The awork user extension : For this, the extension attribute must be mapped to a text field of the user (or another field for SCIM sync) containing the name of the user role ( preferred ) With the SCIM /Groups feature : First, the available user roles must be synchronized. This is usually done manually by retrieving the available groups and mapping the groups based on defined rules. Note that an awork user can only have one user role at a time. So make sure you don't assign more than one role via group assignments, as this limitation is not directly supported by SCIM. If a role is renamed, a new role is added, or an existing role is deleted, you usually need to manually resynchronize the available groups. FAQ Can I create/update user roles via SCIM? No, you can only assign roles. To create or update permission roles in awork, go to Menu Settings Permissions . Can I update email addresses via SCIM? Yes, updating account emails and user contact emails is supported via SCIM. The account email used for login and SSO is updated via the userName attribute. Limitations: If the user is in more than one workspace, we don't allow changes to the account email and the user must manually change their email in the profile settings. If the email is already being used by another account, an error is returned. To use the email, the existing account must be deleted. This is done by deleting the user associated with that account. Can I synchronize profile pictures via SCIM? This is currently not supported by OneLogin and Okta providers. Therefore, we don't offer this functionality at the moment. What happens if I change the name of a permission role in awork? After you rename the permission roles in awork, you need to update the groups in your SCIM client so the correct names are displayed. The assignment shouldn't change because it's based on the user role's ID, not the display name. What can I do if my SCIM integration is not working as expected? Check the users who cannot be provisioned and look at the respective error messages. Send the Trace ID to our support team so we can check it for you. Make sure your client application is set up correctly and that the API Access element (entry in the list under integrations) is present. If not, delete the integration in awork and try setting it up again. Can guest users be synchronized via SCIM? Guest users cannot be created via the SCIM integration because when a user is created, the user role with the lowest permissions is automatically assigned, which is not the guest role. If the user already exists in awork, the role is not changed via the SCIM integration unless explicitly configured via the SCIM groups feature. Existing guest users can be synchronized via the SCIM integration, but the SCIM groups feature doesn't support assigning guest roles.
Salesforce Integration (Partner) Salesforce is a Customer Relationship Management (CRM) tool for managing relationships and interactions with existing and potential customers. It supports the integrat
Salesforce Integration (Partner) Salesforce is a Customer Relationship Management (CRM) tool for managing relationships and interactions with existing and potential customers. It supports the integration and automation of business areas like sales, customer service, and marketing. With Salesforce, you can store customer data centrally to work more efficiently. The solution is suitable for all kinds of users from small to large companies across various industries. [!WARNING] Note: This partner integration is provided via Aviando . Key Benefits and Use Cases Make your project management a better connected system: Keep your project data up to date by syncing information between Salesforce and awork. Simplify billing through a connected workflow between both systems. Automate workflows by syncing relevant project and time tracking data. What Data Gets Synced? The Salesforce integration for awork can sync the following data between the two systems. From Salesforce to awork: Projects Project members or users Time entries From awork to Salesforce: Projects Project members and their roles Project status Project templates Time tracking Setting Up the Integration 1. Open the awork + Salesforce integration page from Aviando. 2. Follow the instructions provided there to connect awork with Salesforce . FAQ What data gets synced from Salesforce to awork? From Salesforce to awork , you can sync projects , project members or users , as well as time entries . What data gets synced from awork to Salesforce? From awork to Salesforce , you can sync projects , project members and their roles , project status , project templates , as well as time tracking data . Where do I set up the integration? Use the Aviando integration page to find out how to connect awork with Salesforce .
Zapier Integration Use Zapier to connect awork with your other apps without having to manually copy and paste information back and forth. Key Benefits and Use Cases Send awork data to other apps whene
Zapier Integration Use Zapier to connect awork with your other apps without having to manually copy and paste information back and forth. Key Benefits and Use Cases Send awork data to other apps whenever something happens in awork (via Zapier triggers) Create items in awork from other apps (via Zapier actions) Cover additional use cases with webhooks if the standard Zapier integration doesn't offer what you need [!NOTE] Automated workflows in Zapier are called "Zaps" and consist of a trigger and an action. How the awork Zapier App Works There's a dedicated awork app in Zapier with pre built triggers and actions. [!NOTE] Trigger = something that happens in awork (example: a new time entry). Action = something Zapier does in awork (example: create a task in awork). Available triggers and actions: Triggers New task created New time logged Time entry updated Actions Create new project Create new company Create new project task Create new customer How to Set Up Your Own Zap In Zapier, an automated workflow made up of a trigger and an action is called a "Zap". Create Your First Zap from awork 1. Go to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Integrations in awork 2. Open the Integration Library and select Zapier from the API Connectors category 3. Click Set up Integration to be taken to Zapier 4. Create a Zapier account (Zapier offers a free version with the basic features you'll need). You can sign up with your email or Google account 5. Follow the setup process in Zapier and select your apps 6. In the Zapier editor, awork is already set up as a Zap connection. Click the gray plus icon to add the app you want to connect with awork 7. Select the trigger and action events between awork and the other app 8. Click Continue and sign in to your app accounts when prompted 9. Confirm the setup and test it in Zapier 10. Give your Zap a name and set it to Publish How to Set Up Zapier Using awork Webhooks If you want to send information from awork that isn't available by default in the awork Zapier app, use Zapier's webhooks integration. Create a "Catch Hook" Trigger in Zapier 1. Go to zapier.com and select Webhooks as your trigger 2. Choose Catch Hook 3. Copy the URL that Zapier displays 4. Enter this URL into a webhook in awork. You'll find instructions for this here 5. Add a filter in Zapier to specify what should trigger your Zap, for example the task status 6. Continue with the Zap setup as described in the section above FAQ What is Zapier used for with awork? Zapier helps you integrate awork with other tools. This way you can send information from awork to other applications or use information from other applications in awork. What triggers and actions are available in the awork Zapier app? Triggers: New task created, New time logged, Time entry updated. Actions: Create new project, Create new company, Create new project task, Create new customer. Where do I start the Zapier setup in awork? Go to Settings Integrations , open the Integration Library , select Zapier under API Connectors , and then click Set up Integration to open Zapier. When should I use Zapier webhooks instead of the awork Zapier app? Use Zapier's webhooks integration when you want to send information from awork that isn't available as a standard trigger or action in the awork Zapier app.
Make Integration With the awork modules in Make , you can trigger actions in other apps from awork or get triggered by them. This way, you can design your workflows exactly the way you need them. Key
Make Integration With the awork modules in Make , you can trigger actions in other apps from awork or get triggered by them. This way, you can design your workflows exactly the way you need them. Key benefits and use cases Use Make to create workflow automations with the following awork modules: Projects: Create, update, retrieve, and delete Companies: Monitor, create, update, retrieve, and delete Time entries: Monitor, create, update, retrieve, and delete How to connect awork with Make You'll first set up API access in awork and then create a connection in Make. Setting up API access in awork 1. Make sure you have both an awork and a Make account 2. In your awork workspace, go to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) and select Integrations 3. In the API clients section, click + API Client to create a new client Enter the following information and click Save : Name: Any name with at least 6 characters Client ID: Enter the Client ID in the format my app (for example, ) Redirect URI: Add and and click + Add for each one Enable Confidential Client [!NOTE] Important: After saving, a pop up will display your new Client Secret . Copy it and keep it in a safe place. Setting up a scenario and module in Make 1. Open the Make web app and log in 2. Open Scenarios and click + Create a new scenario 3. Click the plus icon to add an awork module to your scenario Creating a connection to your awork workspace In the module, click Add next to the Connection field. Enter the following information and save the connection: Connection name: Any name (doesn't need to match the name of the API client in awork) Client ID: The Client ID from awork Client Secret: The Client Secret you previously copied from awork Authorize the connection Authorize the Make app to access your awork account. 1. Grant permission in the new window on make.com for permanent unrestricted access 2. Select your awork workspace to proceed Once the connection is successfully verified, you can create cross app workflows. Best practices and next steps Keep your Client Secret safe: Copy it from the pop up and store it in a secure location Start with a simple scenario: For example, send a message to a specific Slack channel when certain tasks change [!NOTE] Tip: You can find more support and examples in the Make Help Center. FAQ What is Make? Make is a no code platform for workflow automation that lets you visually create, manage, and automate workflows between different apps. Where do I set up API access in awork? In your awork workspace, go to Settings Integrations and click + API Client in the API clients section to create a new client. What Redirect URIs do I need to connect with Make? Add the following Redirect URIs in awork: and Where do I find the Client Secret? After you click Save when creating the API client in awork, a pop up will appear with your new Client Secret . Copy it and keep it in a safe place. Where can I find more examples for awork modules in Make? You can find more support and examples in the Make Help Center.
Client Applications and API Keys Use Client Applications and API Keys to authenticate yourself with the public awork API whether you want to build your own app, create an integration, or connect Busin
Client Applications and API Keys Use Client Applications and API Keys to authenticate yourself with the public awork API whether you want to build your own app, create an integration, or connect Business Intelligence tools (BI/Analytics). [!WARNING] Important: Since the awork API is public, you need to authenticate yourself accordingly. Main Benefits and Use Cases Choose the authentication method that fits your use case: User login with user permissions for apps where each person logs in with their own awork account and their respective permissions are applied API Key without user reference (admin rights) for analytics, integrations, and similar use cases where user login isn't required Develop custom apps and integrations based on the awork API the same foundation that powers the web app itself How to Use Client Applications and API Keys awork supports two common approaches pick the one that matches your scenario. Create a Client Application for User Login (OAuth 2.0) Use this option when you want users to log in with their own awork account in your app or integration. [!NOTE] Tip: User login is the right choice when you want to apply user permission management (via OAuth 2.0). 1. Navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) 2. Open the Integrations section and go to API Clients 3. Click on + API Client 4. Enter a Name and Client ID (this ID must be unique) 5. Add a Redirect URL (see Developer Resources for details) 6. Click Save 7. After saving, copy the Client Secret and store it securely 8. Use the Client ID and Client Secret to implement your OAuth 2.0 login so users can authenticate with their awork account Find more information about OAuth 2.0 login in the Developer Resources. Create an API Key Without User Authentication Use this option when you only need an API Key to query data or operate an integration that doesn't require user login. 1. Navigate to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) 2. Open the Integrations section and go to API clients 3. Click on + API Client to create a new Client Application 4. Give it a Name and Client ID (this ID must be unique) 5. Click Save 6. Select your new application from the list of Client Applications 7. Click the three dot icon and select Manage API Keys 8. Click + to add a new API Key 9. Click the small key icon on the right side to copy the API Key 10. Store the API Key securely and use it for your integration or data queries Check out the Developer Resources to learn more about using your API Key. [!WARNING] Note: In this scenario, the Redirect URL is not relevant since only the API Key is needed. [!NOTE] For details on creating an API Key without user reference that has admin rights, see Authentication: API key . Best Practices and Support Store Secrets and API Keys securely after copying them Use a unique Client ID when creating a Client Application Use the Developer Resources for details on implementing OAuth 2.0 and API Keys FAQ What's the difference between a Client Application and an API Key? A Client Application is created in awork to enable authentication. Depending on your use case, it can be used for user login (OAuth 2.0) or to generate an API Key for data queries and integrations. When should I use user login (OAuth 2.0)? Use it when you want users to log in with their own awork account and you want to apply user permission management . Do I need a Redirect URL? For user login (OAuth 2.0) , you must add a Redirect URL (see Developer Resources for details). If you only need an API Key , the Redirect URL is not relevant. What are Client ID and Client Secret? When you create a Client Application, you set a unique Client ID . After saving the application, you'll receive the Client Secret , which you should copy and store securely. Where do I create Client Applications in awork? Go to Settings → Integrations and scroll to API clients . Where can I learn more about API authentication? Check out the Developer Resources. Find specific information about API Keys under Authentication: API key.
Webhooks Webhooks are custom HTTP callbacks for events that happen in awork. Main benefits and use cases Notify external tools about changes, for example when a task is created or a project status is
Webhooks Webhooks are custom HTTP callbacks for events that happen in awork. Main benefits and use cases Notify external tools about changes, for example when a task is created or a project status is updated Call other APIs for specific events (for example when a new task or time entry is created) Create automations or synchronizations so you and your team can share data and collaborate across different tools Develop custom integrations using webhooks and our API How to set up a new webhook You'll need a webhook endpoint first so you can receive and verify the webhook request. Create a webhook endpoint Use a tool (for example Requestbin) to create a webhook endpoint Copy the endpoint's URL Add the webhook in awork Go to Settings (gear icon at the bottom left of the main menu) Integrations Open the Integration library Under the API connectors category, select Webhooks Click Set up integration Enter details, select an event, and test Enter the required information like name and URL Enable authentication if needed In the Triggering event(s) section, click Add to select the awork event that should trigger your webhook Disable Only events from first level properties if needed: By default, only first level events are sent for task, project, and time entry properties. Changes to nested properties (like tags) are ignored. This can significantly reduce the number of webhook requests. Test the webhook and check the received request in your endpoint tool Click Save Manage existing webhooks All webhooks are displayed on the integrations page under Already integrated . From there, you can: Edit a webhook Pause a webhook Check the logs of a webhook Delete a webhook Best practices and resources Check out these additional resources: Developer Resources at developers.awork.com Ask API questions in our Developer Forum [!NOTE] Tip: If you want to create integrations without coding, try Zapier. With the awork Zapier integration, you can create projects and tasks or transfer tracked time from awork to other tools. FAQ What are webhooks in awork? Webhooks notify external tools about changes in awork, for example when a task is created or a project status is updated. What can I create with webhooks? You can call other APIs for specific events (for example when a new task or time entry is created) to build automations or synchronizations. Where do I configure webhooks in awork? Go to Settings Integrations , open the Integration library , and select Webhooks . Where can I see and manage existing webhooks? You'll find them under Already integrated on the integrations page. From there, you can edit, pause, delete webhooks or check logs. Can I use something else instead of webhooks? Yes. Alternatively, you can use Zapier. With it, you can integrate tools without writing code yourself.
Filestage Integration What is Filestage? Filestage is a review and approval tool specifically designed for marketing assets. It organizes versions, feedback, and approvals for marketing projects and s
Filestage Integration What is Filestage? Filestage is a review and approval tool specifically designed for marketing assets. It organizes versions, feedback, and approvals for marketing projects and supports annotations in many different file formats from PDFs to websites to videos. What can the awork Filestage Integration do? The integration between awork and Filestage enables three main functions: Link an awork project with a Filestage project Start new reviews in Filestage by uploading a file in awork Sync the review status from Filestage back to awork How do I set up the awork Filestage Integration? 1. Create an API key in awork Create an API key in awork following this guide (API key without user authentication). 2. Create an API key in Filestage Create an API key in Filestage following this guide. 3. Activate the integration With both keys, you can fill out the awork Filestage setup form to activate the integration in your workspace. How does the integration work once it's set up? Activate the integration for a project The awork Filestage integration is project specific and needs to be activated individually for each awork project. After setup, a new custom field called "Enable Filestage Integration" appears in awork. When you activate this toggle: A Filestage project is automatically created with the same name as your awork project. The link to the Filestage project is stored in the "Filestage Link" field. The project in Filestage is created in a folder with the customer name (if set in awork). If no customer is set in awork, the "Internal awork projects" folder is used. Project members in awork are added as reviewers in Filestage if they already have an account there with the same email address. Once these steps are complete, the Filestage integration is active. Can I link existing Filestage projects with awork? Yes, you can connect existing projects. Here's how: 1. Insert the link: Copy the link to your Filestage project and paste it into the "Filestage Link" field in your awork project. 2. Activate the integration: Turn on the "Enable Filestage Integration" toggle. 3. Add fields manually: Open your awork project settings and add the custom task fields ( Filestage Link , Filestage Status , Filestage Review ). Note: Existing reviews are not automatically linked. New reviews that you start from this awork project going forward will appear in the connected Filestage project. How do I start a new review in Filestage? To start a new review: 1. Activate Filestage Review: Turn on the "Filestage Review" toggle in the task (this is only visible if the integration is enabled for the project). 2. Upload a file: Upload a file to the task. 3. Automatic review start: A review is automatically started in Filestage. Once the upload is complete, the direct link to the Filestage review appears in the "Filestage Link" field. In Filestage, an internal team comment is added with the link to the awork task. Important: This process is only triggered for the first file added to an awork task. If a file is already in the task, that file will be used, regardless of whether you activate the toggle first or upload the file first. Can I include an existing review process from Filestage in awork? No, currently only reviews started in awork are supported . Existing Filestage reviews cannot be synced retroactively. What happens when a review is started? The "Filestage Status" field is automatically updated and shows the current overall status of the review: Open Under Review Needs Changes Approved For each review stage/group in Filestage, a checklist item is automatically created in awork. Once the group approves the file, the corresponding item is checked off. Comments in awork: Status updates from Filestage appear as comments in the awork task. If changes are requested, the change report is automatically attached to the comment. Are there delays in synchronization? Yes, especially with large files, it can take up to 30 seconds (or longer) for status changes from Filestage to show up in awork. Can I extend the integration with automations in awork? Yes, you can enhance the integration through automations in awork. For example: If all checklist items are checked off (meaning all review steps are complete), you could automatically: Set the task status to "Review successful" Move the task to a different list Set a new due date Trigger other processes
Slack Integration Slack is a popular tool for team collaboration and communication across different channels. With the Slack integration for awork, you can publish project updates to channels, create
Slack Integration Slack is a popular tool for team collaboration and communication across different channels. With the Slack integration for awork, you can publish project updates to channels, create awork tasks directly from Slack, and much more. Key Benefits and Use Cases Bring your project work closer to where communication happens: Publish project updates to Slack channels when events occur in a linked awork project Create tasks directly from Slack in the project that's connected to the channel Manage tasks from Slack notifications using buttons in the task message Log time from Slack with Slash Commands Receive awork notifications in Slack through the awork app within Slack How the Slack Integration Works Setting Up the Slack Integration 1. Go to Settings (gear icon in the bottom left of the main menu) Integrations 2. Open the integration library and select Slack 3. Enter your Slack workspace name in Slack and allow access 4. You'll automatically be redirected back to your awork workspace Linking Your Slack Account to Your awork Account You can send project updates to Slack without account matching. However, if you want to interact with awork from Slack, you'll need to link your accounts. Interact with the integration in Slack for the first time and follow the account linking prompt Or type /connect in Slack to link your Slack account with your awork account [!NOTE] Tip: awork messages in Slack are sent in the language of the person who created the link. Linking an awork Project to a Slack Channel When a project is linked to a Slack channel, awork can publish project events and updates (like task status changes) to that channel. You can also create tasks for the project directly from the Slack channel. Setting Up the Project and Slack Channel Link 1. Open the project details 2. Click the project action button and select Link to Slack 3. Choose the Slack channel where messages should be published 4. Set which events should be published to the Slack channel The linked Slack channel will be displayed in the project details. [!WARNING] Note: Each Slack channel can only be linked to one awork project. Similarly, only one Slack channel can be linked per project. Linking a Private Slack Channel Private Slack channels can only be linked directly within the channel itself. 1. Open the private Slack channel you want to link 2. Invite the awork bot by typing @awork in the channel and confirm the invitation 3. Type /link to open the project selection 4. Select the awork project you want to link to the channel To remove the link from a private channel, use /unlink . Notification settings can be configured in the awork project. Managing Tasks from Slack When a task notification appears in Slack, you can manage the task directly from Slack. Using the buttons below the task message, you can: Change the status Assign a person Set a due date Add a comment to the task Creating Tasks and Logging Time from Slack (Slash Commands) To perform actions in awork directly from Slack, you can use the following Slash Commands: /add [Task] creates a new task in the awork project /comment [Task]:[Text] creates a comment on the specified task /connect links your Slack account to your awork account /disconnect unlinks your Slack account from your awork account /link [Project] links an awork project to the current Slack channel /start [Task/Project] starts time tracking for a task or project /stop stops the current time tracking /unlink removes the link between the awork project and Slack channel Example: Post /add Create logo design in Slack to create a task named "Create logo design" in the linked project. Receiving awork Notifications in Slack After you've linked your Slack account to your awork account, you'll find awork in Slack under Apps . Your awork notifications can be displayed there once you configure this in awork. You can also use all / commands there, create private tasks, or start time tracking. FAQ How do I set up the Slack integration? Go to Settings Integrations , open the integration library, select Slack , and then enter your Slack workspace name. Allow access when you're redirected to Slack. How do I link my Slack account to my awork account? You'll be prompted to do this the first time you interact with the integration in Slack. Alternatively, you can type /connect in Slack. Why are awork messages displayed in a specific language in Slack? Messages from awork are sent in the language of the person who created the link. Can I link multiple Slack channels to one awork project (or one channel to multiple projects)? No. Each Slack channel can only be linked to one awork project, and only one Slack channel can be linked per project. How do I link a private Slack channel? Open the private channel in Slack, invite the bot with @awork and confirm the invitation. Then use /link to select the project. To disconnect, use /unlink .
Integration with Microsoft Teams The Microsoft Teams integration lets you keep your project communication where it happens, while staying connected to awork. Key benefits and use cases Publish project
Integration with Microsoft Teams The Microsoft Teams integration lets you keep your project communication where it happens, while staying connected to awork. Key benefits and use cases Publish project updates in Microsoft Teams channels Create tasks in awork directly from Teams using @ commands Add comments to tasks straight from Teams Start and stop time tracking for tasks or projects Setting up the Microsoft Teams integration You'll install the awork app in Microsoft Teams, connect your tenant to your awork workspace, and then link a project to a channel. Installing awork in Microsoft Teams 1. Go to Apps in Microsoft Teams (left menu) 2. Search for awork 3. Click Add 4. Click Add to a team in the pop up 5. Select your team and then click Set up bot After setup, you'll get a welcome message from the awork bot in the team you selected. Connecting your Teams tenant to your awork workspace To connect your Microsoft Teams tenant to your awork workspace, run any awork bot command in Teams. When the awork bot gets a command from a tenant that isn't connected yet, it'll respond with a link to connect your workspace. 1. Run any awork bot command in Teams 2. Open the link from the bot's response 3. Sign in on the login page 4. After you've signed in successfully, close the tab and go back to Microsoft Teams Linking an awork project to a Teams channel To get notifications from a project or assign tasks and time entries to a project directly, you need to link a project with the channel. 1. Run @awork link in the Teams channel 2. Open the link from the bot's response 3. Select an awork project from your workspace 4. Click Save 5. Close the tab and go back to Teams After saving, you should get a notification in Teams confirming the connection was successful. Creating tasks and tracking time in Microsoft Teams Once your channel is linked to a project, you can use awork directly in Teams through @ commands. awork bot @ commands for Microsoft Teams Create a task with @awork add [task] Add a comment to a task with @awork comment [task]:[text] Start time tracking with @awork start [task/project] Stop time tracking with @awork stop See all available options with @awork help Link a project to the channel with @awork link Get a link to project settings with @awork settings Example: Type @awork add Create logo design in Teams to create the task Create logo design in the linked project, or as a private task if no project is linked. [!NOTE] Tip: To remove the link between an awork project and a Teams channel, use @awork unlink . Best practices and settings Adjusting a project's notification settings You can adjust the notification settings directly in your awork project under Settings Integrations . To get a link to the project settings for the project linked to a channel, run @awork settings in Teams. FAQ What can the Microsoft Teams integration do? It can publish updates from your awork projects in Microsoft Teams channels and lets you create tasks, comments, and time entries in awork straight from Teams. How do I install awork in Microsoft Teams? Go to Apps in Teams, search for awork , click Add , then select Add to a team and click Set up bot . How do I connect my Teams tenant to my awork workspace? Run any awork bot command. If your tenant isn't connected yet, the bot will respond with a link. Sign in, close the tab, and go back to Teams. How do I link an awork project to a Teams channel? Run @awork link in the channel, open the link from the bot's response, select the project in the new tab, and click Save . What happens if I create a task when no project is linked? The task will be created as a private task if no project is linked.
awork Desktop App (macOS & Windows) With the awork desktop app, you can use awork conveniently on your computer without having to open your browser. The app is exactly the same application that you al
awork Desktop App (macOS & Windows) With the awork desktop app, you can use awork conveniently on your computer without having to open your browser. The app is exactly the same application that you already know from the browser. Supported operating systems are Windows 10, Windows 11 (recommended), and macOS 13 (Ventura) on both Intel and Apple Silicon devices. See also the System Requirements for further details. Download & Installation Download You can find the download links for the awork desktop app here on our website. Installation Windows After downloading the application, double click on awork.exe. You'll be guided through the installation process. After that, you'll find awork in your Start menu. macOS [!WARNING] The macOS app comes in two versions: One for Intel x64 processors and one for Apple M processors (since 2020). Make sure you download the correct version to avoid performance issues. After downloading the application, double click on the awork.dmg file. A window will open as shown below. Drag the awork app (on the left) into the Applications folder (on the right). The app is now installed. When you open the Applications section in Finder, you'll find the awork app there. You can simply drag it to your macOS Dock to have awork always at your fingertips. When you start the application for the first time, you'll need to confirm once that you want to launch the application on your device. Notifications When you start the application for the first time, awork will ask if you want to allow notifications for awork. It's recommended that you enable this. Once the application is running but in the background, you'll receive your in app notifications through the operating system. These will automatically be suppressed as soon as you enter Focus Mode, for example. When the app is in the foreground, meaning you're working in it, you'll receive notifications as usual within awork itself. The same applies if you've enabled Focus Mode. You can also enable or disable your notifications later in your operating system under Settings Notifications. Opening Links in the Desktop App Once you've logged into the awork app for the first time, awork remembers that you've installed it. When you open a link, for example from an email, you'll first be directed to awork in your browser. A small popup will appear at the top right of the window asking if you want to open the page in the desktop app. Click the button to do so. You may need to confirm opening the app in your browser once. If you always want to open your links in the desktop app, simply enable the small switch in the popup. Once you've enabled this and open a link, you'll be taken to an almost empty awork page and will need to confirm opening the application once. However, from this page you can also navigate to the actual page via the "Open in Browser" link without using the desktop app. If you want to disable the default opening of the desktop app for links, you can do so on the page mentioned above using the switch, or in your account settings. Tabs The awork app supports working with tabs. These are displayed in the tab bar of the app window. To open a new tab, click the plus symbol at the far left of the tab bar. You can also open a page, project, or other links in new tabs directly by holding down CMD (Mac) or CTRL (Windows) while clicking. You can change the order of open tabs as you like. To move a tab, hold it with the mouse button pressed and move it left or right. To close a tab, hover your mouse over the tab and click the X. Tabs support common shortcuts such as: Create new tab (CMD/CTRL + T) Close active tab (CMD/CTRL + W) Refresh tabs (CMD/CTRL + R) Copy link of tab (CMD/CTRL + L) Updates The desktop app automatically checks once a day to see if new updates are available. As soon as a new app update is available, it's recommended that you perform it. However, these updates come less frequently. More often, you'll receive a notification within the application that a new awork version is available. When you click on the notification, awork reloads and you're up to date. Offline Use The awork desktop app does not have offline functionality. awork is a collaborative application that always requires a connection to the awork servers so that data is always current. FAQ The app isn't working, what should I do? Please first check that you have the latest version of the app installed and close it via the Task Manager, Activity Monitor, or similar. When you restart, an update should be triggered if one is available and hasn't already happened automatically. Is there also a mobile app? Yes, you can install our mobile app on iOS and Android devices via the App Store or Play Store. Here you'll find more information about the mobile app.
Bring together the coordination of your projects, tasks, and your team with the awork Planner. It lets you plan your work in detail or at a high level over time, taking into account your team's capaci
Bring together the coordination of your projects, tasks, and your team with the awork Planner. It lets you plan your work in detail or at a high level over time, taking into account your team's capacity and availability for the coming days, weeks, and months. The Timeline View The Project View The first view in the Planner is the project view. Here you see an overview of all your projects. On the left side, you'll find a list of all projects. On the right side, you see the projects in the timeline, provided the project's start and end dates are set. The project list offers options for searching, filtering, sorting, grouping, as well as showing and hiding project columns. By clicking on a project, you can open the task timeline for that project, or jump to the user workload view of the project team. You can also navigate to the project details page from here. When you do, you'll leave the Planner. When you open the task timeline or the user workload of the project, you can always go back to the overview by closing the selected project at the top left. In the timeline, you can easily move entire projects by grabbing them and dragging them to your desired date with drag and drop. When you're in the project overview, all projects are always displayed. You can use the project filter to select specific projects or choose a team if you only want to see certain projects. The view remembers what you last selected here. The Task Timeline The task timeline has the same features as the timeline you already know from projects. You can find a detailed description of how the task timeline works in the following article: Project planning in the timeline The User View The second tab of the Planner is the user view. Here you see the workload of users based on your selected filter. It gives you an overview of your team's utilization. If no filter is set, only your own user is displayed. When you open a project in the overview and then switch to the user view, only users who have been added to the project are shown. You can find a detailed description of how to work with the workload view here: Workload overview The Planner Checklist The Planner checklist supports you in the planning process. When you generate it, awork automatically searches your data for items you should check, for example upcoming project and task deadlines, milestones, absences, and overbooked team members. In the settings (top right), you can set the time period, for example the next 7 days. The checklist only considers data that matches your current project filter. Clicking on an entry takes you directly to the corresponding spot in the timeline. Checked off items remain as long as you generate the checklist again for the same time period. If the time period is outdated, a new list is generated. The checklist is individual to each user and only applies to you, based on your own filters. Task filter as a checklist entry: In the checklist settings, you can optionally add task filters as well. You'll see a checklist entry for each filter. This way, you can set up specific filters that you always want to check when scheduling tasks. The Task Sidebar The task sidebar can be shown on the left side of the Planner in the user view (for a project or in the main view). There are three standard filters : New : Tasks that were assigned to you or created for you within the last 7 days Mine : All tasks assigned to you (private and from projects) Private : Your private tasks Below that is the list of your currently active projects . The last section contains your task filters, which you can also view and edit in the main menu item Task Filters . Clicking on any of these sections loads the corresponding tasks. Use the arrow at the top left to go back to the overview. Show completed tasks Completed tasks are initially hidden since they usually don't need to be scheduled anymore. You can show them in the list at any time using the icon with two checkmarks. Show already scheduled tasks Already scheduled tasks are automatically hidden in the list. Using the icon with the checkbox, you can show the hidden (already scheduled) tasks in the list again. You can identify them by the purple checkbox in the list. "Scheduled" in the timeline view means that the tasks have start and end dates and are therefore already visible in the timeline. Group, sort, and search the task list The task list can be grouped, sorted, and searched using the icons above the list. However, this only works for filters. When you open a project in the sidebar, it's automatically grouped and sorted by default the same way you know it from the project itself. Availability in user selection When you use the Planner and the workload view, you also have the option to see the availability of users within a time period when selecting users, assigning them to tasks, or making bookings. To do this, click the Availability button at the top right of the selection popup. The availability is then loaded for the displayed people and shown in the form of a bar. The default time period corresponds to that of the task or the booking. If the task only has an end date, that day is considered. If no date is set, availability is checked for the current week. You can adjust the availability and the planned value in the selection field to search for other time periods if needed. However, changing this value does not affect the task or the booking. [!WARNING] Note : To view availability, you need read access to user planning. FAQ Can I open a project in the Planner? When you go to a project and navigate to Tasks Timeline , you can jump directly to the Planner using the Planner button at the top right. The project and project members are immediately preselected. Can I adjust my weekly working hours in the Planner? Yes! You can change your weekly working hours not only through your account settings, but also directly in the Planner through the workload view. Simply click on the displayed total of your working hours and adjust the hours to the desired amount. You can also adjust the holiday region here.
🔐 The Workload section is available from the Standard Plan onwards. The Workload Overview shows you your team's capacity utilization across a timeline. The utilization is calculated intelligently bas
🔐 The Workload section is available from the Standard Plan onwards. The Workload Overview shows you your team's capacity utilization across a timeline. The utilization is calculated intelligently based on planned tasks, bookings, and appointments, taking into account the time already logged for tasks. The Workload view always starts with today and only looks ahead into the future. This is for two important reasons: 1. Only currently open tasks and projects are considered. Looking at the past quickly becomes distorted once tasks and projects are completed. 2. Remaining effort on tasks is pushed into the future (from today until the task's end date). Today always plays an important role in how the remaining effort is distributed across the time period. You can learn more about this here. [!WARNING] Important: Even if a task has no planned effort, it will still be displayed here in the Workload within the Planner. The task will generally be shown, but won't be included in the Workload calculation. The Workload Overview and Its Features How to Access the Workload Overview Open the Planner from the main menu and select the "User" view. Selecting Which Users to Display Which users you want to see in the Workload Overview often depends on your use case. First, set a filter. If no filter is set here, only your own user will be displayed. Simply change the filter using the filter button in the upper area of the User sidebar. You can choose from three different selection options and combine them as you like: 1. Select individual users 2. Select teams (all users in the team) 3. Tags (all users from the previous filters who also have one of the selected tags) [!NOTE] Tip: Tags are excellent for skill management. Maintain your users' tags so you can filter by them in the Planner or search for them when assigning tasks. Weekly Working Hours / Available Capacity The dashed line in the Workload chart represents the available capacity of your users. The capacity can be specified for each weekday from 0 12 hours. 0 hours means the person is not working that day. The number next to the user's name shows the total weekly working hours. Planned time from tasks and bookings is distributed proportionally across the available days based on the working hours for each day. Managing Regional Holidays You can adjust the holiday region for your users directly in the Planner by clicking on the value showing weekly working hours next to the person in the User view. [!NOTE] Tip: Learn more about regional holidays and absences in this article. Capacity Planning Checking Available Capacity for a Specific Time Period for Users or User Groups To check the capacity for a specific time period in the Workload Overview, you can simply hover over a date and drag your mouse to mark a time range in the Planner. [!WARNING] Important: Grab the drag button directly under the date, as shown in the video. Now the available capacity for each user during that time period will be displayed. The total capacity for your selected users is also shown, taking into account your overbookings, tasks, and absences. [!NOTE] Tip: By clicking the Sort by Availability button, you can sort your users' free capacity by availability. Displaying Tasks, Bookings, and Appointments for Users To get more information about which projects, tasks, bookings, and appointments are scheduled for a user and affecting their workload, hover your mouse over the respective day in the Workload chart. [!NOTE] Note: Tasks in the Workload section are displayed alphabetically and thus independently of the project. Here you'll see how the workload for that day is composed. Another way is to expand the user row by clicking the small arrow button. When expanded, you'll see all absences, tasks, and bookings scheduled for that user (with start and end times). Appointments and tasks entered in the calendar are not visible in this view. By clicking on the respective day in the Workload chart, you'll navigate to that selected day in the Planner view. Absences Through the Workload chart, you also get information about when your users have planned absences. Learn more about this here. Click and Drag to Create New Tasks, Bookings, and Absences Use the familiar click and drag in a user's row to create new entries. You can easily move or extend existing entries. View Settings Click the settings button in the upper right of the User view in the Planner to open a popup with a few view options. Here you can make the following adjustments: Show Workload: Show or hide the Workload charts (🔐 available from the Standard Plan onwards). If you hide the Workload, all users are automatically expanded. Show Completed Tasks: Completed tasks are displayed in the timeline (User view). Show Tasks from Completed Projects: Tasks from completed projects are displayed in the timeline (User view). Show Recurring Tasks: Recurring tasks are displayed in the timeline (User view). These settings only apply to your own user and have no impact on the Workload calculation. Multi Edit in the Timeline You can enable multi editing of tasks and bookings using the cursor button in the upper right of the Planner, and the timeline enters selection mode. You'll know it's active when the cursor button is now expanded and shows some options and the number of currently selected timeline entries. When selection mode is active, you can mark tasks and bookings by simply clicking them. In this mode, you can't open tasks or extend/shorten them since clicking selects them (indicated by a blue border). When you move a task or booking, all selected tasks are automatically moved in the same direction and by the same time period. In the task timeline, you can also move the vertical position of multiple tasks. Additional functions are available to you: Autofix: Autofix is an AI function that moves and optimizes the duration of selected tasks in the timeline so they fit into the Workload without causing overbooking. The AI tries to keep the element as close as possible to its current location. If multiple elements are selected, they're scheduled one after another, with the earliest element first. This function is currently only available for elements with a single assignee. If the AI can't find an optimal solution, the element remains in its original position. In the Actions menu (3 dots), you'll find additional options: Edit with AI: A small popup opens where you can enter a prompt to move the selected elements in the timeline. For example, to move them to next month, etc. [!WARNING] Note: Multi editing is only available in the Planner for the User view and the task timeline of a project, not in the Project Overview. Color Coding by Projects You can assign a color to projects. You do this through the actions menu of a project (the 3 dots), for example in the timeline or in the task sidebar in the Planner. Tasks and bookings are displayed in the Workload timeline with a border in this color. This allows you to better distinguish between different entries or recognize them as belonging together. FAQ Why isn't a task or booking showing up? This can happen if, for example, you don't have permission to view the task or its associated project. Another reason might be that the project has already been completed or cancelled. Tasks and bookings from these projects are no longer displayed in the Workload timeline and are not included in the calculation.
Workload calculation in awork is the most accurate calculation you can currently find in a work management tool, since it takes your planning, project management, and calendars into account. 🙌 Sure,
Workload calculation in awork is the most accurate calculation you can currently find in a work management tool, since it takes your planning, project management, and calendars into account. 🙌 Sure, there are always special cases and edge cases that aren't covered yet, but we're actively working on improving the planning step by step. 🔐 Workload calculation is available starting with the Standard plan. The 10 Principles of Workload Calculation 1. Future Only The workload view only looks at today and the future. The past cannot be represented through completed tasks and projects or by pushing remaining planned effort into the future. 2. Nested Planning Levels There are two planning levels: Tasks and bookings in the timeline (rough) Tasks in the calendar (detailed) These planning levels are nested and work great together without causing double counting. This means concretely: if a user is assigned 6 hours to a task and that task is entered for 3 hours in the calendar, only 6 hours total will be recorded in the workload. 3. Calendar Always Counts Everything in your calendar (appointments and tasks in the calendar) is directly counted as workload. [!WARNING] Out of Office Entries: If the option "Load out of office entries and treat as absence" is enabled in the calendar integration settings, out of office entries from external calendars will be considered as absences and reduce the available capacity in the workload. The total duration of out of office time per day is displayed in the workload detail view. 4. Even Distribution The planned effort from bookings and tasks is distributed evenly across the available days within their time range. When available capacity varies on different weekdays, the even distribution adjusts proportionally accordingly. Tasks in the calendar only affect the day they start on (start time). Tasks without a time range (start and end time) have no direct impact on the workload. 5. Workload Doesn't Reduce Automatically (Tasks) The workload from tasks (not bookings!) is pushed into the future when the start and end dates are around today. The planned effort doesn't disappear just because time passes (see the following points). For bookings, however, this doesn't apply. They remain on the days even if those days are in the past. 6. Time Tracking Gets Deducted To accurately show the progress of a task, the evenly distributed workload is reduced by the tracked time. To avoid double deduction through tasks that might exist in the calendar (which are also deducted), calendar entries from the past are ignored and only the actual tracked time is deducted. If no time is tracked on a task, calendar entries always flow into the workload calculation. 7. Completed Tasks and Projects Completed projects set the workload from tasks and bookings to 0. The same applies to completed tasks. Their impact on the workload is also always 0. Projects that haven't started yet and their tasks, however, do count (since it makes sense to include them in planning already). [!NOTE] Tip: You can use the "Show completed" button to control whether you want to show or hide completed tasks in the workload area. 8. Planned Effort is Distributed Evenly Across Assignees When multiple users are assigned to a task, the remaining workload (after tasks in the calendar, tracked time, etc. have already been deducted) is distributed evenly among all of them. 9. Absences Reduce Available Days An absence removes available work days (only full days). These days are skipped when distributing the planned effort from projects and tasks, similar to weekends. However, appointments and tasks in the calendar that fall on absent days are still shown as workload allocation on those days. Half day absences reduce the workload on that day by half. You can learn more about absences here. 10. Overlapping Calendar Entries Aren't Counted Twice When multiple appointments and/or tasks in the calendar overlap, meaning their times intersect, only the hours covered on that day are counted as workload.
What are Bookings? Similar to tasks, bookings schedule a user for a project over a selected time period. However, they're much simpler and faster to create than tasks. This makes "painting" allocation
What are Bookings? Similar to tasks, bookings schedule a user for a project over a selected time period. However, they're much simpler and faster to create than tasks. This makes "painting" allocations super easy and quick. A booking always consists of a user, a project, and a planned effort value. You can also optionally add a note, which is helpful, for example, if you want to block off time but aren't quite sure yet whether the job will actually happen in that period. Creating, editing, and removing bookings You can create bookings in the timeline (in a project or workload overview) simply by clicking and dragging. The pre filled planned effort always corresponds to the user's full capacity during that time period. You can move bookings, extend them, shorten them, or edit them by clicking on the element. You can also create tasks from bookings by clicking the small icon on the right edge of the booking when you hover your mouse over the element. You delete bookings using the small X icon in the upper right corner of the element, which appears when you hover your mouse over it. Bookings within a project Within a project, you can create bookings in the timeline by clicking and dragging, just like tasks. The project is assigned automatically here, and you only need to set the user and the planned effort. Bookings in the workload view In the workload timeline, you can also create bookings by clicking and dragging. Since you're always in a user's row here, you only need to specify the project and the planned effort. Impact on workload through bookings The planned effort specified for a booking is distributed evenly across the available days for the user in that time period. If working hours vary between days, the distribution adjusts proportionally. Unlike tasks, remaining effort is not pushed into the future. For example, if you have a booking that started a week ago and extends another week, the effort on individual days remains unchanged as days pass. This is because a booking, unlike tasks, has no status and no time entries can be recorded on it.
1. Setup The Foundation for Smooth Planning 🛠️ Before you can start planning, you should prepare a few important things. This ensures your planning is realistic and doesn't end up in chaos. The plann
1. Setup The Foundation for Smooth Planning 🛠️ Before you can start planning, you should prepare a few important things. This ensures your planning is realistic and doesn't end up in chaos. The planner in awork connects your project management with your calendar. You can align tasks, meetings, and bookings directly with your team's capacity. For this to work, you need a solid setup. What belongs in your setup: Set your holiday region: So you know when your team is enjoying some well deserved time off. Activate calendar integration: Connect your Google or Outlook calendar, either yourself or centrally as an admin for your team. Configure work hours correctly: Nobody wants to be scheduled for 8 hours a day if they only work part time. So set your work hours! Maintain absences: Vacations, sick days, and so on belong right in the planner. You can even automate this through integrations with Personio or MOCO. Add skills and roles: Use tags to keep track of who can do what. Check permissions management: Who's allowed to see or edit projects and tasks? 💡 Tip: Remind your team to set these preferences right from the start. It saves a lot of confusion later on. 2. The Planner Views at a Glance 👀 Project View Shows you all active and planned projects Use filters (e.g., by team or priority), sorting, grouping, and columns Plan directly in the timeline with drag and drop Need to extend or move projects? Just drag them or adjust in the popup User View See your team members' tasks, bookings, and calendars here Filter by skills, tags, or projects Use the workload bar to spot overbookings Assign tasks directly, move them, or add comments 💡 Tip: You can also display your team's calendars via the user icon, so you keep an eye on meetings and routines too. 3. Plan Projects Smartly From Big Picture to Details ✨ In awork, you can build, structure, and align projects with your team's available capacity. You can decide flexibly whether you want to plan roughly or in detail, or combine both approaches. Create project structure: Every project thrives on structure. Think about: What should tasks and subtasks look like? What deadlines and budgets exist? Which tasks need a time budget? Which people or teams will be assigned to the project and individual tasks? And this is really important: don't just think about traditional tasks. Emails, calls, and feedback loops take time too. Plan for them! Use task statuses like "Open", "In Progress", "Blocked", or "Done" to stay on top of things. 4. Rough or Detailed You Decide! 🎯 Rough Planning: The Overview for Weeks and Months If you need a quick overview or prefer to plan on a weekly level, rough planning with bookings is perfect for you. With bookings, you reserve capacity without planning every task in detail right away. This is ideal when: Tasks aren't concrete yet, you plan weekly (e.g., in your standing meeting every Thursday), or you just want to block rough time windows. Here's what you should keep in mind: Bookings distribute evenly over time. They affect workload but don't shift automatically. No time is tracked on bookings they're just reservations. Use the user view to see how much capacity everyone has left. Detailed Planning: For Maximum Transparency in Daily Operations Detailed planning is perfect when you want to plan day by day and always keep your team's workload in view. Here you work directly with tasks that: Have start and end dates, come with time budgets, and can either have time tracked on them or be scheduled in your calendar. Important: Tasks without times or calendar entries automatically get pushed into the future, so your workload stays accurate. 💡 Tip: Rough and detailed planning work wonderfully together. Use bookings for advance planning and replace them once you have concrete tasks. 5. Changes? No Problem! 🔄 Planning is never set in stone. With awork, you stay flexible even when something comes up. Here's how you do it: Hold weekly planning meetings (e.g., Thursdays). Invite your team into the planner (user view) and discuss who's working on what. Use checklists and filters to quickly find tasks or capacity. For spontaneous changes: Create an absence (e.g., for illness). Check your other team members' availability. Replan tasks or use multi select plus AI support. Typical scenarios: New project: Who has free capacity? Find out with the availability filter. Client request: Quickly check who has time and assign tasks right away. Team bottlenecks: Mark tasks with priority, comment, and move them around. And Now? Let's Go! 🎉 Start with your first planning meeting, roughly reserve capacity, or assign concrete tasks. No matter how you begin: with the awork planner it'll be structured, flexible, and definitely not boring.
How We Develop awork We follow a long term product vision with awork. This means we have a clear idea of where we're heading: team organization in its simplest and smartest form, tailored specifically
How We Develop awork We follow a long term product vision with awork. This means we have a clear idea of where we're heading: team organization in its simplest and smartest form, tailored specifically to the needs of fast moving, project oriented teams. We're building the work management tool that enables these teams to collaborate more happily together. But that doesn't mean we know every feature in advance or can schedule and guarantee its development far ahead of time. We continuously collect feedback, wishes, and ideas from our users, conduct interviews, create concepts (and discard them again), and respond to developments in technology and the working world. Planning Horizons From all these sources, thousands of ideas emerge, which our product team filters, categorizes, and incorporates into our broader concepts. So there are typically different planning horizons: Over 12 18 months ahead, we know the broad topic areas in which we want to develop awork further (for example, resource planning or process automation). For areas coming up around the next 6 months , we start creating and testing concrete concepts. Our next release we know in great detail and can usually announce its launch down to the week. We typically aim for a release roughly every 8 weeks (you can find the overview of past releases here) and break our larger projects into corresponding components. Since this doesn't always make sense, we deviate from this rule on a case by case basis as needed. The Current Roadmap We regularly publish the current status of our roadmap on our website: https://www.awork.com/roadmap/. ☝️ Note : In our awork Community under News , you'll also find regular updates about our roadmap, written by our product team. How to Contribute Your Ideas ☝️💡 If you have an idea or a wish for how we can make awork even better for users like you, we'd love to hear about it. The perfect place for this is our awork Community. There you can describe your idea, attach screenshots and videos, and know that our product team will carefully review every submitted idea. Alternatively, you're also welcome to contact our support team and share your ideas with them. Using the question mark icon in the top left of your awork, you can get to the community or contact support directly from there.
You can find the complete article on our blog. Where Do I Find What? The navigation has fundamentally changed. Here's a quick overview of the most important changes: General search now accessible by c
You can find the complete article on our blog. Where Do I Find What? The navigation has fundamentally changed. Here's a quick overview of the most important changes: General search now accessible by clicking the magnifying glass icon in the top left of the main menu, or via the floating action bar at the bottom center Dashboard now called Home , top left in the main menu Projects in main menu accessible via Favorites, External Projects, and My Projects (sections can be customized in account settings) Help and documentation now accessible via the question mark icon at the bottom left of the main menu User overview now accessible via workspace settings at the bottom left of the main menu User profile now accessible by clicking your profile picture at the bottom left of the main menu Timer now accessible by clicking the play button in the floating action bar at the bottom center Project notifications now accessible via the bell icon at the bottom left of the main menu Messages, comments, and mentions now accessible via the inbox icon at the top left of the main menu Global action button has been removed; search and quick actions are now directly accessible via the floating action bar at the bottom center Frequently Asked Questions When will my workspace get the update? The rollout starts in early July and will be phased in over four to six weeks. You'll receive a notification as soon as your workspace is ready. New workspaces created from the start of the rollout will have the new awork immediately. Where is the support chat now? The help button is still there in the new interface, located in the main menu. You can find it at the bottom left by clicking the question mark icon. Alternatively, you can reach us anytime at support@awork.com. I can't find my projects anymore. Where are they? The projects section in the main menu is now divided into Favorites, External Projects, and My Projects. You can access your projects through these or directly via the search function. You can also customize which sections are displayed in the menu via your account settings. What happened to the project search? It's been replaced by the central search, which is now accessible directly from the main menu or the floating action bar. Why can't I hide the menu completely anymore? This isn't possible in the new awork. Instead, you can minimize the menu to make optimal use of your space without losing any functionality. What happened to the settings submenu? The permanently visible submenu is no longer available in the new awork for now. However, it will be coming back soon in an updated form. Settings are still fully accessible via the settings section in the main menu. Where is the timer? In the floating action bar (the fixed bar at the bottom of the screen that always stays visible) click the play icon.
TL;DR New highlights in awork are the planned effort hierarchy (with practical example), Gantt view & MFA Coming next on the roadmap are project and task keys, complex filters & cross project task lis
TL;DR New highlights in awork are the planned effort hierarchy (with practical example), Gantt view & MFA Coming next on the roadmap are project and task keys, complex filters & cross project task lists Reading tip on the topic "Why we build awork for agencies (and how)" from CPO Lucas Feature Highlights Overview New Planned Effort Hierarchy Planned effort in awork now follows a clear hierarchy: from project through lists down to individual tasks and subtasks. This solves a real agency problem: until now, you could quickly see whether you were still on budget overall for a project, but not whether the planned efforts for individual line items like "creative" had already been exceeded. Example: you're planning a project with a 100 hour budget, split into strategy (30h), creative (50h), and implementation (20h). If creative takes 60 hours to complete but you're only at 90 hours overall, everything looks good at first glance. In reality, though, you're short 10 hours elsewhere often exactly where the higher hourly rates apply. This impacts profitability and quickly leads to uncomfortable renegotiations with clients. Here's how to use the new planned effort hierarchy: Create a separate list in your project for each quote line item (e.g., strategy, creative, implementation) Set the corresponding planned effort directly at the list level (e.g., 30h, 50h, 20h) Distribute the list's planned effort across tasks and subtasks to "consume" the budget at the list level You can now see as the project progresses how much effort is still available per list (line item) not just for the overall project. This gives you early warning signals if things are getting out of hand, so you can course correct in time. More details on the planned effort hierarchy Gantt View for Projects You can now visualize project plans in the timeline as a classic Gantt view with one click. This makes all dependencies clear and keeps your timings under control. It's especially useful for projects that run in distinct phases (e.g., campaigns) and also helps when clients expect a clear timeline report (tip: just export as .svg or .png). More details on the Gantt view MFA for High Compliance Requirements Multi factor authentication (MFA) can now be enabled for all users in a workspace. In addition to the standard password login, you can now also secure login with an email code or authenticator app. This is especially important when you're working with confidential client data that requires higher security standards. How to set up MFA What's Coming Next We're focusing awork even more on agency workflows and working on highly requested features: Project and Task Keys: Quick and unique identification of projects and tasks Complex Filters: Create, combine, and share filter groups Cross Project Task Lists: See all tasks across projects at a glance View the full roadmap Reading Tip Our CPO Lucas recently started a newsletter on LinkedIn where he explains why we're deliberately building awork for agencies and not trying to be everything for everyone. Definitely worth reading if you want to know where awork is headed. As a bonus, there's also a sneak peek at the new UI design. Read the article on LinkedIn Have questions or feedback on the format? Feel free to send us a message we really appreciate any suggestions!
TL;DR Highlights : awork Forms (with practical example), Project and Task Keys, manual automation triggers & calendar updates On the Roadmap : Workflows, custom task lists, and design update Reading t
TL;DR Highlights : awork Forms (with practical example), Project and Task Keys, manual automation triggers & calendar updates On the Roadmap : Workflows, custom task lists, and design update Reading tip about the new UI design from CPO Lucas Feature Highlights at a Glance awork Forms: Receive customer tasks in a structured way Know the feeling? Customer tasks often come in unstructured form and through various channels. Before actual work can begin, someone has to gather all the info and create the task properly. To solve this problem, we've introduced awork Forms: a tool that lets you build forms for task creation in awork. awork Forms is open source, completely free, and you can even self host it. Here's an example: Your customer wants changes to their website. Instead of sending an email saying "Can you take a look at this?", they use the form link you created for them. The customer fills out the (required) fields, provides the URL, adds a screenshot, and describes the desired change right there. They submit and the task lands automatically in the right project, in the right list, with all the info your team needs optionally assigned to a specific person and prioritized. That's the end of back and forth or missing information (hopefully). Try awork Forms Learn more about awork Forms Project and Task Keys Every project now has a unique key (e.g., ACME), which you can also customize. Each task gets a permanent number (ACME 42). From now on, you have clear references in awork that you can use in Slack, emails, or calls. This means you spend less time searching or asking follow up questions. You can control the visibility of these keys at both workspace and project level: Admins can enable keys in the workspace settings for all projects (General Task Settings Show Project & Task Keys for all projects). Project managers can override key visibility per project in their project settings (General Task and Project Key). Learn more about Project & Task Keys Manual Automation Triggers Not every workflow should run automatically. That's why you can now start automations manually whenever you need them. For example: kick off your QA checklist before the customer review or start the "prepare invoice" flow when a project phase is completed. When creating an automation, select the new "Manual" trigger type, give it a name (e.g., "Prepare Invoice"), add the corresponding actions, and save. You can then start the automation with a single click using a new button in the top right of the project task details. Learn more about manual automation triggers Trusted Workspaces for awork Connect If you regularly collaborate with the same partner workspace via awork Connect, you don't need to manually approve each project invitation anymore. Workspace admins can now mark partner workspaces as "trusted", which automatically accepts invitations. Your external partners can be assigned directly to projects and get started right away. Here's how to set up trusted workspaces: Workspace Settings Connect Trusted Workspaces Learn more about trusted workspaces Calendar Integration: Tasks, Bookings, and OOO Capacity Your awork calendar now reflects your actual workday and your available capacity even better. On one hand, you'll see assigned tasks and bookings in the all day row, giving you a better overview of your week. You can enable both features in your calendar settings. On the other hand, "out of office" events can now impact your capacity in the planner as well for example, when you have a doctor's appointment or need to leave early. Your team will see when you're unavailable and no one will assign you tasks when you're already away. Enable this under: Calendar Manage Connected Calendars (next to Settings on the right) Edit Load "out of office" events and treat as absence Learn more about all day entries Learn more about "out of office" events Bonus for Developers: awork CLI With the awork CLI, you can manage projects, users, time entries, and more directly from your terminal. Built for automated workflows and AI agents. Everything is open source on GitHub. Learn more about awork CLI on GitHub What's Coming Next Workflows: Instead of setting up status sets, automations, and custom fields individually for each project, you define them once as a workflow and assign it to multiple projects. When you change the workflow (e.g., add a new status), all projects update automatically. Perfect for agencies that want to run a proven process consistently across many client projects. Custom Task Lists: You need a curated task list that can't be created with filters alone for example, 8 handpicked tasks from different projects for tomorrow's stakeholder meeting? Soon you'll be able to create your own lists, add tasks from any projects via drag and drop, and sort them by your priority without changing your project structure. We're also continuing to work on advanced filters, cross project task lists, and the new UI design read more about it in the reading tip. View the full roadmap Reading Tip Our CPO Lucas has presented the upcoming design update in his LinkedIn newsletter. If you want to know where the visual journey with awork is heading, this is your article. Read the article on LinkedIn Do you have questions or feedback? Just reply to me we love hearing your suggestions!
2026 04.06.26 Fully Functional MCP Server No more missing endpoints The awork MCP Server now supports the complete awork API. AI agents connected via Claude, ChatGPT, or other MCP compatible clients h
2026 04.06.26 Fully Functional MCP Server No more missing endpoints The awork MCP Server now supports the complete awork API. AI agents connected via Claude, ChatGPT, or other MCP compatible clients have access to everything in awork no more workarounds for missing endpoints. External AI agents that truly understand awork Thanks to embedded access to awork documentation and best practices, your AI agent doesn't just know the API it also knows how to use awork correctly. The result: fewer errors, more reliable results for complex tasks. Leaner, faster, further A smaller MCP footprint means less token consumption per session complex agent workflows stay efficient throughout. Setup: one URL, one login, done. 20.05.26 Copy Docs as Markdown (.md) Export content with one click Open an awork Doc, click the action menu, and select "Copy as Markdown". The content lands directly in your clipboard, ready to paste into Notion, GitHub, Slack, or any other tool that supports Markdown. Headings, tables, lists, code blocks, and text formatting all stay intact. Structure and context come along Every export includes a YAML header with the document name and a link back to the source in awork. Inline comments get resolved into their own section at the end of the export. 30.04.26 Workflows Unified processes for all your projects Use Workflows to define recurring processes once (statuses, automations, and custom fields for tasks), then apply that workflow to the projects you choose. Update the workflow, and all connected projects automatically adjust. Set up projects quickly and securely Assign a workflow to a project template to launch new projects with the right process built in. Already have a well configured project? Save it as a workflow in project settings and roll those settings out to as many projects as you want. Get started with workflows When you connect an existing project to a workflow, a setup wizard guides you through the process. In project settings, you'll see exactly which workflow is active and what it controls. You can switch workflows anytime. Flexibility at the project level Not every project fits a workflow exactly. That's why you can disable individual workflow automations per project or add project specific automations and custom fields while keeping the project connected to the workflow. See which projects use which process Search, filter, and group your project list by workflow. This is especially useful when multiple workflows are running, so you can spot gaps, verify coverage, and stay on top of things. 16.04.26 Filters with AND/OR Logic Build complex filter conditions Combine criteria with AND/OR operators and group them with parentheses to create multi level logic. Use Quick Filters when you need fast results Apply Quick Filters on any page (Projects, Tasks, Users, etc.). You'll see results instantly without opening a new form or loading a saved filter. Save, share, and organize filters Save filters, share them with people, teams, or your whole workspace, and keep everything organized in Views. Favorite what matters, archive the rest. 16.04.26 Views: Create and Organize What You Want to See A dedicated space for filters and saved views Views is now its own section in awork. Your filters and saved views have a clear home easier to find, manage, and locate again. Standard views ready to go You start with three standard views: New Tasks, My Tasks, and Private Tasks available instantly, no setup needed. Share views intentionally with the right people Share views with specific people, teams, or your entire workspace. You decide right away whether they can read or edit no broadcasting to everyone. Just the beginning Views launches with the list view. More view types and cross project views are coming soon. 16.04.26 Bulk Actions for Projects Update multiple projects at once Update multiple projects in one step change status, tags, dates, project owners, and more all at once. Select projects, pick an action, and confirm. Each project reports its own result so nothing fails silently. 14.04.26 Duplicate Projects Right from the Context Menu Duplicate any project full structure included Copy the entire project structure at once tasks, lists, custom fields, automations, and more included. Open a project's action menu and select "Duplicate Project". The copy is independent with no connection to the original. Control what gets copied Members, assignees, documents, and files are included by default you can toggle each element off before duplicating. Task statuses can be reset so the project starts fresh. 10.02.26 Project & Task Keys Reference tasks uniquely Every project gets a short key (like MKTG or BRND) and every task a permanent number (like MKTG 42). Say goodbye to "that design thing we talked about yesterday". Instead, use clear references in Slack, Git commits, customer emails, and team calls. Task numbers never change, even if titles do, so your documentation and commit history stay valid forever. Find fast, copy even faster Search any task by its number (just "42" or full "MKTG 42") and jump straight there. Click the task key to copy its URL, click the project key for the project link. Perfect for developers committing code, account managers updating customers, or anyone needing audit ready traceability without the copy paste dance. You control visibility Keys are generated automatically for all projects and tasks, but you decide who sees them. Workspace admins set the default (visible or hidden), project managers can override per project. Enable project keys for your workspace whenever you're ready. 10.02.26 Manual Automation Triggers Launch multi step processes with one click Not every workflow should run automatically. Manual triggers let you fire automations exactly when you need them like your QA checklist before a customer review, or your "prepare invoice" flow when a project phase wraps up. Set up automation once in project settings (or template), then any team member can trigger it from a task using the new button in the top right. Same power as automations, full control Set up manual triggers like regular automations: choose Manual trigger type, give it a clear name (like "Start approval process"), add actions (change status, assign users, fire webhooks), and save. The automation shows up in a dropdown on every task in that project ready to run when you click, not when an event fires. 10.02.26 Trusted Workspaces Skip Setup for Known Connect Partners Auto accept invites from selected workspaces If you constantly collaborate with the same agency, client, or freelancer workspace via awork Connect, you shouldn't have to approve each project invite individually. Now workspace admins can mark specific workspaces as "trusted" to auto accept their invitations. Your regular partners can jump straight into projects, get assigned tasks, and get going. Set it once and forget it Go to Workspace Settings Connect Trusted Workspaces, add your partner's workspace (by ID or URL), click Save done. From that point on, everyone from that trusted workspace can instantly connect with your users. Perfect for agencies with core clients, companies with fixed freelancer pools, or any team tired of approving the same people over and over. 10.02.26 Full Day Calendar Entries for Bookings and Tasks See assigned tasks where you plan your day The all day row at the top of your calendar now shows tasks and bookings assigned to you (not just time off and calendar events). That means at a glance you see which projects you're booked on and what tasks are waiting for you, all in the same view where you're already planning meetings and blocking focus time. Tasks have solid borders, bookings are dotted (like in timeline views), and hovering shows the full name. Makes it much easier to drag your actual work into free slots and build a realistic day plan. Choose what shows up Go to calendar settings and you'll find three new options: "All day tasks" shows your assigned tasks from active projects. "Tasks without start date" adds tasks that only have a due date (shown as 1 day items on that day) the first toggle needs to be on for this. And "Show bookings" shows your resource bookings. Test the settings to see what matters to you and hide the rest. 10.02.26 Out of Office Time Now Reduces Your Capacity Your calendar absences count in workload planning (if you want) When you block half a day for a doctor's appointment or a free afternoon in your calendar as "Out of Office", awork can now see that and reduce your capacity accordingly in the planner's workload view. It's completely optional: go to your calendar integration settings and enable "Load absence times and treat as absences". Once on, your OOO events show up in the awork calendar and are automatically factored into resource planning. Leave it off if you prefer managing absences differently. Perfect for absences that don't fit the all day pattern Not every absence is a full vacation day. Sometimes it's a two hour dental appointment, a half day conference, or "leaving early for parent teacher night". Out of office entries let you capture these shorter absences without entering them separately in a personnel system. Your team sees you're unavailable, the planner adjusts your workload, and nobody assigns you stuff when you're already gone. 2025 03.11.25 MFA, New Slash Commands, and Doc Improvements MFA: Extra security, made simple awork now supports multi factor authentication (MFA), giving you an extra security layer at login. Along with your password, you can now confirm your identity with a code from your email or an authenticator app. Apply formatting with slash commands Speed up your writing flow. Use "/" in documents, descriptions, and comments to quickly insert headings, lists, images, and other formats without ever touching the mouse. Slack notifications for doc activity Get notified in Slack when someone comments on or reacts to a doc, mentions you, or shares a doc with you. Link a doc directly from the task You can now link documents directly in task details. That way context and notes stay right where you need them. 29.10.25 Gantt View for Projects Your project roadmap: Clear, visual, and easy to plan The new Gantt view visualizes your project plan in task bars with start/end dates and duration including dependencies and clear hierarchy from lists, parent, and subtasks. Plan campaigns sequentially, drag phases around, keep predecessors and successors stable, and export the timeline as PNG/SVG for clients. Scroll into view Click in the sidebar and the view jumps straight to that task in the timeline. Saves endless scrolling in big projects and gets you to your next to do faster. Auto adjust for parent tasks Set start and end dates of parent tasks automatically based on their subtasks. When auto adjust is on, subtask dates control the parent timeframe. 28.08.25 awork AI (Beta) Your Smart Project Assistant Create helpful content in seconds Generate client updates, task briefs, meeting notes, or doc drafts in seconds right where you work. awork AI uses current project context, nails tone and details, so you refine instead of starting from scratch. Save valuable time and stay in flow. Manage projects with less manual work Skip the busywork and let awork AI do it for you: create/assign tasks, adjust timelines, update status, or reorder. For bigger changes, AI asks for confirmation staying safe stays safe. Less admin, more done. Get answers in the right context Get instant, clear answers about status, deadlines, capacity, or logged time no report building required. awork AI reads your current project or task (within your permissions) and delivers insights plus next steps. Aligned in seconds, even during crunch. Protect sensitive data GDPR compliant EU hosting, no use of your data for AI training, strict respect of permissions. Admins can disable awork AI workspace wide if needed. Use AI with peace of mind even with sensitive client data. 26.08.25 Quick Reports for Fast Overview Create key time reports in seconds Quick Reports let you skip the setup for classic time reports and pick matching filters with just one click. Choose between "Monthly Capture Overview", "Logged vs Planned", "Billability per User", and "Ready to Bill". 15.07.25 Improved Time Reports: Faster, Cleaner, More Flexible More intuitive layout & instant results Time reports are now generated automatically as you pick filters no extra "Apply" button needed. The filter selection is much more direct and comfortable now. Planned effort in view New columns for "planned effort" make it easy to compare planned versus actually logged time right in the report. Report by task list including export You can now filter time reports by task list a frequently requested feature. The associated task list also shows in exports. Main task list for full clarity Since tasks can belong to multiple lists, you now choose which is the main task list when you move a task to another list. Only this main list gets the time entries keeping reports clean and traceable. 15.07.25 Export Docs as PDF Work with your docs outside awork too You can now export any doc as a clean, shareable PDF perfect for printing, archiving, or sharing outside awork. 10.07.25 Doc Versioning: Every Change Saved, Full Control All edits auto saved as versions With new versioning, awork automatically saves every change inside docs whether private, in spaces, or projects. So you always have your complete document history at hand. View and manage version history Open the three dot menu to see all saved versions with previews. See at a glance who changed what when and jump straight to the version you want. Restore older versions no data loss You can restore any older version anytime. The current version stays safe so nothing gets lost and you have maximum flexibility to revert. Security and control for every team Versioning is available for all doc types. Users with edit rights (Professional Plan and up) can view versions and jump back for seamless team collaboration even with lots of changes. 10.07.25 Custom Fields for Projects: More Flexibility, More Clarity Custom fields for every project You can now create custom fields for all projects just as easily as with tasks. All fields you create are automatically available in every project. Directly integrated into all workflows Show custom fields in the project list, prep them in project templates, and edit them right in project details so every project fits your needs. Targeted filtering for quick overview Filtering by custom fields now works for both projects and tasks. Makes it easier to get the overview you need. 19.06.25 New Docs Editor Features Text colors in docs You can now change text colors in docs. Highlight important info, structure content visually, or just make it a bit more colorful right from the toolbar. Syntax highlighting in code blocks Developers, rejoice: Code blocks in docs now support syntax highlighting for popular programming languages makes snippets easier to read, copy, and review. Checklist format in docs Stay organized while you write: Add simple to dos directly from the toolbar to any document and check them off when done. Full screen view for embedded images Click the full screen button in the image toolbar to see a larger version. 20.05.25 Quality Week: 60+ Small Updates, Including Improved Workflows and New Xero Integration New Billing Integration: Xero awork now connects seamlessly with Xero making invoicing even easier for agencies and project driven teams (especially in the UK). More overview and flow Navigation, lists, and filters are now even smarter and more intuitive so you and your team always have the perfect overview and find what really matters faster. Faster (and smarter) in daily work From task creation to time tracking: Many small optimizations make your workflows smoother, remove annoying friction, and save you valuable time with smart shortcuts. More efficiency for teams Collaboration is now even easier: improved permission management, optimized document handling, and cleaned up context menus let your team focus on what matters. Reliability and data protection Many detail improvements ensure awork stays a safe and reliable workspace for your team with full focus on data protection and compliance. 13.05.25 Calendar and Time Come Together, New Bulk Edit Options, Bookings Without Projects, and Timeline Updates Calendar and time now in one view Time tracking in awork has never been easier. By bringing together time tracking and your calendar, you now have all bookings and events in one place right in your calendar. See time entries right in your calendar: Keep tabs on everything: Your time bookings now show directly in the calendar. Just click the time badge above a day or week to get a quick overview of all entries for that period. Create time entries straight from calendar events: Log your work time even faster: Use the context menu on synced calendar events to create a time entry directly. The event title becomes your note automatically you can adjust duration, task, or project anytime. Drag and drop to create entries or tasks: Just drag across the calendar to open the quick creator. Then pick whether you want to create a time entry or task. Tasks get scheduled automatically just like when you drag from the task list. View other users' time entries: Want to see what your team is working on? Just select the users you want and their time entries and calendar events show alongside yours. With the right permissions, you can even log time for others. Bulk edit for subtasks You can now select multiple subtasks individually or all under a parent task at once and edit them together or reassign them to a new parent task with one click. So you organize and update your projects faster and easier than ever. Book capacity in the planner without a project Want to block time before the project exists? You can now book capacity in the planner without a project great for early planning, placeholders, or internal work. Improved UX for project and task timelines Small but nice: Project and task timelines (outside the planner) now also use the smooth new timeline tech from the planner update. A small upgrade with big impact. 09.05.2025 awork Docs: Bring Documentation and Project Work Together in One Tool Project related documentation With awork Docs you create project related content like briefs, meeting notes, or client updates right in the project and can link them to tasks when needed. So your knowledge stays flowing, everyone on the team (and your clients) access the same version all without switching tools. Workspace wide documentation Beyond projects, you can also create central, workspace wide documentation like design guidelines, onboarding guides, or technical manuals. Thanks to flexible folder structure, everything stays findable, current, and clearly organized. Collaboration, formatting, sharing, and more Edit content together in real time, control access permissions precisely, and design your docs with a versatile editor that fits your needs. So your docs grow with you structured, secure, and in the context of your work. 💡 All details about Docs are in this help center article. 28.03.2025 The New Planner: Redesigned for Reliable Plans and Happy Clients Clean layout for project and user overview The split screen view in the planner has been removed. Instead, there's now a separate project and user overview you can switch between effortlessly. So you keep better tabs on your projects and can focus on the info that matters for capacity planning. New project overview for more control and flexibility Better filter, sort, and grouping options bring clearer structure and help you keep all relevant projects in sight. Customize the project sidebar to create exactly the view that makes you most productive full flexibility without losing track. Improved project navigation to switch between planning levels A new navigation menu makes it easier to jump in and out of projects while planning. Click a project in the planner timeline and new navigation opens you can dive straight into the task timeline or project specific user view for detailed planning or jump to the whole project outside the planner. Planner checklist to spot risks early and react fast The new personal checklist flags potential problems in your project plan, like upcoming deadlines, delayed tasks, or overloaded users. Perfect for weekly planning meetings! You can generate the checklist anytime based on your active project view (including filters) and chosen timeframe. Click an item to jump straight to the issue. Multi select tasks for efficient (re)planning The new multi select in the planner's project timeline makes it easier to plan and replan tasks. Click the cursor icon at the bottom to enable multi select. Pick multiple tasks to move or edit them at once. Edit options for projects in the planner timeline Projects in the planner timeline can now be edited intuitively to adjust your project portfolio more easily. You can drag projects around or adjust their duration right in the project overview. User availability data for quick task assignments While assigning a task to a user, you can now see their availability right there ensuring efficient workload no need to open the planner. Filter options for user tags during task assignment When assigning tasks, you can now filter by tags like skills or qualifications to quickly find the right users for your tasks. Experimental AI to resolve overload When users are overloaded, their tasks can be auto rescheduled with AI help an experimental feature designed mainly for smaller volumes. Open the user timeline, pick the tasks you want to replan, and click "Autofix". Within seconds, tasks move automatically to balance workload while respecting deadlines and capacity. You can also work with a prompt and give awork clear instructions on rescheduling. 13.02.25 Retainer Budgets, Improved Budget Notification Automation, and New Settings for Budget Precision Retainer budgets for projects Retainer budgets in awork let you set monthly recurring budgets for a project instead of one time fixed budgets. Users can define an individual retainer period and decide whether and how unused or exceeded hours in one month affect next month's budget. Retainer view in the project time tab When a project has a set retainer budget, users find the new retainer view in the project's time tab alongside general project KPIs. The new retainer charts give a clear overview of current and past months. When enabled to carry over unused and/or exceeded hours, users also see how next month's available budget is affected by the previous month. Smarter budget notification automation Automation triggers are now even smarter: Beyond notifications when a project budget is fully used, users can now set up notifications based on specific budget values whether a percentage, logged hours, or days. Precise budget control with billable time only Users now have the flexibility to choose what counts toward project budgets: all logged hours or just billable hours. Customizable budgets in project templates Templates now include flexible budget values. So budgets can be created or changed within a template. 30.01.25 Desktop Tabs and a New Release Feed Tabs for the desktop app The awork desktop app now supports opening and working with multiple tabs. This includes new shortcuts that help you use the awork app even more intuitively. The new release feed in awork There's a brand new release feed right in awork! From now on, users can easily follow all feature updates and improvements inside the app. You'll get notified when changes happen and find all the info you need to get started with the latest updates right away. 2024 Time Fries Release 🍟 29.11.2024 Bar charts in the "Time" view Bar charts show how much time and in what way it was logged in projects, for users, or clients over time. Find them in the time tab of a project, user, or client in the "Time" view. Bar charts let you flexibly group effort by billability, activities, users, or projects and choose between daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, or yearly timeframes. Line chart for the "Logged vs Planned" view Line charts visualize project budget progress against logged work hours. These charts are available in every project's "Logged vs Planned" view. They're especially valuable for spotting trends or deviations early so you can respond. Showing the last six months' progress and color changes for budget overruns help you effectively monitor project finances. Improved search across your workspace Workspace search got a major upgrade for faster, more efficient finding. The expanded view now shows more results at once, and coverage includes comments, notes, project descriptions, files, and tasks. Detailed hit indicators with tooltips make finding specific content easier. With up to 40 results shown and new navigation like Tab to switch areas and opening results in new tabs, awork search is now more intuitive than ever. New list view for time reports Time report display switched from tile view to list view for better clarity. The top right now has sort options by name and creation date plus search, making specific reports easier to find. An action menu next to each report even lets you share directly from the list without opening the report. Selectively hide comments and task lists for external Connect users In projects shared with external users via awork Connect, you can now selectively hide both comments and task lists. Before sending a comment, you can hide it from externals shown by a red eye icon indicating the comment won't be visible. Same with task lists: use the action menu next to a list to hide it completely from externals, keeping only relevant content visible and internal info protected. New MOCO integration The new MOCO integration enables seamless transfer of project details and time between awork and MOCO. This lets you create projects directly in MOCO and automatically sync all relevant information and time entries to awork, minimizing manual data reconciliation. New easyJOB integration The easyJOB and awork integration syncs projects and tasks between systems. This improves project management and automates time tracking, helping your team work more productively. Holiday Spritz Release 🍹 14.10.2024 Regional holidays in the planner Regional holidays can now be automatically factored into planner and marked as "absent". These holidays are based on regions assigned to users. An admin sets these regions and they're then available in account settings for all users. Workspace wide absences Admins can now define workspace wide absences. These apply to all users or specific regions and are automatically considered in the workload view. Time period selection in workload view The new time period selector lets you view your team's or user's available capacity for a specific timeframe. After picking a period in the timeline, you see both individual and total team member capacity. The "Sort by Availability" option ranks users by free capacity, with the most available first. Hide completed tasks The "Done visible" button hides or shows completed tasks in workload view with one click. Improved view for large lists Lists in awork now adapt dynamically to screen size, using full available width for optimal display without zoom adjustments. Wide screen and compact modes switch automatically based on browser window size. Optimized navigation A new forward button improves navigation through recently visited views in awork. Navigation history is saved per window or tab and stays visible even when the sidebar is collapsed. UI improvements awork's interface got optimized. Timeline contrast increased, long entry names now move smoothly when scrolling. Week divider lines added to timeline header for better overview. Save last tab in project selection When creating a project template, your last selected tab is saved and automatically opens next time you use a template. Last activity for Connect users In workspace settings' Connect tab, admins can now see in the new "Last Activity" column when a user was last active in that workspace. Support and Help button The "Support & Help" button now sits at the top right of every workspace, offering quick access to important resources. Clicking opens a two part popup: left side shows support contact options, awork community access, relevant help center links, and release history. Right side suggests help articles matched to your current workspace area. Custom Icecream Release 🍦 23.08.2024 Customize your tasks with custom fields In awork you can create custom fields to add extra details directly to project tasks. This feature enables uniform and flexible use of details like text, number, checkbox, selection, date, or user. Fields are created workspace wide and can be enabled or disabled per project as needed. Fields display as columns in task lists and work as filter criteria. Custom fields only available in Business or Enterprise plans. Business plan supports up to 12 fields; Enterprise has no limit. Sort project overview Sort projects by end date, start date, name, customer, budget, task progress, time progress, or status. Move projects in timeline Move entire projects via the action menu in project details or selected tasks and lists via multi select shift them by a specific number of days. Progress bars for project details Keep tabs on deadline, budget, time, and task progress at project level with progress bars in project details. "Logged vs Planned" view for customers See planned versus actually logged time for customer projects in the time tab of the customer overview. Change activity directly in task details Update a task's activity right in task details. Customize your task list view Sort, group, and filter tasks in your dashboard widget by different criteria. Team absences widget Set up an absences widget for your whole team on your dashboard. Specifically choose which teams display. You can also place multiple widgets for different teams. Edit tags in templates Include tags from respective projects and tasks when creating templates and edit tags in templates later. Include start and end dates for tasks in templates Set task start and end dates in templates as relative dates that automatically apply when creating new projects. Sorting and search for templates Find templates easily through alphabetical sorting and new search. Adjust your split view for tasks Use the customizable split view to individually minimize or maximize task views, letting you work in the task while keeping full list overview. Overview all external users in one place The new Connect tab shows complete overview of all external users involved in projects in that workspace. Remove them if needed, check their last activity, and group by projects or other criteria. Move task to a project A simpler method to move tasks to another project: Via the action menu of a task or multi select, use the "Move to Project" button to move tasks to another project. Offline page for the desktop app The desktop app now has an info page showing when there's no active internet connection. Improved export file options (Excel and Google Sheets) New columns for time exports available in Excel and the Google Sheets integration. Watcher based on your settings In your profile settings, you can now decide whether you're automatically added as a watcher to all tasks you create. New filter criterion for tasks: "Created by" With the new "Created by" filter criterion, filter tasks you created yourself, a specific user, or multiple users. Snack Release 🍩 05.07.2024 Browser extension for awork The browser extension for Chrome & Arc offers an easy way to manage time tracking directly from your browser without switching tabs. After installation, an awork icon appears at the top of your browser window, making all time tracking functions accessible. Here you can start, stop, pause, or discard time plus set time as billable or non billable. Tracked data transfers seamlessly and in real time to your linked awork workspace. The extension also integrates the awork timer on tool sites like GitHub, HelloHQ, Pipedrive, and MOCO. KPI reports for customers KPI reports now work for customers too. Just go to the desired customer profile and select the new "Time" tab to access KPI reports and the "Time" view. Edit planned effort directly in time tab You can now enter and edit planned effort right in the "Logged vs Planned" view. Just click the desired value for tasks and subtasks to change effort immediately. awork Connect 🔗 20.06.2024 awork Connect With awork Connect you can share projects with external people for free and easily. Enjoy real collaboration, direct communication, and simple information exchange with outsiders whether clients, agencies, or freelancers. In the project detail view you'll find the Connect button to invite external users. After accepting the invite they become full project members and can see and edit tasks based on their permission role. Unlike internal users, external users only access their shared project from their own awork workspace and aren't part of your workspace. Guest migration With awork Connect's introduction, you can now convert all existing workspace guests to external users. In permission management, find the Connect button next to guest users. After conversion, former guests become external users who can be invited to individual projects without being workspace members. Shared projects offer the same collaboration options as previous guest licenses. To save guest license costs, simply remove them from your current awork plan. Same domain signup Team members can join a workspace directly without invitations. When someone registers with awork using the same email domain, awork recognizes the domain and auto assigns it to the existing workspace. Budget Bento Release 🍱 21.05.2024 KPI reports for projects and users KPI reports give quick, easy access to key metrics around time for projects and users. Find them in the "Time" tab at the top of the project overview. Projects get KPIs for "total logged time", "ready to bill", "budgeted time", and "logged vs planned". Users get "total logged time", "ready to bill", and "absences". New time view: Logged vs Planned The new "Logged vs Planned" view in the "Time" tab offers deeper insight into all project contents, including lists, tasks, and subtasks. Columns for "planned", "logged", "completed", and "total billable" appear right next to the respective task lists, tasks, and subtasks. Link task lists Create links directly to task lists by clicking "Copy link" in the list's action menu. Easier adding teams to projects When assigning teams to projects, now all workspace teams show instead of just the first 10. This lets you find teams through active search or simple scrolling. Faster search in permission management Search in permission management now includes role names, email addresses, and team names to filter the list and enable more efficient searching. "Due" instead of "Deadline" The word "Deadline" in task details changed to "Due". Copypasta Release 🍝 01.04.2024 Shared live editing The new live editing lets team members
New: Planned values now follow a clear hierarchy, starting with your project budget and flowing through the new list planned effort down to individual tasks and subtasks. Subtasks consume the planned
New: Planned values now follow a clear hierarchy, starting with your project budget and flowing through the new list planned effort down to individual tasks and subtasks. Subtasks consume the planned effort of their parent task, which means no more double counting. You can see and trace the comparison between planned and tracked effort at all levels in Project Times. How it worked before Each task had its own planned value. There was no connection between parent and subtasks. Planned values from parent and subtasks were added together; the sum gave you the total planned time for the project. How it works now Planned effort is consumed along the hierarchy, not added up. Subtasks always relate to the planned effort of their parent task and "consume" that portion. In Project Times, you see at every level what's planned, what's distributed to subtasks, and what's been tracked. Setting planned values in awork When you set a planned value, you'll see two displays Available (top down): shows how much planned effort is still free at the higher level. Assigned (bottom up): shows the planned values already used in the lower structure. So you can either distribute downward from your total planned effort or derive upward based on your detailed planning. Impact on workload For parent tasks, only the portion that hasn't been distributed to subtasks counts toward workload. You can set workload manually: each team member can have their own workload value, even if it differs from the task's planned value (for example, if you mainly plan with parent tasks). KPIs There are fewer, clearer KPI blocks in task and project details. The "Planned vs. Tracked" widget now consistently follows the hierarchy (no double counting). Setting: temporarily disable If the switch is disrupting your planning, you can temporarily turn off hierarchical reporting in your workspace settings. A heads up: this option is temporary. We recommend switching over soon to avoid double counting going forward. What should you check? Projects with parent and subtasks where planned values are set at both levels. Project Times and the Planner for changes in totals and workloads. Adjust planned values if needed and let your team know.
At awork, we have many different customers with different needs. That's why we offer various awork pricing plans that work really well for different types of teams. Below, you'll first get a general o
At awork, we have many different customers with different needs. That's why we offer various awork pricing plans that work really well for different types of teams. Below, you'll first get a general overview of the plans, and then at the end you'll find a detailed table. To see the different prices, head over to www.awork.com/de/preise What does awork cost? The price of awork depends on various factors like the plan you choose and the contract length. A free trial version is available. It runs for 14 days without payment details and without automatic renewal. Monthly prices, for example in the Basic plan, start from 8 € per user per month. You can also choose annual or 2 year plans, which offer lower prices through discounts. What pricing models are available? awork offers five pricing tiers suitable depending on your team size and needs: Basic (mini teams, recommended for around 1 5 users) Standard (recommended for 2 20 users) Professional (recommended for 5 100 users) Enterprise (recommended for 20 200 users) Enterprise+ (recommended for 100+ users, personalized support) Features by plan Basic Docs: Limited (1 space) Unlimited projects Time tracking Time reports per project Personal planner Standard integrations Mobile and desktop app 1 project and task template 1 custom field awork Connect Retainer budgets Chat and email support awork AI (Beta) Standard Includes all Basic features plus: Docs at project level Workload overview in planner Team structure 3 custom fields (each for projects and tasks) 6 templates (each for projects and tasks) 1 automation per project Absences Advanced permission management Autopilot awork AI (Beta) Professional Includes Standard features plus: Unlimited docs access Custom subdomain Time tracking settings Comprehensive global time reports Private projects Unlimited custom fields Unlimited automations Advanced integrations Phone support awork AI (Beta) Enterprise Includes everything from Professional plus: Single Sign On (SSO) and SCIM integration Expert support for transferring existing data to awork Dedicated Customer Success Manager for personalized support Bi annual check ins Priority support with fastest response times Invoice billing awork AI (Beta) Enterprise+ All Enterprise features plus: Defined Service Level Agreements For inquiries about volume discounts, please contact us. Payment models and cancellation What contract lengths are available? Flexible subscriptions: monthly, annual, or 2 year Discounts for upfront payment for 12 or 24 months How does cancellation work? You can cancel anytime at the end of your paid billing period. After this period ends, no further charges apply and you'll retain access to your workspace until the end of your contract term. Special offers and support Are there discounts or special rates available? Non profit and charitable organizations : discounted licenses (application required) Volume discounts from around 50 users custom pricing available on request What payment methods and support channels are available? Payment methods : Credit card, direct debit; invoice also available for Enterprise plans Support : Basic/Standard: Chat and email Professional: plus phone support Enterprise: Premium support with priority Enterprise+: Dedicated Customer Success Manager Onboarding guarantee (team on board guarantee) with personalized training and money back guarantee FAQ Can I test awork for free? Yes 14 days of full feature set (based on the Professional plan) without payment information, no automatic renewal. Do I have to commit to a contract? No The contract length depends on the subscription you choose; with monthly billing there's no commitment. Can I add or remove users? Yes users are flexible and can be added or removed at any time. Changes take effect immediately when adding users, and for removals they take effect in the next billing period. Can I switch plans? Yes you can change your plan anytime. When switching to a lower priced plan, the features of the higher plan will no longer be available in the next billing period. What happens if I'm not satisfied after purchase? The Basic, Standard, and Professional plans come with a 30 day money back guarantee full refund with no strings attached.
Access your awork data directly from your AI chats. With the MCP Server, you can connect your awork Workspace directly to ChatGPT, Claude, or other AI chats and give your AI assistant access to tasks,
Access your awork data directly from your AI chats. With the MCP Server, you can connect your awork Workspace directly to ChatGPT, Claude, or other AI chats and give your AI assistant access to tasks, projects, docs, and more from your awork Workspace. What you can do with it Once connected, your AI assistant can act as your personal awork assistant. For example, you can ask it to: Search for and summarize tasks or projects ("Summarize the Website Redesign project from awork") Work with Docs ("Find the Client Report Doc in awork and check it for errors") Give you an overview of your current tasks Prepare status updates based on project information All actions respect your existing permissions and access rights in awork. Features The awork MCP Server gives you access to all of awork's features. The AI tool can perform actions to retrieve data from awork or trigger processes like creating projects and much more. Permissions The awork MCP Server uses the same permissions as your user account in awork. This means, for example, that it can only see projects you have access to. MCP Server URL Use this URL to connect to the awork MCP Server. https://api.awork.com/api/v1/mcp Connect awork with ChatGPT Go to Apps in ChatGPT, search for awork , and click Connect . Then follow the instructions to log in with your awork account. Connect awork with Claude Setup takes just a few steps. Claude's Custom Connector feature is continuously being developed, so menu positions and functionality may change. 1. Open Claude Settings 1. Open Claude 2. Open Settings 3. Open Connectors 2. Create a New Connector 1. Select Customize 2. Click + 3. Select Create custom connector 4. Enter as the name 5. Enter [](https://api.awork.com/api/v1/mcp) as the URL 6. Save the connector 3. Authenticate and Get Started 1. Authenticate with your awork account when prompted 2. In a new chat, make sure the awork connector is active 3. For example, ask: "Summarize the Website Redesign project from awork" 💡 Depending on your Claude plan, usage limits may apply. Find more information in the Claude support documentation. Connect awork with Codex Setup takes just a few steps. MCP Server support in Codex is continuously being developed, so menu positions and functionality may change. 1. Open Codex Settings 1. Open Codex 2. Open Settings 3. Open MCP servers 2. Add the awork Server 1. Click Add server 2. Enter as the server name 3. Select Streamable HTTP as the type 4. Enter [](https://api.awork.com/api/v1/mcp) as the URL 5. Leave the remaining fields empty 6. Save the server 3. Authenticate and Get Started 1. After saving, authenticate once with your awork account 2. In a supported chat, make sure the awork server is active 3. For example, ask: "Summarize the Website Redesign project from awork" Other Clients The awork MCP Server works with all chat clients that support the Model Context Protocol for example, Claude Code, Copilot in Visual Studio Code, and others. 💡 You can also connect manually using an API key if your client doesn't support OAuth. Keep in mind that the MCP Server will have admin rights in this case. You'll find technical details in the Developer Docs.
Top 20 Most Frequently Asked Questions About Data Protection, Security & AI at awork Data Processing Contracts & Data Protection 1. What role does awork play in processing personal data? awork acts as
Top 20 Most Frequently Asked Questions About Data Protection, Security & AI at awork Data Processing Contracts & Data Protection 1. What role does awork play in processing personal data? awork acts as a data processor according to Article 28 of the GDPR. 2. Where is our customer data stored? Primarily in Germany (Microsoft Azure Germany). 3. Is data processed or transferred outside the EU? In selected cases, yes (for example, support and communication services), exclusively with Standard Contractual Clauses and/or where an adequacy decision exists. 4. Does awork conduct Transfer Impact Assessments (TIAs)? Yes, whenever required for transfers to third countries. 5. Which sub processors does awork use and what for? awork uses selected sub processors to operate the platform and provide supporting support and service functions. You can find the complete, up to date list of all sub processors including their purpose and location here . 6. Can I object to the use of a new sub processor? Yes, for legitimate reasons, as governed in the data processing agreement. 7. Is there a Data Protection Officer? Yes, PROLIANCE GmbH (external DPO). 8. Can I delete my data myself? Yes, workspace admins can delete the workspace themselves. 9. How long is data retained after deletion? Approximately 30 days, unless legal obligations require otherwise. 10. Is awork compliant with GoBD? awork supports GoBD compliant usage; responsibility for correct implementation lies with the customer. Security & Information Security 1. Is awork ISO 27001 certified? Yes, ISO/IEC 27001, including product, operations, and internal processes. 2. Is the Microsoft data center secure? Yes, Azure Germany meets ISO 27001, SOC 1/2, and BSI C5, among others. 3. Does Microsoft have access to our data? No. The Azure tenant is controlled exclusively by awork. 4. Can awork employees easily view our workspace? No. Access only in exceptional cases, strictly limited (least privilege principle). 5. Is there tenant separation? Yes, strict logical tenant separation at the application and database level. 6. Is our data encrypted? Yes, both in transit (TLS) and at rest. 7. How does awork ensure protection against data loss and the recoverability of customer data? awork protects customer data through automated, regular backups with defined restore processes and recovery testing. Artificial Intelligence (AI) 1. Which AI does awork specifically use? Microsoft Azure OpenAI, hosted in Europe (Sweden Central). 2. Is our data used for AI training? No. AI models are not trained using customer data. 3. Is AI mandatory in awork? No. It's active by default, but admins can disable it at any time. 4. How is awork classified under the EU AI Act? Low risk. No high risk or prohibited AI practices.
Here's a quick overview of our most important documents awork Terms and Conditions Data Processing Agreement including a list of all subprocessors awork APP Privacy Policy ISO 27001:2022 Certificate N
Here's a quick overview of our most important documents awork Terms and Conditions Data Processing Agreement including a list of all subprocessors awork APP Privacy Policy ISO 27001:2022 Certificate Need a Data Processing Agreement customized for your company? No problem! As a Workspace Admin, you can personalize our signed Data Processing Agreement for your company directly in the app and then sign it yourself. More Information If you're an applicant or partner, you can find the relevant privacy policies for you here. For more information about our ISMS, check out trust.awork.com . If you have any questions, feel free to reach out to us anytime at privacy@awork.com or security@awork.com. Documents we're happy to provide upon request Product description & Security overview Backup and restore process overview for ISO 9001 certification purposes Security Factsheet Certificates and attestations for our data center ICT Security requirements awork
Security means being prepared Even the best security measures can't completely prevent incidents from happening. That's why awork has an established incident response and breach notification process i
Security means being prepared Even the best security measures can't completely prevent incidents from happening. That's why awork has an established incident response and breach notification process in place to make sure that security relevant events are quickly identified, assessed, and resolved. How to report issues If you notice a potential security incident or vulnerability in awork, you can reach out to our security team anytime by email: 📧 security@awork.com We'll review every report right away and let you know what happens next. How we handle security incidents All security relevant events are centrally logged and assessed through technical monitoring systems and internal reporting channels. awork maintains a documented incident response process that covers technical, organizational, and communication measures. This process defines clear responsibilities, escalation paths, and timelines including the mandatory notification requirements under GDPR. After each incident, we analyze the root causes and incorporate any improvements into our Information Security Management System (ISMS). We provide customers with a summary of our incident response policy or corresponding documentation upon request as part of a security review or audit . Responsible Disclosure We appreciate reports from security researchers and users who help us keep awork secure. Please report any vulnerabilities you discover responsibly ("Responsible Disclosure") and don't run tests that could impact other customers' systems or data. We'll handle your report confidentially and give you feedback as soon as our analysis is complete.
Our Approach to AI awork uses Artificial Intelligence (AI) responsibly, transparently, and purposefully. AI features support you in your daily work and don't replace human decisions or judgments. AI T
Our Approach to AI awork uses Artificial Intelligence (AI) responsibly, transparently, and purposefully. AI features support you in your daily work and don't replace human decisions or judgments. AI Technology & Infrastructure awork uses the Microsoft Azure OpenAI Service. AI processing takes place within Europe (data center: Sweden Central). AI services are operated under Microsoft's Enterprise security and compliance standards. No self hosted or uncontrolled third party AI systems are used. This architecture ensures a high level of security, availability, and regulatory compliance. AI Usage in awork AI features support you with things like: Text suggestions, Summaries, Recommendations, Automations in your work context. The AI processes only workspace data that you have access to. AI makes no automated decisions with legal or comparable significant effects. Default Activation & Your Control AI features are enabled by default in the product. You, as a workspace administrator, can turn off the AI feature whenever you want. Once you disable it, the AI's access to workspace data is completely blocked. No AI processing happens once the feature is disabled. This way, you always have full control over how AI is used. Data Protection & AI AI processing follows the same data protection and security standards as all other awork features. Your data is never used to train general AI models. No AI training happens with your data. Data transfer is encrypted. AI content isn't logged or permanently stored unless it's needed for processing. A built in content filter blocks abusive or potentially harmful content. Classification Under the EU AI Act Based on the current features: awork's AI features fall into the low risk category according to the EU AI Act. awork doesn't provide high risk AI systems. No prohibited AI practices under the EU AI Act are used. The classification and use of AI is continuously reviewed in light of regulatory developments. Governance & Responsibilities AI usage is governed by internal policies and review processes. Responsibilities for AI, data protection, and information security are clearly defined. AI features are regularly reviewed against GDPR, ISO 27001, and regulatory requirements.
Technical & Organizational Measures (TOMs)
Security at every level Information security at awork isn't a one time project for us it's part of what we do every single day. We protect your customer data through a combination of technical, organi
Security at every level Information security at awork isn't a one time project for us it's part of what we do every single day. We protect your customer data through a combination of technical, organizational, and procedural measures that meet the requirements of ISO 27001 . All measures are regularly reviewed, documented, and continuously improved as part of our Information Security Management System (ISMS) . Technical Measures | Area | Measures | | | | | Access Control | Data centers are operated by Microsoft Azure in Germany (Frankfurt & Berlin) and meet ISO 27001, SOC 2, and BSI C5 standards. Physical access is strictly regulated. | | Authentication | System access is exclusively through individual accounts with two factor authentication. Access rights are role based and regularly reviewed. | | Authorization / Permission Management | Team members only get access to the systems and data they need for their work (need to know principle). All changes are logged and approved. | | Encryption | All data is encrypted both at rest and in transit (AES 256 / TLS 1.2+). Customer data in awork is logically separated from each other. | | Backup & Recovery | Automated daily backups in separate Azure storage areas; regular restore tests; defined recovery time objectives. | | Network Security | Segmentation through firewalls and access restrictions; continuous monitoring for unauthorized activities. | | System Hardening & Patch Management | Regular updates, automated security scans, vulnerability management through centralized tools. | | Incident Response & Monitoring | 24/7 monitoring of critical systems; defined incident response process with escalation procedures and documentation of all incidents. | Organizational Measures | Area | Measures | | | | | Information Security Management (ISMS) | Implementation and documentation of all security policies in accordance with ISO 27001; regular internal audits. | | Data Protection Management | External Data Protection Officer (PROLIANCE GmbH) guides processes; annual reviews and Data Protection Impact Assessments as needed. | | Awareness & Training | All team members complete mandatory security training and phishing simulations; new hires get onboarding plus awareness training. | | Access & Role Management | Linked to HR processes (onboarding/offboarding). Access is immediately revoked upon exit and reviewed every six months. | | Supplier & Sub processor Control | All partners evaluated through Privacy & Security checks before engagement; annual recertification. | | Business Continuity & Disaster Recovery | Emergency plans for system outages; regular testing and lessons learned sessions. | | Continuous Improvement | Security incidents, findings, and customer feedback flow into our ISMS; measures are tracked centrally. | Certifications & Frameworks ISO 27001 awork and the data center where we host the app are certified to ISO 27001:2022 BSI C5 / SOC 2 (Azure) covered by Microsoft GDPR Compliance continuously verified by our external Data Protection Officer In a nutshell Security is just as important to us as great usability or clean processes. We handle all the complex stuff behind the scenes so you can focus on your team and your projects. Reliable, pragmatic, and committed to getting a little bit better every day.
Why Transparency Matters Our customers trust us with their most valuable data projects, tasks, teams, and ideas. That's why it's obvious to us: you should always know who processes your data and where
Why Transparency Matters Our customers trust us with their most valuable data projects, tasks, teams, and ideas. That's why it's obvious to us: you should always know who processes your data and where it happens. All sub processors we use are carefully selected by us, contractually obligated, and regularly reviewed. We have Data Processing Agreements (DPAs) in place with all service providers in accordance with Article 28 of the GDPR. Our Current Sub Processors | Provider | Purpose | Processing Location | Security Measures | | | | | | | Microsoft Azure (Germany) | Hosting & infrastructure for awork | Germany (Frankfurt & Berlin) | DPA with Microsoft, ISO 27001 / SOC 2 / BSI C5, encryption at rest & in transit | | Microsoft Azure Front Door / CDN | Fast & secure delivery of the application (Content Delivery Network) | EU; technically necessary short term worldwide when accessed outside EU | Data residency guarantee, SCC/DPF protection, no content storage | | Microsoft Azure OpenAI (EU) | Optional AI feature (e.g. text & automation suggestions) | EU (Sweden Sweden Central) | No data transfer outside EU, no training on customer data, DPA with Microsoft | | Twilio Segment | Technical data forwarding for support and event analysis | EU / USA | DPA + SCC + DPF certification, data minimization, encrypted transfer | | Intercom Inc. | In app support, help center, and system notifications | USA | DPA + SCC + DPF (certification), ISO 27001 / SOC 2, TLS encryption | | Birdie (Philo Labs, France) | Bug reporting tool for error tracking in the product | France (EU) | DPA with exclusive EU processing, no third country transfer, automatic deletion after 90 days | How We Conduct Audits and Reviews The type of review depends on the size and structure of each sub processor: For global cloud providers (e.g. Microsoft, Twilio, Intercom), traditional on site audits are not planned. Instead, we rely on: regularly published audit reports (e.g. SOC 2, ISO 27001, BSI C5), contractually guaranteed transparency and review mechanisms in the DPAs, and certifications by independent third parties , which are renewed annually. For smaller or European sub processors (e.g. Birdie), we conduct our own reviews such as document reviews, questionnaires, and security evidence in accordance with Article 28(3)(h) of the GDPR. This combination enables realistic, risk based audits without compromising security or operations. Our Review and Approval Process Before we use a new sub processor, we conduct a Privacy & Security Check : Assessment of technical and organizational measures, review of legal bases (DPA, SCC, or DPF), approval by COO and CTO, annual review and audit. Our list of sub processors is updated regularly. Customers are informed of changes at least 6 weeks in advance and can object in accordance with Article 28(2) of the GDPR. Why Individual Objection to Existing Sub Processors Isn't Possible We know this topic is sensitive, so we want to explain transparently why individual exclusion of certain sub processors isn't possible. Some service providers (e.g. Microsoft Azure or Intercom) are technically deeply integrated into our infrastructure . Excluding them would impair central functions or the security of the entire system. The GDPR deliberately provides that customers are informed about new sub processors and can object within a specified period . For already existing sub processors, this right does not apply, because they are part of the agreed scope of services . When we do use new sub processors, we do so exclusively to provide or improve specific functionalities . These partners only process strictly limited data that is absolutely necessary for that function, such as technical metadata or communication information. Instead of an individual right to object, we provide our customers with a special termination right if they fundamentally disagree with the addition of a new sub processor. This way, the decision stays in your hands at all times, without compromising the technical integrity of awork. We ensure that all sub processors we use, whether new or established, meet the same high security and data protection standards. We check this regularly as part of our Information Security Management System (ISMS). Data Flow at a Glance All customer data is stored in Germany (Azure Germany). Support and communication data flows, when you use chat or support, through Intercom (USA, but with EU adequacy decision) Technical event data is sometimes forwarded via Twilio Segment to Intercom. Bug reports are only transmitted via Birdie (France) on request. The AI feature (Azure OpenAI) is optional , operates exclusively within the EU, and uses no data for training.
Data Protection at awork Protecting your personal data is really important to us at awork. We process data exclusively in line with the EU General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) and according to cl
Data Protection at awork Protecting your personal data is really important to us at awork. We process data exclusively in line with the EU General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) and according to clearly defined legal and organizational requirements. Roles & Responsibilities awork processes personal data in clearly defined roles: awork acts as a data processor according to Article 28 GDPR for your customer data. You as our customers remain the data controller for the content and personal data you process in awork. Data protection related decisions and processes are organizationally anchored and documented. Hosting & Data Processing awork platform hosting exclusively in Germany Your own dedicated tenant at Microsoft Azure Germany, controlled exclusively by awork Primary data processing within the European Union In selected cases, data transfers to third countries can occur, for example as part of support or communication services In these cases, data transfers only happen on the basis of appropriate safeguards, particularly: EU Standard Contractual Clauses (SCCs) Adequacy decisions by the European Commission (where applicable) Sub processors awork uses sub processors exclusively for operating the platform as well as for support and service offerings. Sub processors only get access to personal data when it's absolutely necessary for the specific purpose. Access is limited to clearly defined, selected use cases. We carefully select all sub processors, bind them contractually, and check them regularly. We provide you with a current overview of all sub processors transparently. Data Protection Organization External Data Protection Officer: PROLIANCE GmbH, Munich Established data protection policies and processes Regular training and awareness raising for employees Defined processes for data protection requests and data subject rights Contracts & Documents Data Processing Agreement (DPA) according to Article 28 GDPR Privacy Policy Sub processor List Transparency & Contact If you have any further questions about data protection, need GDPR information, or want to discuss individual cases, we're happy to help. 📧 privacy@awork.com
Our Approach to Information Security Protecting your customer data and information is our top priority at awork. We rely on clearly defined processes, responsibilities, and internationally recognized
Our Approach to Information Security Protecting your customer data and information is our top priority at awork. We rely on clearly defined processes, responsibilities, and internationally recognized standards to ensure a high and sustained level of security. ISO 27001 & Information Security Management System (ISMS) awork is certified according to ISO 27001. You can download our current certificate here. Our Information Security Management System (ISMS) ensures that information security is implemented systematically, monitored, and continuously improved. The certification scope covers: the awork SaaS platform, all internal systems and processes for product development, deployment, and operation, all employees involved in these processes. Responsibilities for Information Security At awork, responsibility for information security is clearly divided and anchored at the leadership level: Our CTO is responsible for technical information security, particularly regarding product, infrastructure, and system architecture. Our COO is responsible for organizational and procedural information security, including governance, policies, compliance, and internal processes. Security related decisions are coordinated jointly and reviewed regularly. Management is actively involved in further developing the ISMS. This division ensures that technical and organizational security aspects are considered holistically. Core Security Principles Established ISMS according to ISO 27001 Regular risk analyses and internal audits Clear separation of technical and organizational responsibilities Documented processes for handling security incidents Continuous review and improvement of security measures Transparency & Scope To ensure a high level of security, we do not share detailed technical or architectural information publicly. We're happy to provide further information as part of individual security reviews or upon request. Just send us an email to security@awork.com. You can also find more information about our ISMS and the opportunity to view our policies at trust.awork.com .
Want to know how other agencies use awork to plan projects more efficiently, maximize team capacity, or optimize time tracking? Then we've got something for you! In our Customer Stories, we share real
Want to know how other agencies use awork to plan projects more efficiently, maximize team capacity, or optimize time tracking? Then we've got something for you! In our Customer Stories, we share real workflows and practical insights from agencies working with awork from boutique creative teams to large agency groups. They share how they: increased their billability, boosted their efficiency by 50%, reliably tracked 98% of their hours, brought clients directly into their projects, and finally got rid of tool chaos (and excessive tool costs). Learn firsthand which features are particularly helpful, which processes have changed, and which learnings you can apply directly to your team. Check out the case studies Get inspired maybe you'll find exactly the solution you've been looking for! 🚀
awork is simple and quick to set up especially for users who don't have much experience with project management otherwise. That said, particularly in larger teams, targeted guidance from our team can
awork is simple and quick to set up especially for users who don't have much experience with project management otherwise. That said, particularly in larger teams, targeted guidance from our team can make the process easier and faster. Team Onboarding Guarantee We offer the Team Onboarding Guarantee to our Professional and Enterprise customers with a team size of 10 users or more . This guarantee is built on a structured onboarding program that our customers go through. Beyond that, we especially support our Enterprise customers upon request throughout the implementation process from initial configuration and data migration, to integration with your existing infrastructure, all the way to regular training sessions for all users. We have a dedicated consulting team for this who know awork inside and out and are happy to share best practices from previous projects with you. So we can discuss your needs and put together a suitable offer for you, please reach out to us at sales@awork.com or book a free initial consultation directly with us.
The awork Onboarding Tutorial helps new users get to know their workspace step by step. It walks you through important features like creating projects, tracking time, working with docs, or using the p
The awork Onboarding Tutorial helps new users get to know their workspace step by step. It walks you through important features like creating projects, tracking time, working with docs, or using the planner. As an admin, you can decide which parts of the tutorial are visible for which roles . This keeps onboarding clear and relevant for example, for internal team members, external users, or admins. Key Benefits and Use Cases Not every role needs all the content. By customizing your onboarding, you can: Reduce complexity for new users Focus content on the specific role help your team get up and running faster The tutorial automatically adapts to the role settings you define. How to Set Up the Onboarding Tutorial What Admins Can Control in the Onboarding Tutorial In the permission settings for a role, admins can show or hide specific onboarding sections for users: Onboarding Progress Controls whether users with this role can see the leaderboard Admin Tasks (admin role only) Shows or hides admin related content in the onboarding Time Tracking Shows or hides onboarding tasks for time tracking Docs Shows or hides onboarding tasks for awork Docs Planner Shows or hides onboarding tasks for the planner Turn Sections On or Off for a Role 1. Open Settings 2. Go to Rights Management 3. Select the General Permission Roles you want to edit 4. Scroll down to Visibility of Tasks in Onboarding Tutorial 5. Enable or disable individual elements using the eye icon ( Show/Hide ) Your changes apply to all users with this role. [!WARNING] When admins disable a section for a role: users won't see the corresponding onboarding tasks anymore hidden tasks won't count toward onboarding progress the tutorial stays focused on relevant content This way, every role gets a customized onboarding without unnecessary complexity. How the Leaderboard / "Team Progress" Works The Leaderboard shows how far users in your workspace have progressed through the onboarding tutorial. It makes progress visible and motivates teams to complete onboarding together. Enable Onboarding Progress to show the leaderboard for a role Disable Onboarding Progress to hide the leaderboard To access team onboarding progress, click the Support & Help button in the top right, then click Go to Tutorial . [!WARNING] Important: Admins always have access to the leaderboard. For all other roles, visibility depends on your settings. User Onboarding All users can access the user onboarding for free via the Onboarding Section , which is available directly in the awork workspace for introductory and training purposes. When you're invited as a user to your team's awork workspace: Navigate to the Onboarding Section using the Support & Help button Click Go to Tutorial The personalized guide is tailored to your permission level in awork, so you only see content that's actually relevant to you. For the best learning experience, we recommend going through the tutorials in the suggested order. FAQ What is the awork Onboarding Tutorial? It's a step by step tutorial that helps new users get to know the workspace and important features like creating projects, tracking time, working with docs, or using the planner. Can I control which onboarding sections users see? Yes. As a workspace admin, you can control which parts of the tutorial are visible for which permission roles. Where do I change onboarding visibility for a role? Go to Settings Rights Management , select a General Permission Role , and enable or disable sections under Visibility of Tasks in Onboarding Tutorial . How do I show or hide team progress? Enable Onboarding Progress to show the leaderboard (which equals team progress) for a role, or disable the option to hide the leaderboard. What happens if I hide an onboarding section for a role? Users with that role won't see the corresponding onboarding tasks anymore, and hidden tasks won't count toward team progress. Do admins always see team progress? Yes. Admins always have access to the leaderboard. For all other roles, visibility depends on your settings. I was invited as a user. How do I access the onboarding tutorial? Click the Support & Help button in the top right, then click Go to Tutorial to open your personalized guide.
Junico helps companies find unique freelance talent that is verified, certified, tested, and highly motivated. The Junico team knows every freelancer in the community personally and connects companies
Junico helps companies find unique freelance talent that is verified, certified, tested, and highly motivated. The Junico team knows every freelancer in the community personally and connects companies directly with suitable candidates. This personal approach is the foundation for more than 8,000 successful placements. Junico's motto: Only freelancers we'd stake our reputation on. [!NOTE] All freelancers on Junico's platform have free access to awork and can collaborate with you via awork Connect. Key Benefits and Use Cases Use the Junico partnership when you want to find talent quickly and keep collaboration simple: Find vetted freelancers that are verified, certified, and tested Get handpicked matches through Junico's personal placement process Collaborate seamlessly in awork since Junico freelancers have free access to awork Invite freelancers via awork Connect to work together in your awork project How to Use the Junico Partnership Find and Select a Freelancer on Junico Create a Junico account: Create Junico Account Post a job or reach out to Junico's experts about what you're looking for Get handpicked profiles Start a conversation with the freelancers Choose your favorite and start collaborating Collaborate in awork via awork Connect Create a new project in awork or open an existing project Invite the freelancer to the project via awork Connect FAQ What is Junico? Junico is a platform where companies find unique freelance talent that is verified, certified, tested, and highly motivated. The Junico team personally connects companies with suitable freelancers. How does Junico match me with suitable freelancers? You post a job or contact Junico's experts. Junico then sends you handpicked profiles that match your requirements. Do Junico freelancers have access to awork? Yes. All freelancers on Junico's platform have free access to awork. How do I invite a Junico freelancer to collaborate in awork? Create a new project in awork or open an existing project, then invite the freelancer to the project via awork Connect. What are the key steps to collaborate with freelancers through Junico? Create a Junico account, post a job or contact Junico's experts, receive handpicked profiles, start a conversation, select a freelancer, and then collaborate in awork by inviting them via awork Connect .
☝️ We're currently revamping our help center article on no|crm integration . If you have any questions, feel free to reach out to us anytime: support@awork.com.
First, you need to export your data from Meistertask. You can find instructions on how to export your data here: Export data from Meistertask. Meistertask exports the data as a .csv file. You can open
First, you need to export your data from Meistertask. You can find instructions on how to export your data here: Export data from Meistertask. Meistertask exports the data as a .csv file. You can open this with Excel. All the data is separated by commas in a single column. You can split the data into individual columns as follows: 1. Select the column containing the data 2. In Excel, go to Data and then Text to Columns 3. A pop up window will appear. Select the Delimited option 4. Choose the Comma option and click Finish Now the data will be displayed in individual columns. From here, you can copy the data into the awork import template. The field mapping is as follows: | awork | Meistertask | | | | | Project Name | Field not available in Meistertask export | | Client | Field not available in Meistertask export | | Task Name | name | | Description | notes | | Activity | Field not available in Meistertask export | | Start Date | Field not available in Meistertask export | | End Date | due date | | Planned Effort | Field not available in Meistertask export | | Assignee | assignee | | Status | section | After that, you can upload the data to awork as described here.
Watch video First, you'll need to export your data from Trello. You can find instructions on how to export your data here: Exporting Data from Trello. ☝️Important: Trello only allows data exports for
Watch video First, you'll need to export your data from Trello. You can find instructions on how to export your data here: Exporting Data from Trello. ☝️Important: Trello only allows data exports for Business Class customers. An alternative is to install the Trello Chrome Extension. Trello exports your data as a .csv file. You can open this with Excel. All your data will be separated by commas in a single column. You can split the data into individual columns like this: 1. Select the column with your data 2. Go to Data in Excel and then select Text to Columns 3. A pop up will appear. Now select the option Delimited 4. Choose the option Comma and click Finish Data Mapping Your data will now be displayed in individual columns. You can now copy this data into the awork import template. The field mapping is as follows: | awork | Trello | | | | | Project Name | Board Name | | Client | Name | | Task Name | Field not available in Trello export | | Description | Desc | | Activity | Field not available in Trello export | | Start Date | Field not available in Trello export | | Due Date | Due | | Planned Effort | Field not available in Trello export | | Assignee | Members | | Status | idList | Data Mapping via Chrome Extension | awork | Trello | | | | | Project Name | Board Name | | Client | Field not available in Trello export | | Task Name | Title | | Description | Description | | Activity | Field not available in Trello export | | Start Date | Field not available in Trello export | | Due Date | Due | | Planned Effort | Field not available in Trello export | | Assignee | Members | | Status | List | After that, you can upload your data to awork as described here.
Google Drive/Microsoft OneDrive Integration
Use this integration when you want files to stay in their original storage location but still be visible in awork. Key Benefits and Use Cases Attach files from your cloud storage to items like tasks,
Use this integration when you want files to stay in their original storage location but still be visible in awork. Key Benefits and Use Cases Attach files from your cloud storage to items like tasks, projects, and comments Keep files in your cloud storage while linking them in awork at the same time Share context in comments by inserting a linked file placeholder [!NOTE] Important: When you delete a linked cloud file in awork, only the link to awork is removed. The file remains in your cloud storage. How Google Drive and Microsoft OneDrive Integration Works Attaching a File from Google Drive or OneDrive 1. When uploading, select your cloud storage. A login window will open (if no window appears, see the troubleshooting section below) 2. Sign in with your account and browse your cloud storage 3. Select the file you want to attach 4. The file will then appear in your task, project, or as a placeholder in your comment Troubleshooting and Best Practices If linking files isn't working as expected, check here: The Login Window Isn't Opening If the pop up window doesn't open automatically, your browser is probably blocking it. Allow pop ups for your awork URL and then select your cloud storage again. Chrome: Click the icon in the address bar (top right) that indicates a blocked pop up, and allow pop ups for your awork URL Firefox: Click Settings in the yellow notification bar and allow the pop up for your awork URL Safari: Click the notification about blocked pop ups in the address bar (or the small window icon) to open the window. If that doesn't help, your browser may be blocking required cookies Edge: Click the icon in the address bar (top right) that indicates a blocked pop up, and allow pop ups for your awork URL Google Drive Connection Fails If the connection between Google Drive and awork fails, your domain might not allow additional app connections. Try this: Go to Google Drive Settings (Gear Icon) ⚙️ Manage apps Disconnect from Drive [!WARNING] Important: If you see the message Your domain does not allow to connect additional apps , your domain is restricting the connection. Then go back to awork and try attaching a file from Google Drive again. If you're asked to grant the app access to your Drive files, select Accept or Allow . A Colleague Can't Open the File A cloud file is only linked in awork. Having access to a task or project in awork doesn't automatically grant access to the file in cloud storage. [!WARNING] Permissions must be managed directly in your cloud storage. With Google Drive, you can send an access request when you open a file you don't have permission to access. These requests are easiest to handle if you connect awork and Google Drive with Slack. That way you can approve access requests with just one click. Reduce the Number of Sign Ins Save your Google or OneDrive login in your browser so sign in is reduced to just selecting an account. This is especially helpful if you work with multiple accounts and ensures that no account information needs to be saved per user in awork. Disable Google Drive or OneDrive It's not possible to disable Google Drive or OneDrive for your awork workspace. FAQ What Happens When I Delete a Google Drive or OneDrive File in awork? You can delete the file just like a regularly uploaded file. However, only the link to awork is removed. The file remains unchanged in your cloud storage. Why Isn't the Google Drive or OneDrive Login Window Opening? Your browser is probably blocking the pop up window. Allow pop ups for your awork URL and then select your cloud storage again. Why Is the Google Drive Connection to awork Failing? Your domain might be restricting additional app connections. Go to Settings (Gear Icon) ⚙️ Manage apps Disconnect from Drive in Google Drive. If you see the message Your domain does not allow to connect additional apps , this restriction is the cause. Why Can a Colleague See the Task but Can't Open the Linked File? The visibility of a task or project in awork doesn't automatically grant access to the file in cloud storage. File access must be shared separately in your cloud storage. Can I Disable Google Drive or OneDrive for My awork Workspace? No. It's not possible to disable Google Drive or OneDrive for your awork workspace.
Integrationen für Speicher & Teilen von Dokumenten
Connect USU with awork to manage your awork licenses centrally and with a clear overview. Key Benefits and Use Cases Use USU as your central platform for managing your awork licenses: Increase the num
Connect USU with awork to manage your awork licenses centrally and with a clear overview. Key Benefits and Use Cases Use USU as your central platform for managing your awork licenses: Increase the number of awork licenses and invite users with a single click from USU Invite existing USU users via email without having to manually enter their email addresses Deactivate and reactivate users in awork directly from USU Remove user licenses in USU with a single click How to Set Up the USU Integration Navigate to Applications in USU Click Add Applications in the top right Select awork from the list Sign in with your awork account when prompted Select the workspace you want to connect and grant USU access FAQ What is the USU integration? It connects USU (a tool for provisioning and user management) with awork so you can manage your awork licenses centrally. How do I set up the USU integration? Go to Applications in USU, click Add Applications , select awork , sign in to awork, and then select the workspace you want to grant access for. What can I manage with the integration? You can increase the number of licenses in awork, invite users, deactivate or reactivate users, and remove user licenses directly from USU.
memtime helps you automate time tracking in awork . The app runs in the background, records your working hours, and makes it easier to book time to projects. Key Benefits and Use Cases Track your time
memtime helps you automate time tracking in awork . The app runs in the background, records your working hours, and makes it easier to book time to projects. Key Benefits and Use Cases Track your time with less manual effort: Automatic time tracking in the background with the memtime app Active awork projects are available in memtime , so you can assign time to the right project Transfer tracked time to awork with a single click How to Set Up memtime Integration Create Accounts Create an awork account Download the memtime app Connect awork with memtime 1. Start the memtime app 2. Follow the instructions to sign in with your awork account Load Active Projects memtime automatically provides your active awork projects and notifies you when new projects become available. Start Time Tracking Start time tracking in memtime . Your working hours will be displayed in the overview and can be transferred to awork with a single click. FAQ How do I connect awork with memtime? Start the memtime app and follow the instructions to sign in with your awork account. Which awork projects are displayed in memtime? memtime automatically provides your active awork projects and notifies you when new projects become available. When will my working hours appear in memtime? Once you've started time tracking in memtime , your working hours will be displayed in the overview. How do I transfer tracked time to awork? After you've started time tracking in memtime , you can transfer your working hours to awork with a single click.
n8n is an extensible open source platform for workflow automation that lets you integrate awork with apps and services without any coding knowledge . Key Benefits and Use Cases Use n8n to automaticall
n8n is an extensible open source platform for workflow automation that lets you integrate awork with apps and services without any coding knowledge . Key Benefits and Use Cases Use n8n to automatically connect workflows between awork and your other tools. Automate data flows by connecting awork with other services and apps Work in both directions by pulling data from awork, processing it and forwarding it, or sending data back to awork Create workflows visually by setting up and connecting nodes in n8n's graphical interface How n8n Integration Works n8n uses nodes to connect awork with other services and apps. Nodes act as interfaces through which actions can be performed in both directions. Workflows are created by setting up nodes and connecting them to each other. You start with a trigger (start node) and then add nodes with the following actions . Supported actions in n8n for awork: Delete Get Head Options Patch Post Put [!NOTE] Tip: If you want the quickest way to get started, begin with the Community Node . If you need something more customized, use API calls with the HTTP Request Node . How to Use n8n Integration Create an n8n Account Sign up for an n8n account (n8n offers a 14 day free trial). Set Up the Integration To set up the n8n integration in awork , you have two options: Use the Community Node to add awork as a regular tool in n8n with pre built automations Use custom API calls with the HTTP Request Node if you need automations that aren't covered by the Community Node Option A: Install the Community Node 1. Go to Settings Community Nodes Install Enter in your n8n account 2. Enter the package name: 3. Find awork in your n8n workspace with all pre built automations 4. Start building your custom workflow Option B: Use the API with an HTTP Request Node 1. Click Add Workflow in your n8n account to start a new workflow 2. Decide when your workflow should start (for example, on a schedule or manually) 3. Add an HTTP Request Node to your workflow (details here) 4. Authenticate using a common authentication method and make API calls to awork to retrieve data via the URLs 5. Connect the awork node to another node to specify which action should follow the event triggered in awork [!WARNING] 👉🏼 Learn here how to get an API key for authentication. Finalize Your Workflow 1. Test the workflow to make sure the nodes are connected correctly 2. Save the workflow and activate it so it runs automatically For more information, check out n8n here. Tips Start simple by creating a workflow with a trigger and one action that follows Use the Community Node first if you want to use pre built awork automations in n8n Use the HTTP Request Node if you need custom API calls that go beyond what the Community Node can do FAQ What is n8n? n8n is an extensible, open source platform for workflow automation that lets you integrate awork with various apps and services without any coding knowledge. Should I use the Community Node or the API? Use the Community Node for the easiest setup with pre built awork automations. If that doesn't cover your needs, use custom API calls with the HTTP Request Node . Which actions are supported for awork in n8n? Supported actions are Delete , Get , Head , Options , Patch , Post , and Put . Where do I get an API key for authentication? Learn how to get an API key here: Create API Key.
Shift was built for people who manage multiple app and email accounts and therefore need to log in and out frequently. It offers numerous app integrations that help you work more productively. Key Ben
Shift was built for people who manage multiple app and email accounts and therefore need to log in and out frequently. It offers numerous app integrations that help you work more productively. Key Benefits and Use Cases Use Shift with awork when you want a more efficient workflow for managing multiple accounts. Fewer logins and logouts when you manage multiple app and email accounts Work more productively thanks to Shift's app integrations Use awork directly within Shift after you connect your account How to Set Up the Shift Integration 1. Click Add in Shift 2. Select Add Application 3. Search for awork 4. Click on the awork logo 5. Enter a name and logo for your awork connection 6. When you're redirected to awork, log in with your regular credentials [!WARNING] Important: During setup, you'll be redirected to awork and will log in there with your regular credentials. Now you can use awork directly within Shift . FAQ Do I need my awork login credentials to set up the integration? Yes. During setup, you'll be redirected to awork and will log in there with your regular credentials. Where do I use awork after setup? After setup, you can use awork directly within Shift.
OttoKit is an all in one automation platform that lets you seamlessly connect awork with your favorite tools to automate workflows and make your business processes more efficient all without any codin
OttoKit is an all in one automation platform that lets you seamlessly connect awork with your favorite tools to automate workflows and make your business processes more efficient all without any coding knowledge. Use the OttoKit integration for awork to create simple if/then automations with triggers and actions. Key benefits and use cases OttoKit connects awork with a wide range of tools and works in both directions: Automate cross app workflows by triggering actions in other apps through events in awork (and vice versa) Create if/then rules with a trigger (the "if") and an action (the "then") Get started quickly with simple setup that requires no prior knowledge Available triggers and actions The OttoKit integration for awork offers the following triggers and actions . Triggers (events that start automations): Client Added Project Added Project Member Added Project Task Added Task Status Changed User Added Time Entry Updated New Time Entry Time Entry Deleted Project Task Deleted Actions (tasks that run after a trigger): Create a new project Create a new client Create a new project task Assign a user to a task How to use OttoKit with awork Set up the integration using a webhook in awork In the OttoKit documentation, you'll find instructions on how to add a webhook in awork. [!NOTE] If you don't have an account yet, sign up for OttoKit (a free version with essential features to get you started is available). Create and publish your workflow In OttoKit, select a trigger and an action, then click Get Connected Edit the pre selected trigger and action, set up the events, and adjust the settings as needed Review your settings and test the workflow to make sure everything works correctly When you're ready, set the workflow to Publish . Your automation is now active and can be tested in your awork workspace [!WARNING] Important: You must be logged in to the connected apps. To start completely fresh, click Create a new workflow , give it a name, and configure the workflow from scratch. FAQ What is OttoKit? OttoKit is an all in one automation platform that connects awork with other tools to automate and optimize workflows and business processes without requiring any coding knowledge. Does the OttoKit integration work in both directions? Yes. An action in awork can trigger a reaction in another app, and actions in other apps can also trigger reactions in awork. Is there a free OttoKit plan? Yes. OttoKit offers a free version with essential features to get you started.
Use the awork add on for Google Sheets to import raw data from awork into your spreadsheets with just a few clicks. You control the import through a dedicated awork sidebar within Google Sheets. Main
Use the awork add on for Google Sheets to import raw data from awork into your spreadsheets with just a few clicks. You control the import through a dedicated awork sidebar within Google Sheets. Main Benefits and Use Cases Import awork data into Google Sheets when you want to create analyses, reports, or custom views. Import raw data from awork directly into your open spreadsheet Choose which data types you want to import Update your data anytime by running the import again through the sidebar What awork Data Can Be Imported into Google Sheets? You can import the following raw data: Tasks Users Time Projects How to Set Up the Google Sheets Integration Installing the awork Add on 1. Open awork in the Google Workspace Marketplace 2. Click Install in the Marketplace Or install the add on directly from Google Sheets: 1. In your spreadsheet, go to Extensions Add ons Install add on 2. Search for awork in the Marketplace 3. Click Install The add on will now be set up for your currently logged in Google account. How to Load awork Data into Google Sheets Opening the awork Sidebar In Google Sheets, go to Extensions awork Open Sidebar . [!WARNING] Note: It may take a few seconds for the add on to appear in the Extensions menu and for the sidebar to load. Signing In to the awork Add on Sign in to the sidebar once with your awork account. [!WARNING] Important: Refresh the Google Sheets page after you've successfully signed in. If the sidebar disappears, open it again using Extensions awork Open Sidebar . Importing Data 1. In the sidebar, check the boxes for the data you want to load 2. Click Load data . The data will be automatically retrieved and displayed in separate spreadsheets. Tips for Working with Imported Data [!WARNING] Do not edit the automatically created spreadsheets. When you update, all changes in these spreadsheets will be overwritten. To work with your data safely: Use references and lookups to analyze and display the raw data in your own spreadsheets. How to Update Data When you need current data, just run the import again. 1. Open the sidebar using Extensions awork Open sidebar 2. Click Load data The raw data in the automatically created spreadsheets will be overwritten and updated. If your reports reference this raw data, the new data will be automatically applied. FAQ What awork data can I import into Google Sheets? You can import raw data for Tasks , Users , Time , and Projects . Where do I find the awork sidebar in Google Sheets? Go to Extensions awork Open Sidebar . Why doesn't the add on appear right away? It can take a few seconds for the add on to load in the Extensions menu and for the sidebar contents to appear. Do I need to refresh Google Sheets after signing in? Yes. After you've successfully signed in, you should refresh the spreadsheet page once. If the sidebar is hidden, open it again using Extensions awork Open Sidebar . Can I edit the automatically created spreadsheets? No. If you edit them, your changes will be overwritten the next time you click Load data .
Connect your project management in awork with your business processes in helloHQ (CRM, quotes, invoicing, and controlling) and keep both systems in sync throughout your entire project lifecycle. Key B
Connect your project management in awork with your business processes in helloHQ (CRM, quotes, invoicing, and controlling) and keep both systems in sync throughout your entire project lifecycle. Key Benefits and Use Cases Use the helloHQ integration when you want to reduce duplicate data entry while improving data quality in your projects: Keep projects in sync across both tools by transferring project data from helloHQ to awork Use a shared project structure by syncing phases (lists) and tasks bidirectionally Support resource and capacity planning through synchronized assignments and (optionally) absences Transfer time entries for invoicing and controlling by syncing times tracked in awork to helloHQ Setting Up the helloHQ Integration The helloHQ x awork integration is activated by helloHQ Support. Request Activation from helloHQ Support 1. Send an email to: support@hellohq.io 2. Please provide the following information: 1. Your synchronization settings 2. Information about your workspaces (including your awork API key) 3. The setup confirmations listed below Synchronization Settings Should tasks and time entries be synchronized? Yes / No Should synchronization only go from awork to helloHQ? Yes / No Should absences be synchronized? Yes / No If yes: From which date should absences be synchronized? Workspace Information URL of your helloHQ workspace URL of your awork workspace awork API key Additional Information Has the old version of the helloHQ integration already been used? Yes / No Should the helloHQ project number be displayed in the awork project name? Yes / No Confirm Required Prerequisites Same email addresses: All team members use the same email address in both systems. Task type mapping: Task types in helloHQ correspond to activities in awork. Status value mapping: Status values match between both systems. Project templates in both systems: All project templates in helloHQ are also set up as project templates in awork. [!WARNING] Important: The helloHQ setting "Prevent reporting on closed tasks" must not be enabled. The corresponding awork setting "No reporting on closed projects" must be enabled. What Data Does the helloHQ Integration Sync? | Data | Direction | Notes | | | | | | Projects | helloHQ to awork | Project name, client, start date, end date | | Task lists (phases) | Bidirectional | helloHQ phases become lists in awork | | Tasks | Bidirectional | helloHQ level 2 tasks become awork tasks | | Subtasks | Bidirectional | Up to 3 levels supported (awork limit) | | Resource planning / assignments | Bidirectional | awork distributes effort evenly; helloHQ supports individual distributions | | Target values | Bidirectional | Displayed as at the end of the list name in awork | | Time entries (reporting) | awork to helloHQ | Used for invoicing and controlling in helloHQ | | Absences | helloHQ to awork | Optional; only full day absences are synchronized | What Data Is Not Synchronized? The following data is not transferred: CRM and lead data Quote content Client data Project status Invoicing and billing data Controlling data Task checklists Changes to task order after initial synchronization Time entries recorded in helloHQ How helloHQ and awork Work Together 1. Quote and Project Creation (helloHQ) Leads, quotes, and project creation happen in helloHQ. When a project is created in helloHQ, either directly or from a quote, it can be synchronized to awork immediately. The following information is automatically transferred: Project name Client Start date End date 2. Project Planning (helloHQ to awork) After synchronization: helloHQ phases become task lists in awork helloHQ tasks become awork tasks From that point on, changes in both systems are automatically synchronized. [!NOTE] Tip: For best results, you should have only one project plan per project, either in helloHQ or in awork, not in both systems simultaneously. Project templates in helloHQ should also be set up as project templates in awork. 3. Project Execution and Time Tracking (awork) Daily project work happens in awork, including: Tasks and subtasks Assignments Capacity planning Time tracking Capacity planning takes into account: Resource assignments from helloHQ Absences from helloHQ (if enabled) 4. Transfer of Time Entries (awork to helloHQ) Time tracked in awork is automatically transferred to helloHQ and assigned to the corresponding project and task. These times can then be used for: Invoicing Project controlling Profitability analysis 5. Invoicing and Controlling (helloHQ) All invoicing related processes are carried out exclusively in helloHQ: Billing rates Invoice generation Project controlling Profitability analysis Synchronized time entries are automatically assigned to the appropriate billing rates. Synchronization Details and Rules Task Synchronization The following properties are synchronized between awork and helloHQ: Name Description Assignments (staffing) Start date End date Target value Task type Task status Task Type and Status Value Mapping For synchronization to work correctly: Task types in helloHQ must correspond to activities in awork. Status values within task types must match task statuses in awork. One Way Synchronization (awork to helloHQ) If you prefer, task synchronization can be set up to go exclusively from awork to helloHQ . This is particularly useful when: Complex project structures are maintained in helloHQ Other integrations (e.g., Jira) are used Time Entry Synchronization [!NOTE] Important: Time entries can only be synchronized if the team members in question exist in both systems and use the same email address. No reverse sync: Time entries recorded in helloHQ are not transferred back to awork. Changes and deletions: Edited or deleted time entries are synchronized between both systems. Default task for time without assignment: Time entries recorded in awork without a task assignment are assigned to the admin task in helloHQ. Sync of billable flag: If the helloHQ setting "Automatically accept reporting" is disabled, the billable flag from awork is also synchronized. Absence Synchronization Absence synchronization is optional and can be disabled. Leading system: helloHQ is the leading system. Synchronization direction: Absences are transferred exclusively from helloHQ to awork. Supported absences: Only full day absences are synchronized. Overwriting changes: Absences created or edited in awork are overwritten by data from helloHQ. The following absence types are not synchronized: Home office and personal absences, as these don't affect capacity planning Synchronization Start Date When setting up, you must define a start date. Only absences that begin on or after this date will be synchronized. Troubleshooting and Best Practices Time entries aren't syncing: Check if the person exists in both systems and uses the same email address in both. Tasks aren't syncing correctly: Check if task types correspond to activities in awork and if status values match between both systems. Absences look wrong in awork: Remember: helloHQ is the leading system and overwrites absence changes in awork. Working with checklists: Task checklists are not synchronized. Changes to task order: Changes to task order after the initial synchronization are not transferred. More Resources You can find a detailed step by step setup guide in the helloHQ Integration Guide in the helloHQ Help Center. FAQ Which system is the leading one for absences? helloHQ is the leading system. Absences are transferred exclusively from helloHQ to awork. Changes in awork are overwritten by helloHQ. Why aren't my time entries syncing to helloHQ? Time entries are only synchronized if the person exists in both systems and uses the same email address in both. Are time entries recorded in helloHQ transferred to awork? No. Time entries recorded in helloHQ are not synchronized to awork. Are task checklists synchronized? No. Task checklists are not synchronized. Can the integration sync in only one direction? Yes. Task synchronization can be set up to go exclusively from awork to helloHQ if you prefer.
OS/ is the state of the art project controlling software for agencies and production studios of all sizes. With modern OS/ features like drag and drop project calculation, true labor costs, benchmarks
OS/ is the state of the art project controlling software for agencies and production studios of all sizes. With modern OS/ features like drag and drop project calculation, true labor costs, benchmarks, forecasting, the overhead cost factor, and OS/ real time financial statements, companies of all sizes get a simple overview of their project and business profitability plus meaningful forecasts. OS/ & awork OS/ and awork are a truly magical duo of project controlling and project management. You can juggle multiple projects with ease, never lose track, and always stay in control of your financial success. Projects Once you've set up your OS/ awork integration (instructions), your OS/ projects are automatically created in awork and shared with your project team. Of course, all data like customer, title, start date, end date, and project team are transferred and updated with every change. Resources The awork time budget is taken directly from your OS/ calculation and constantly updated. This way you can always plan your projects and tasks in awork with current information, and your team always knows what resources are available to them. If you want, your project calculation is also transferred to awork. This means you can see how many resources you have in each project phase, plan even more precisely, and see exactly where you stand right now. Time Tracking Work hours can be logged directly in awork or via myOS/ using voice input and are immediately transferred to OS/. This lets your team work in one place while project management always has the latest information on effort and costs. Time tracking couldn't be easier. Of course, OS/ syncs your price list with awork, so your team can log their services directly and you can bill them. OS/ also syncs activities to awork. If you log time in awork for an activity that comes from OS/, it's automatically transferred to OS/. When you log time for a task that was synced from OS/ (recognizable by the small OS/ tag), the time is booked directly to the corresponding service position in your OS/ budget and the associated activity is transferred. Billing Time Ready to bill work hours? Easy. OS/ takes your time entries from awork and you can conveniently bill them in OS/. If you like, you can add them to your project price or other costs too. Billed time entries are naturally marked as billed in awork as soon as the corresponding invoice is issued. That way you'll never forget to bill an hour again. Even better, OS/ calculates your actual labor costs from your time entries. So along with your work hours, you always have the financial effort you spent on a customer or project, and you know not just how many hours you could bill, but what share of labor costs. And More... OS/ continuously updates the status of your awork projects transparently to your team. Everyone knows right away if a project has been confirmed or completed. Your awork customer list is constantly updated and you can easily access your awork project via the logo in the project list. How to Connect awork with OS/ To connect awork with OS/, go to awork under Settings / Integrations / API Clients and click the "+ API Client" button to create an API key. 1. Open Settings / Integrations in your awork Workspace 2. Add the following API key via "+ API Client" Name : OS/ Api Key Client ID : os api id Redirect URI : http://localhost/os api (don't forget to click the + button) 3. Go to OS/ and navigate to Workspace Settings on the "Integrations" tab 4. Under "Available Integrations" you'll find awork 5. Click the "+ Add" button on the awork tile, enter your awork API key, and click "Save" Done! Your integration is now set up successfully. If you need help, just reach out to the OS/ support chat! Learn more about the integration here
To use awork on the go, there's a dedicated app for both iOS and Android. Download it from your respective store: awork App in the App Store awork App in Google Play Store Having trouble downloading t
To use awork on the go, there's a dedicated app for both iOS and Android. Download it from your respective store: awork App in the App Store awork App in Google Play Store Having trouble downloading the apps? Check out the official support articles for the App Store or Google Play Store. Is there an awork iPad app? There isn't a dedicated iPad app from awork. In principle, you can install the mobile iOS version on iPads, but it has far fewer features than the browser version of awork. Since the awork browser version runs perfectly on iPad, we recommend skipping the mobile app for iPads and using awork in your iPad's browser instead. ☝️ Tip: iPad OS, just like apps from the App Store, allows you to create app icons from websites on your home screen. So you can open awork in your browser and simply add it to your home screen. The awork mobile app includes the following features: Tasks Projects Notifications Search Primarily, the awork app on iOS or Android serves as a supplement to the web app. This means not all features from the web version are available on mobile. The mobile version focuses more on your own tasks, time tracking, and receiving and viewing notifications. Tasks The awork app lets you view tasks in list format, edit them, and quickly and easily create new tasks. You can view, create, or edit tasks in the first tab of the bottom navigation bar ( My Tasks ) or directly within a project. Task overview Create a new task View and edit task details Adjust task status Tag users in tasks/projects Task Overview The My Tasks section, the first tab in the bottom navigation bar, shows all tasks assigned to you in awork. Tasks are displayed here in list format. By default, tasks are separated into private and project tasks and grouped by project. You can customize this view. Group and sort your task list You can freely group and sort your tasks. To do this, pull the task list down slightly. The corresponding icon buttons will appear at the top. Click on them to change the grouping and sorting. Create a new task In the My Tasks view, you can click the add button in the bottom right to create new tasks. The fields are largely the same as you'll find in the web app. Tasks created without a project are created as private tasks. View and Edit Task Details Tapping on a task opens a window with task details. Here you can view and edit all the task's details. Adjust Task Status You can view and adjust a task's status in the task overview. Simply tap the status or the checkbox circle of the task. A selection of all available task statuses will appear. Choose the status you want. In a task's details, you'll find the status in the bottom right. Add Comments In the project or task details, you can add comments. To do this, tap the chat icon in the bottom left of the detail window. To tag users in tasks or projects, simply tap the @ symbol or type an @. To react to a displayed comment, swipe right over the comment to bring up the emoji selection button. To see who has already reacted to a comment, tap and hold the emoji displayed below the comment. A popup will show the users who reacted with the selected emoji. Delete Tasks When you open a task's details, you can delete it using the trash icon in the bottom left. Projects In the mobile app, you can view projects and create new ones or edit existing ones. You'll find projects in the second tab of the bottom navigation bar. Project Overview The project overview shows all your projects. Here, similar to the web version, you can switch between three quick views. Active : All projects currently in progress (yellow status) My Active : Active projects where you're a member All : All projects (regardless of their status) Tapping on a project in the list opens its details or its tasks. Create a New Project You can create new projects using the add button in the bottom right. During project creation, you can fill in the fields you know from the web version, such as: Project name Project members Clients Project type End date You can edit these entries later in the project details. View Project Details Tapping on a project in the project overview opens its details. In this view, you'll see the selected project at the top and all its tasks and task lists directly below. Tapping the project again at the top opens a window with the actual project details. Here you can view and edit values for name, description, end date, and more. Time Tracking With the awork app, you can quickly and easily track your time and get an overview of the hours you've logged. Overview of Your Tracked Time In the third tab of the bottom navigation bar, you'll find an overview of your tracked hours. You can see your logged time in a weekly overview and switch between days by tapping on them. Swipe left or right to navigate to the next or previous week. Track Time with the Start Stop Timer You can start the time tracking timer using the add button in the bottom right. The timer starts and a window opens where you can select additional information like the project, a task, and so on, to which the time should be tracked. You can close the window with or without entering information using the save button, and the timer will continue running until you stop it by tapping the stop icon. You can reopen the running entry at any time by tapping the counting time and, for example, add a note. Start the Start Stop Timer Directly on Tasks In the task overview, either in a project or under My Tasks , you can swipe left on a task row to reveal a few action buttons. Here you'll find a play button to start time tracking directly on that task. Add Time Retroactively If you don't want to use the start stop timer for time tracking, you can of course simply add time retroactively. The process is the same as when starting the timer in the Time tab. Tap the add button in the bottom right. A timer will start, but as soon as you select a duration or end time in the window that opens, the timer is ignored and you create a regular time entry. Edit and Delete Time Entries In your tracked time overview, you can edit them afterwards. Simply tap on a time entry and a window opens to edit its details. Here you can also delete the entry using the trash icon in the bottom left. ☝️ Note: Keep in mind that the same restrictions apply here as in the web version, and billed time, for example, can no longer be edited. Notifications To stay updated with your projects, you can receive push notifications through the mobile app. When your iOS or Android device asks you to, you'll need to allow push notifications for awork. ☝️ Note: Notification settings can only be edited in the web version. There you can set which notifications you want to receive on your smartphone. Notifications Overview In the fourth tab of the bottom navigation bar, you'll find the notifications overview. All notifications are displayed here in chronological order. Similar messages, like being assigned to a task by someone, are grouped together. To mark notifications as read, swipe the row left in the notifications overview and tap the checkbox button. If you swipe far enough, the checkbox turns green and you don't need to tap it. The entry is automatically marked as read and disappears from the overview. If you've enabled in your profile settings that notifications disappear when navigating, simply tapping the notification is enough to mark it as read. In App Notifications When a notification appears while you have the app open, a banner with the message will appear at the top. You can tap directly on this popup to be taken to the relevant section, or ignore it and view the message later in the notifications overview. Search You'll find the search in the bottom navigation bar on the far right. Here you can search for tasks and projects. awork also suggests relevant results for you even without a search term. Tapping on search results opens the respective project or task.
Time is your team's most valuable resource. Especially in project based work, creating projects and tasks often needs to happen fast. The AI features help you save time. [!NOTE] You can find informati
Time is your team's most valuable resource. Especially in project based work, creating projects and tasks often needs to happen fast. The AI features help you save time. [!NOTE] You can find information about awork AI Smart Project Assistant in a dedicated Help Center article here. Key Benefits and Use Cases When you need to move quickly, AI in awork gives you the perfect starting point. Start new projects in minutes with automatically suggested tasks Expand existing projects by generating new tasks with AI Make brainstorming easier to develop and refine ideas How to Use the AI Tools Create a New Project with AI 1. When creating a new project, navigate to the templates 2. Select Create with AI 3. Describe what kind of project you want to start (ideas, goals, requirements, constraints) 4. Click on Suggest Tasks 5. Review the suggested task list (including task descriptions) 6. If needed, add more context and generate an improved suggestion 7. When you're happy with it, click on Create Project [!NOTE] Tip: The more context you provide to the AI, the more precise the results will be tailored to your needs. Add New Tasks to an Existing Project You can also expand ongoing projects with new task lists using AI. 1. Navigate to your project 2. Create a new task list 3. Click on Create Tasks with AI at the bottom of the empty list 4. Describe the problem or what you're planning to do and click on Suggest Tasks 5. Review the suggested tasks 6. Click on Accept Tasks to add them to your project, or refine your input and try again Tips and Security Provide more context so the results become more precise Refine the suggestion by providing additional information if you're not satisfied yet Accept only when it's right [!NOTE] Please note: The AI function is based on Microsoft's Azure OpenAI. Like all your awork data, data created by the AI function is hosted in Microsoft data centers. We do not transmit data to other tools (such as OpenAI's ChatGPT). No data is shared with other services , and your data is not used to improve the models. FAQ How do I create a new project with AI? In the project templates, select Create with AI , add a description, and click on Suggest Tasks . When you're happy with the result, click on Create Project . How can I add AI generated tasks to existing projects? Create a new task list in a project and use Create Tasks with AI at the bottom of the empty list. After that, you can transfer the generated tasks directly to your project using Accept Tasks . What can I do if the AI generated task suggestion doesn't quite fit? Simply provide the AI with more information. The more context you give, the more precise the results will be. You can keep refining the suggestion before you accept it. How is data security ensured? Data created by the AI function is hosted in Microsoft data centers. No data is transmitted to other tools (such as OpenAI's ChatGPT). Additionally, no data is transferred to other services, and your data is not used to improve the models.
awork AI has huge potential to simplify your project work. There are only a few things that AI can't solve, but the list of what's possible is nearly endless. To get you started with awork AI, we've c
awork AI has huge potential to simplify your project work. There are only a few things that AI can't solve, but the list of what's possible is nearly endless. To get you started with awork AI, we've compiled the most commonly used prompts so far. Have fun prompting! Basic Examples for Agencies "Write a project update for my client." "Give me an overview of all my projects and tasks." "Move all future tasks in this project by 2 weeks." "Check if my design team has 30 hours of free capacity next week." "Which tasks are urgent for me this week?" Pro Examples for Agencies "Create a portfolio status of all active client projects for this week: progress, deadlines, risks, and recommended actions. Highlight everything with risk." "Create a client ready status email for client X from the current project: completed, in progress, risks, and next steps with dates. Keep it short and on brand." "Check team capacity for the next 2 weeks and suggest assignments for all unassigned or overdue tasks in this project. Consider roles, skills, and time off." "Move all milestones and dependent tasks from today by 5 working days. Update deadlines, resolve conflicts, and summarize the changes." "Draft a 1 page creative brief for the task 'Homepage Redesign' based on the latest meeting notes and project documents. Include goals, target audience, deliverables, and acceptance criteria." "Find tasks where my team is likely missing time entries this week, and suggest hours based on previous patterns. Prepare the booking for my confirmation." "Run a batch update for this project: Add the tag 'Q4 Campaign' to all tasks in the 'Launch' list, assign owners based on current workload, and set due dates this month." "Create the sprint plan for the next 2 weeks from the backlog: Select the top 15 by priority, estimate effort, set dependencies, and assign users." Proven Workflows Use Case: Project Summaries and Insights "Write a project update for my client." "Is this project at risk? Why?" "Can this project be completed on time?" "Summarize the time logged in this project." "How many hours were logged in this project in August?" "Compare the logged hours with the retainer budget." Use Case: Edit Tasks in a Project "Sort the tasks in list X by due date." "Sort the tasks in list X by assigned users." "Add task X as a subtask to task Y." "Convert subtask Y into a parent task." "Make subtask Y the parent task of task X." "Add an effort estimate to task Y." "Move task X to project B." Use Case: Edit Multiple Tasks and Subtasks in Batch "Change the names of all tasks that start with 'Q3' to 'Q4'." "Change the name of every subtask of task Y that contains 'Q3' to 'Q4'." "Add 'Q4' to the name of all tasks in task list Z." "Add tag X to all subtasks that start with 'Q4'." "Assign all tasks that have 'Q4' in their name to user A." Use Case: Edit Document "Improve the text in this document." "Improve the formatting of this document." "Add a paragraph about topic X to this document." "Expand paragraph Y and add more context." "Add possible next steps for section Z." "Create tasks from this document and assign them to users." Use Case: Project Planning "Create a realistic project plan based on the tasks in this project with start and end dates for each task plus planned effort per task. Also add dependencies." "Assign users with free capacity to the tasks based on task type." "Person X is on vacation next week. Find a replacement." "Task Y takes 5 days longer. Adjust the plan and dependencies." "We need to complete task Y before task X. Adjust the plan and dependencies accordingly." "Group the tasks in the project by discipline and create lists for design, engineering, etc." Use Case: Time Tracking "Identify tasks where I might have forgotten to log time this week." "Suggest which tasks I might have forgotten to log time for." "Suggest, based on my previously logged time, where I might have forgotten to log time." "Show me a comparison of my logged hours with my capacity for this week." "Copy my logged hours from last week to this week."
The awork Browser Extension for Time Tracking (Chrome & Arc)
The awork browser extension lets you track time with just one click, no matter which tab you're on. All your data automatically syncs with your awork account to keep your workflow seamless. Switch bet
The awork browser extension lets you track time with just one click, no matter which tab you're on. All your data automatically syncs with your awork account to keep your workflow seamless. Switch between tasks, tabs, and tools without losing track of your time. Browser Extension Details Time Tracking Options With the browser extension, you have access to all the essential time tracking features awork offers. The time you log gets transferred to your connected workspace in real time. The extension gives you these time tracking functions: Start and stop the timer for projects or tasks Pause the timer Discard the timer Set time as billable or non billable Default Project When you start the timer through the extension, your time automatically gets logged to a project or task you've selected. If you haven't picked a project, it'll use the default project you set up beforehand. To set your default project, click "Open settings" in the top right corner of the awork extension. From there, you can pick a project from your workspace. When you start the timer through the extension and don't have a project selected, your time will automatically be logged to your default project. Timer Integration With direct timer integration, you can display the classic awork timer in tools like Github, Pipedrive, MOCO, and helloHQ. You can stop, pause, or discard the timer right there. To show the timer in these tools, open "Settings" in the top right corner of the browser extension. You'll see all the tools where you can turn on this timer integration. Once you check a tool, the integration activates and you can use the awork timer on that tool's pages. Open Dashboard Use the "Open awork" button in the top right corner of the browser extension to jump straight to your connected workspace. Browser Icon Status The awork icon for the browser extension has three different color statuses that show you whether the extension is active: Gray awork icon: You're not logged into your awork account and you're not tracking time. Black awork icon: You're logged into your awork account and you're not tracking time. Purple awork icon: You're logged into your awork account and you're currently tracking time. How to Install the Extension: 1. Open the Chrome Web Store 2. Search for the awork extension and select it 3. Click "Add" 4. Confirm the required permissions and click "Add extension" 5. Click the awork icon next to your address bar to set up the extension 6. A window will open where you can sign in 7. Sign in to awork and choose a workspace if you have more than one 8. Click the awork icon in your browser extensions again to open and start using the timer Once connected, the extension stays permanently synced with your awork workspace. For more info on installing extensions in Chrome, check out this guide.
Tracked time can be transferred to invoices via time reports. By clicking on the dollar icon and selecting Create invoice , you'll start a workflow to transfer your time entries to a new or existing i
Tracked time can be transferred to invoices via time reports. By clicking on the dollar icon and selecting Create invoice , you'll start a workflow to transfer your time entries to a new or existing invoice in an integrated invoicing tool. Integrate an invoicing tool Here you can learn how to integrate one of the supported invoicing tools so you can use it here. New invoice vs. existing invoice draft You can either add the line items to an existing invoice draft or create a new invoice. Consolidating line items There are several options for how you can consolidate the time entries from your report into invoice line items: Groups = Line items : Only the group headings with the summed totals are transferred as invoice line items (only possible if the data in the time report is grouped) Totals = Line items: Only the totals of the line items are transferred as invoice line items (only possible if the data in the time report is summed up) Time entries = Line items: Each time entry is transferred as its own line item on the invoice Choose line item text and unit of measurement In this step, you can choose what should be displayed as the line item text on the invoice. Your options are: Project name Task name Username You can also decide whether the time should be transferred to the invoice in hours or days. One day is calculated as 8 hours. Adjust data and enter prices In the second to last step, you'll see each line item again and can edit them manually. You can make the following changes: Change the line item name Adjust the number of hours or days Delete a line item Change the order of line items Create a new line item For the line items, you'll need to enter the prices in this step. Mark time as invoiced and create the invoice In the final step, you can mark all time entries that have been transferred to the invoice as invoiced and create the invoice in your invoicing tool. You can now close the window or go directly to your invoicing tool.
What does "My Tracked Times" show? In the Times menu item, you'll find an overview of all the times you've tracked. There are three different views available here: My Day My Week My Times ☝️ Note: You
What does "My Tracked Times" show? In the Times menu item, you'll find an overview of all the times you've tracked. There are three different views available here: My Day My Week My Times ☝️ Note: You can also view tracked time directly on the task. To do this, go to your task's detail view and click on the green "Accrued" button in the task KPIs (Due date, Planned, Accrued, Progress). A small window will open showing you all the times tracked so far for that task. You can find more information here. My Day Daily View The My Day view shows you all the times you've tracked today (or on another selected day). A circular progress bar at the top left fills up as you log time. The maximum value of the display is your weekly capacity divided by 5. Directly below that is a list of all times tracked for that day. Track Times with Click & Drag In the middle and right area, you'll see a timeline with the times of day. You can create new time tracking entries here using click and drag. With drag and drop, you can move times around and adjust the start and end times. The dashed lines indicate two things: 1. When you first opened awork on that day. 2. The current time Suggestions Based on Activity in awork To the right of your tracked times, you'll find suggestions ( Activity ) from awork showing which elements you might still want to log time for. These are based on completed tasks, times you regularly track, and so on. When you click on these, the window for creating a new time entry will automatically be filled in with the information, and you can save it. If you don't want to receive these suggestions, you can hide them in your account settings (accessible through the user menu in the top right of the screen). Track Times from Calendar Events You can integrate your Google, Apple, or Microsoft calendar on the right using the calendar icon. Your appointments will then be displayed in the timeline, and you can add a new time entry with a single click on an appointment. Here you can learn how to integrate your calendar. My Week Weekly View In the My Week view, you see all the times for the week. The weekly view works without specific times. All time tracking entries for each day are displayed, and the height represents the duration of each entry. ☝️ Note: The time blocks displayed in the "My Week" view are based on your specified weekly capacity. For example, if you only have 4 hours of availability on Monday, the time block will only be displayed for 4 hours. Add Times By clicking on the dashed boxes, you can add new times. awork automatically fills in the duration with 8 hours. This way, you can easily track your entire week with full day entries. Move Times You can drag and drop times in the weekly view between different days or change their duration by dragging the bottom edge to make them larger or smaller. My Times List View In the My Times view, you can see an overview of all your tracked times. Additionally, you can export your times, search for a specific time entry, and group the entries as you like using the icons in the top right. ☝️ Important: Times from timers that are still running are not displayed here. ☝️ Note: Absences only appear once a time period has been selected. Edit Times Individually or Multiple at Once There are several ways to edit times in this view: Edit individually: Click the action button on an entry to open a window where you can make changes. Edit multiple at once: Use the checkboxes to the left of the entries to select them. An action menu will then appear at the bottom, allowing you to perform actions like "mark as billed". You can also select all entries in a group using the checkbox in the list header. Depending on your permissions in the rights management, you can also change the project, task, or user for multiple entries at the same time. FAQ Can absences be displayed in the list view of times? No, only the sum of absence days in the selected time period is shown in the box at the top of the page. Individual absences are not listed separately.
🪢 Want to invite your external users and collaborate with them? Then check out the awork Connect article here. Getting Started & Invitations How does awork Connect work? With awork Connect, a person
🪢 Want to invite your external users and collaborate with them? Then check out the awork Connect article here. Getting Started & Invitations How does awork Connect work? With awork Connect, a person gets access to a project from another workspace. The invited person is added as an external user and will then see the shared project in their workspace. The requirement is that a workspace exists. If not, one can be created for free. The invitation also provides the person with information about using awork Connect and the next steps. Accepting an invitation External people receive an invitation link via email. If they already have an awork account and workspace, the shared project will appear there directly. If they have multiple workspaces, they'll need to choose which one the project should be displayed in this decision cannot be reversed later. If a change becomes necessary, the admin can remove the external person and invite them again. However, this is only recommended if the person hasn't been heavily used yet (for example, assigned to tasks) otherwise that data will be lost. Usage & Plans Basic Connect Plan External people without an active awork subscription automatically receive the Basic Connect Plan. This is free and includes almost all functions of the Basic tier the Data Importer is currently excluded. You can have as many external projects as you want, but can only create one of your own. If you need more projects, you can start a 14 day trial of the Professional Plan. After the trial ends, you can either switch back to the Basic Connect Plan or purchase a paid subscription. Trial version or previous subscription If an external project is shared and the invited person has already used the 14 day trial or had a subscription before, the project cannot be used directly in the old workspace. In this case, there are two options: either the person creates a new workspace on the free Basic Connect Plan, or they purchase a paid subscription in the old workspace. Working in awork as an External User Searching in awork as an external Connect user Standard search criteria apply to content in your own workspace that doesn't belong to external projects. External users can also find content from other projects that they have access to through the search function. Learn more about this in this article. Collaboration When it comes to collaboration, you have various options available: You can mention project members in comments, create your own project, and create as many private tasks as you want. However, private tasks are only for you adding other users is not possible. As an external user, you don't have access to project settings. Time & Planning There are also some special considerations when it comes to time and planning. All time you log is generally saved in the workspace that invited you. You can find this time in your "Time" menu item, but not in time reports. You don't have access to workload. However, you can schedule tasks in your own calendar this doesn't affect the workspace where the project originally came from. FAQ Do I have to pay for awork as an external user? No, there are no costs for Connect users. Collaboration with external users is free. How do I identify external projects? The shared project is marked with the logo of the original workspace in the bottom right of the project display. External projects appear in the main menu under "External Projects" as well as in the project overview and in dashboard filters. What are the differences compared to internal users? Internal users with licenses can do much more: Use task filters Plan capacity (workload & calendar) Take on project leadership Create multiple projects Filter in time reports Use automations Be added to teams External users cannot do these things. Can I access the planner as an external user? Yes, you can access the planner, but you'll only see yourself and your own or external projects. You cannot schedule tasks or check your workload. You can manage tasks through the calendar instead.